diff options
| author | giraffedata <giraffedata@9d0c8265-081b-0410-96cb-a4ca84ce46f8> | 2020-07-11 03:14:39 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | giraffedata <giraffedata@9d0c8265-081b-0410-96cb-a4ca84ce46f8> | 2020-07-11 03:14:39 +0000 |
| commit | a87703a515ec08a0637c2b3b3e6cd0ef1a7e78ff (patch) | |
| tree | 0e462a89e51e65b0d293104f437aa371d8e56ee1 | |
| parent | e4dbb262ce92440414dad7735f9b9264e47cffa0 (diff) | |
| download | netpbm-mirror-a87703a515ec08a0637c2b3b3e6cd0ef1a7e78ff.tar.gz netpbm-mirror-a87703a515ec08a0637c2b3b3e6cd0ef1a7e78ff.tar.xz netpbm-mirror-a87703a515ec08a0637c2b3b3e6cd0ef1a7e78ff.zip | |
cleanup
git-svn-id: http://svn.code.sf.net/p/netpbm/code/userguide@3893 9d0c8265-081b-0410-96cb-a4ca84ce46f8
122 files changed, 6609 insertions, 6154 deletions
diff --git a/bioradtopgm.html b/bioradtopgm.html index 980154d6..1007d29b 100644 --- a/bioradtopgm.html +++ b/bioradtopgm.html @@ -1,60 +1,64 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Bioradtopbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>bioradtopgm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Bioradtopbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>bioradtopgm</h1> Updated: 28 June 1993 -<BR> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> bioradtopgm - convert a Biorad confocal file into a PGM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>bioradtopgm</B> -[<B>-image#</B>] -[<I>imagedata</I>] +<b>bioradtopgm</b> +[<b>-image#</b>] +[<i>imagedata</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>bioradtopgm</b> reads a Biorad confocal file as input and produces a PGM image as output. If the resulting image is upside -down, run it through <B>pamflip -tb</B>. +down, run it through <b>pamflip -tb</b>. + +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>bioradtopgm</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-image#</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-image#</b> -<DD> +<dd> A Biorad image file may contain more than one image. With this option, you can specify which image to extract (only one at a time). The first image in the file has number zero. If no image number is supplied, only information about the image size and the number of images in the input is printed out. No output is produced. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pamflip.html">pamflip</A>, -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<a href="pamflip.html">pamflip</a>, +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> -<H2 id="authors">AUTHORS</H2> +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> Copyright (C) 1993 by Oliver Trepte -<BR> - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#authors">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<br> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/cameratopam.html b/cameratopam.html index 4a348178..b50bfeb7 100644 --- a/cameratopam.html +++ b/cameratopam.html @@ -1,16 +1,15 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Cameratopam User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>cameratopam</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Cameratopam User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>cameratopam</h1> Updated: 12 April 2005 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> cameratopam - convert raw camera image to PAM -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <b>cameratopam</b> @@ -33,12 +32,12 @@ cameratopam - convert raw camera image to PAM [<b>-verbose</b>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or an equals sign between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -54,7 +53,12 @@ format. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>cameratopam</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> <dt><b>-identify_only</b> @@ -97,7 +101,7 @@ color balance based on a white card photographed in sunlight. <dt><b>-balance_camera</b> <dd>Use the color balance specified by the camera. If -<B>cameratopam</B> can't find this, it prints a warning and reverts to +<b>cameratopam</b> can't find this, it prints a warning and reverts to the default. <dt><b>-red_scale=</b><i>float</i> @@ -149,15 +153,15 @@ means. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="411toppm.html">411toppm</A>, -<A HREF="pamflip.html">pamflip</A>, -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A>, +<a href="411toppm.html">411toppm</a>, +<a href="pamflip.html">pamflip</a>, +<a href="pam.html">pam</a>, -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><b>cameratopam</b> was new in Netpbm 10.28 (June 2005). +<p><b>cameratopam</b> was new in Netpbm 10.28 (June 2005). <p>It was derived from the program <a href="http://www.cybercom.net/~dcoffin/dcraw/"><b>dcraw</b> by Dave @@ -169,14 +173,14 @@ split the source code into manageable pieces (<b>dcraw</b> has a single 5000 line source file). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<li><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<li><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<li><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<li><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<li><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/cistopbm.html b/cistopbm.html index 35ca58a0..d18c0f22 100644 --- a/cistopbm.html +++ b/cistopbm.html @@ -1,21 +1,21 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Cistopbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>cistopbm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Cistopbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>cistopbm</h1> Updated: 05 July 2009 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> cistopbm - convert Compuserve RLE image to PBM -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>cistopbm</B> -[<B>-i</B>] -[<I>cisfile</I>] +<b>cistopbm</b> +[<b>-i</b>] +[<i>cisfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -24,6 +24,11 @@ and produces a PBM image as output. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>cistopbm</b> recognizes the following +command line option: + <dl> <dt><b>-i</b> @@ -31,32 +36,32 @@ and produces a PBM image as output. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> <ul> -<li><A HREF="pbmtocis.html">pbmtocis</A> -<li><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<li><a href="pbmtocis.html">pbmtocis</a> +<li><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> <a href="http://staticweb.rasip.fer.hr/research/compress/algorithms_run-length_coding.htm#examples">CompuServe RLE file format</a> </ul> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>cistopbm</b> was new in Netpbm 10.48 (September 2009). -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 2009 John Elliot <jce@seasip.demon.co.uk> -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/fiascotopnm.html b/fiascotopnm.html index d8e25510..c33f7012 100644 --- a/fiascotopnm.html +++ b/fiascotopnm.html @@ -1,19 +1,19 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Fiascotopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>fiascotopnm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Fiascotopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>fiascotopnm</h1> Updated: 12 July 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> fiascotopnm - Convert compressed FIASCO image to PGM, or PPM -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>fiascotopnm </B> -[<I>option</I>]... -[<I>filename</I>]... +<b>fiascotopnm </b> +[<i>option</i>]... +[<i>filename</i>]... <p>All option names may be abbreviated; for example, --output may be written --outp or --ou. For all options an one letter short option @@ -22,201 +22,206 @@ mandatory or optional for short options, too. Both short and long options are case sensitive. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>fiascotopnm</B> decompresses the named FIASCO files, or the +<p><b>fiascotopnm</b> decompresses the named FIASCO files, or the Standard Input if no file is named, and writes the images as PGM, or PPM files, depending on whether the FIASCO image is black and white or color. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-o</B>[<I>name</I>], <B>--output=</B>[<I>name</I>] +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>fiascotopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> Write decompressed image to the file <I>name</I>.ppm (if PPM) or -<I>name</I>.pgm (if PGM). If <I>name</I> is <b>-</b>, then produce +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-o</b>[<i>name</i>], <b>--output=</b>[<i>name</i>] + +<dd> Write decompressed image to the file <i>name</i>.ppm (if PPM) or +<i>name</i>.pgm (if PGM). If <i>name</i> is <b>-</b>, then produce the image file on the standard output. The optional argument -<I>name</I> can be omitted, then the input filename is used as +<i>name</i> can be omitted, then the input filename is used as basename with the suffix .ppm or .pgm. In case of video streams, the -frames are stored in the files <I>name</I>.<B>N</B>.ppm where <B>N</B> +frames are stored in the files <i>name</i>.<b>N</b>.ppm where <b>N</b> is the frame number (of the form 00..0 - 99..9); output on the standard output is not possible with video streams. -<P> If <I>name</I> is a relative path and the environment variable -<B>FIASCO_IMAGES</B> is a (colon-separated) list of directories, then +<p> If <i>name</i> is a relative path and the environment variable +<b>FIASCO_IMAGES</b> is a (colon-separated) list of directories, then the output file(s) are written to the first (writable) directory of this list. Otherwise, the current directory is used to store the output file(s). -<DT><B>-z</B>, <B>--fast</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-z</b>, <b>--fast</b> +<dd> Decompress images in the 4:2:0 format; i.e., each chroma channel is decompressed to an image of halved width and height. Use this option on slow machines when the desired frame rate is not achieved; the output quality is only slightly decreased. -<DT><B>-d</B>, <B>--double</B><DD> +<dt><b>-d</b>, <b>--double</b><dd> Double the size of the X11 window both in width and height; no pixel interpolation is used, each pixel is just replaced by four identical pixels. -<DT><B>-p</B>, <B>--panel</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-p</b>, <b>--panel</b> +<dd> Show a panel with play, stop, pause, record and exit buttons to control the display of videos. When pressing the record button, all frames are decompressed and stored in memory. The other buttons work in the usual way. -<DT><B>-m</B> <I>N</I>, <B>--magnify=</B><I>N</I> -<DD> +<dt><b>-m</b> <i>N</i>, <b>--magnify=</b><i>N</i> +<dd> Set magnification of the decompressed image. Positive values enlarge and negative values reduce the image width and height by a factor of -2^|<I>N</I>|. +2^|<i>N</i>|. -<DT><B>-s</B> <I>N</I>, <B>--smoothing=</B><I>N</I> -<DD> +<dt><b>-s</b> <i>N</i>, <b>--smoothing=</b><i>N</i> +<dd> Smooth decompressed image(s) along the partitioning borders by the -given amount <I>N</I>. <I>N</I> is 1 (minimum) to 100 (maximum); default -is 70. When <I>N</I>=0, then the smoothing amount specified in the +given amount <i>N</i>. <i>N</i> is 1 (minimum) to 100 (maximum); default +is 70. When <i>N</i>=0, then the smoothing amount specified in the FIASCO file is used (defined by the FIASCO coder). -<DT><B>-F</B> <I>N</I>, <B>--fps=</B><I>N</I> -<DD> -Set number of frames per second to <I>N</I>. When using this option, +<dt><b>-F</b> <i>N</i>, <b>--fps=</b><i>N</i> +<dd> +Set number of frames per second to <i>N</i>. When using this option, the frame rate specified in the FIASCO file is overridden. -<DT><B>--verbose=</B><I>N</I> -<DD> -Set verbose of <B>fiascotopnm</B> to <I>N</I>. +<dt><b>--verbose=</b><i>N</i> +<dd> +Set verbose of <b>fiascotopnm</b> to <i>N</i>. -<DT><B>-v</B>, <B>--version</B> -<DD> -Print <B>fiascotopnm</B> version number, then exit. +<dt><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b> +<dd> +Print <b>fiascotopnm</b> version number, then exit. -<DT><B>-f</B> <I>name</I>, <B>--config=</B><I>name</I> +<dt><b>-f</b> <i>name</i>, <b>--config=</b><i>name</i> -<DD>Load parameter file <I>name</I> to initialize the options of -<B>fiascotopnm</B>. See file <B>system.fiascorc</B> for an example of -the syntax. Options of <B>fiascotopnm </B> are set by any of the +<dd>Load parameter file <i>name</i> to initialize the options of +<b>fiascotopnm</b>. See file <b>system.fiascorc</b> for an example of +the syntax. Options of <b>fiascotopnm </b> are set by any of the following methods (in the specified order): -<OL> -<LI>Global ressource file <B>/etc/system.fiascorc</B> +<ol> +<li>Global ressource file <b>/etc/system.fiascorc</b> -<LI>$HOME<B>/.fiascorc</B> +<li>$HOME<b>/.fiascorc</b> -<LI>command line +<li>command line -<LI>--config=<I>name</I> -</OL> +<li>--config=<i>name</i> +</ol> -<DT><B>-h</B>, <B>--info</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-h</b>, <b>--info</b> +<dd> Print brief help, then exit. -<DT><B>-H</B>, <B>--help</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-H</b>, <b>--help</b> +<dd> Print detailed help, then exit. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> -<PRE> +<pre> fiascotopnm foo.wfa >foo.ppm -</PRE> +</pre> -<P>Decompress the FIASCO file "foo.wfa" and store it as +<p>Decompress the FIASCO file "foo.wfa" and store it as "foo.ppm". -<PRE> +<pre> fiascotopnm -o foo1.wfa foo2.wfa -</PRE> +</pre> -<P>Decompress the FIASCO files "foo1.wfa" and +<p>Decompress the FIASCO files "foo1.wfa" and "foo2.wfa" and write the frames to the image files "foo1.wfa.ppm" and "foo2.wfa.ppm". -<PRE> +<pre> fiascotopnm -oimage foo1.wfa -</PRE> +</pre> -<P>Decompress the FIASCO file "foo1.wfa" and write all 15 +<p>Decompress the FIASCO file "foo1.wfa" and write all 15 frames to the image files "image.00.ppm", ... , "image.14.ppm". -<PRE> +<pre> fiascotopnm --fast --magnify=-1 --double video.wfa >stream.ppm -</PRE> +</pre> -<P>Decompress the FIASCO file "video.wfa". The +<p>Decompress the FIASCO file "video.wfa". The decompression speed is as fast as possible: the image is decompressed (in 4:2:0 format) at a quarter of its original size; then the image is enlarged again by pixel doubling. -<H2 id="files">FILES</H2> +<h2 id="files">FILES</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>/etc/system.fiascorc</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>/etc/system.fiascorc</b> -<DD>The systemwide initialization file. +<dd>The systemwide initialization file. -<DT>$HOME<B>/.fiascorc</B> +<dt>$HOME<b>/.fiascorc</b> -<DD>The personal initialization file. +<dd>The personal initialization file. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="environment">ENVIRONMENT</H2> +<h2 id="environment">ENVIRONMENT</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>FIASCO_IMAGES</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>FIASCO_IMAGES</b> -<DD>Save path for image files. Default is "./". +<dd>Save path for image files. Default is "./". -<DT><B>FIASCO_DATA</B> +<dt><b>FIASCO_DATA</b> -<DD>Search path for FIASCO files. Default is "./". +<dd>Search path for FIASCO files. Default is "./". -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmtofiasco.html">pnmtofiasco</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> +<b><a href="pnmtofiasco.html">pnmtofiasco</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> -<P> +<p> Ullrich Hafner, Juergen Albert, Stefan Frank, and Michael Unger. -<B>Weighted Finite Automata for Video Compression</B>, IEEE Journal on +<b>Weighted Finite Automata for Video Compression</b>, IEEE Journal on Selected Areas In Communications, January 1998 -<BR> +<br> -Ullrich Hafner. <B>Low Bit-Rate Image and Video Coding with Weighted -Finite Automata</B>, Ph.D. thesis, Mensch & Buch Verlag, ISBN +Ullrich Hafner. <b>Low Bit-Rate Image and Video Coding with Weighted +Finite Automata</b>, Ph.D. thesis, Mensch & Buch Verlag, ISBN 3-89820-002-7, October 1999. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> - -Ullrich Hafner <<A HREF="mailto:hafner@bigfoot.de">hafner@bigfoot.de</A>> - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#files">FILES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#environment">ENVIRONMENT</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Ullrich Hafner <<a href="mailto:hafner@bigfoot.de">hafner@bigfoot.de</a>> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#files">FILES</a> +<li><a href="#environment">ENVIRONMENT</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/fitstopnm.html b/fitstopnm.html index 7d870bae..29a77a18 100644 --- a/fitstopnm.html +++ b/fitstopnm.html @@ -1,38 +1,38 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Fitstopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>fitstopnm</H1> -Updated: 2 August 2015 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Fitstopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>fitstopnm</h1> +Updated: 02 August 2015 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> fitstopnm - convert a FITS file into a PNM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>fitstopnm</B> -[<B>-image=</B><I>N</I>] -[<B>-scanmax</B>] -[<B>-printmax</B>] -[<B>-min=</B><I>f</I>] -[<B>-max=</B><I>f</I>] +<b>fitstopnm</b> +[<b>-image=</b><i>N</i>] +[<b>-scanmax</b>] +[<b>-printmax</b>] +[<b>-min=</b><i>f</i>] +[<b>-max=</b><i>f</i>] [<b>-omaxval=</b><i>N</i> -[<I>FITSfile</I>] +[<i>FITSfile</i>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>fitstopnm</b> reads a FITS (Flexible Image Transport System) file as input and produces a PPM image if the FITS file consists of 3 image planes (NAXIS = 3 and NAXIS3 = 3), or a PGM image if the FITS file consists of 2 -image planes (NAXIS = 2), or if you specify the <B>-image</B> option. +image planes (NAXIS = 2), or if you specify the <b>-image</b> option. <p>Note that the PPM image is highly unlikely to be a true PPM image, as it is not normal for a FITS image to use the third axis as R, G, and B components of @@ -45,10 +45,15 @@ programs such as <b>fitstopnm</b> that predate the PAM format). <p>If you work with FITS images with 3 axes, you should probably always use the <b>-image</b> option to avoid getting an unwanted pseudo-PPM image. -<P>The program tells you what kind of PNM image it is writing. +<p>The program tells you what kind of PNM image it is writing. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>fitstopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> @@ -60,7 +65,7 @@ want. <dt><b>-omaxval=</b><i>N</i> -<P>This is the maxval that the output PNM image is to have. +<p>This is the maxval that the output PNM image is to have. <p>By default, the maxval is the least possible to retain all the precision of the FITS input. That means the difference between the @@ -75,11 +80,11 @@ maxval is simply 255. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.39 (June 2007). Before that, the output maxval is always the default. -<dt><b>-min=</b><I>float</I> +<dt><b>-min=</b><i>float</i> <dt><b>-max=</b><i>float</i> <dd> -<P>You can use these options to override the min and max values as +<p>You can use these options to override the min and max values as read from the FITS header or the image data if the header has no DATAMIN and DATAMAX keywords. @@ -113,32 +118,32 @@ and quits without doing its normal job. -topbottom</b>. See <a href="pamtofits.html#pixelorder"><b>pamtofits</b></a> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pamtofits.html">pamtofits</A>, -<A HREF="pamflip.html">pamflip</A>, -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<a href="pamtofits.html">pamtofits</a>, +<a href="pamflip.html">pamflip</a>, +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer, with modifications by Daniel -Briggs (<A HREF="mailto:dbriggs@nrao.edu">dbriggs@nrao.edu</A>) and -Alberto Accomazzi (<A -HREF="mailto:alberto@cfa.harvard.edu">alberto@cfa.harvard.edu</A>). - - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#notes">NOTES</A> +Briggs (<a href="mailto:dbriggs@nrao.edu">dbriggs@nrao.edu</a>) and +Alberto Accomazzi (<a +href="mailto:alberto@cfa.harvard.edu">alberto@cfa.harvard.edu</a>). + + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#notes">NOTES</a> <ul> <li><a href="#pixelorder">Pixel Order</a> </ul> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/g3topbm.html b/g3topbm.html index 3038c83a..048235c8 100644 --- a/g3topbm.html +++ b/g3topbm.html @@ -1,29 +1,29 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>G3topbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>g3topbm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>G3topbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>g3topbm</h1> Updated: 03 December 2008 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> g3topbm - convert a Group 3 fax file into a PBM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>g3topbm</B> -[<B>-kludge</B>] -[<B>-reversebits</B>] -[<B>-stretch</B>] -[<B>-width=</B><i>pixels</i> | paper_size={A3|A4|A5|A6|B4}] -[<B>-stop_error</B>] -[<I>g3file</I>] +<b>g3topbm</b> +[<b>-kludge</b>] +[<b>-reversebits</b>] +[<b>-stretch</b>] +[<b>-width=</b><i>pixels</i> | paper_size={A3|A4|A5|A6|B4}] +[<b>-stop_error</b>] +[<i>g3file</i>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -56,25 +56,30 @@ file, it will not tell you of your mistake. inside. See <b>tifftopnm</b>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-kludge</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>g3topbm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Tells <b>g3topbm</b> to ignore the first few lines of the file; +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-kludge</b> + +<dd>Tells <b>g3topbm</b> to ignore the first few lines of the file; sometimes fax files have some junk at the beginning. -<DT><B>-reversebits</B> +<dt><b>-reversebits</b> -<DD>Tells <b>g3topbm</b> to interpret bits least-significant first, +<dd>Tells <b>g3topbm</b> to interpret bits least-significant first, instead of the default most-significant first. Apparently some fax modems do it one way and others do it the other way. If you get a whole bunch of "bad code word" messages, try using this option. -<DT><B>-stretch</B> +<dt><b>-stretch</b> -<DD>This option tells <b>g3topbm</b> to stretch the image vertically by +<dd>This option tells <b>g3topbm</b> to stretch the image vertically by duplicating each row. This is for the low-quality transmission mode. <dt><b>-width=</b><i>pixels</i> @@ -88,7 +93,7 @@ issues a warning or fails, depending on whether you specify <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.33 (March 2006). -<dt><b>-paper_size=</b>{<B>A3</B>,<B>A4</B>,<B>A5</B>,<b>A6</b>,<b>B4</b>} +<dt><b>-paper_size=</b>{<b>A3</b>,<b>A4</b>,<b>A5</b>,<b>A6</b>,<b>B4</b>} <dd>This option tells <b>g3topbm</b> for what size paper this image is supposed to be formatted. <b>g3topbm</b> uses the width of the paper @@ -99,9 +104,9 @@ does not use the height of the paper for anything. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.33 (March 2006). -<DT><B>-stop_error</B> +<dt><b>-stop_error</b> -<DD>This option tells <b>g3topbm</b> to fail when it finds a problem +<dd>This option tells <b>g3topbm</b> to fail when it finds a problem in the input. "Fail" means it terminates with a nonzero status code with the contents of the output file undefined. @@ -121,24 +126,24 @@ input errors. <b>g3topbm</b> always failed when it encountered premature EOF and never failed when it encountered other problems. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pbmtog3.html">pbmtog3</A>, -<A HREF="tifftopnm.html">tifftopnm</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> -<A HREF="faxformat.html">fax formats</A> +<a href="pbmtog3.html">pbmtog3</a>, +<a href="tifftopnm.html">tifftopnm</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a>, +<a href="faxformat.html">fax formats</a> -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/gemtopnm.html b/gemtopnm.html index 75429aee..75783917 100644 --- a/gemtopnm.html +++ b/gemtopnm.html @@ -1,21 +1,21 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Gemtopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>gemtopnm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Gemtopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>gemtopnm</h1> Updated: 30 April 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> gemtopnm - convert a GEM .img file into a PNM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>gemtopnm</B> -[<B>-d</B>] -[<I>gemfile</I>] +<b>gemtopnm</b> +[<b>-d</b>] +[<i>gemfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -27,33 +27,38 @@ four plane. <p>The input file is <i>gemfile</i> if you specify that argument, or Standard Input otherwise. Output is to Standard Output. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-d</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>gemtopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DD>Produce output describing the contents of the .img file. +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-d</b> -</DL> +<dd>Produce output describing the contents of the .img file. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +</dl> -<B><A HREF="pbmtogem.html">pbmtogem</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<b><a href="pbmtogem.html">pbmtogem</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> -<p>Copyright (C) 1988 Diomidis D. Spinellis (<A -HREF="mailto:dds@cc.ic.ac.uk">dds@cc.ic.ac.uk</A>). +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p>Copyright (C) 1988 Diomidis D. Spinellis (<a +href="mailto:dds@cc.ic.ac.uk">dds@cc.ic.ac.uk</a>). + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/giftopnm.html b/giftopnm.html index a58ed582..200350ce 100644 --- a/giftopnm.html +++ b/giftopnm.html @@ -1,88 +1,92 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Giftopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>giftopnm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Giftopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>giftopnm</h1> Updated: 13 September 2012 -<BR> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> giftopnm - convert a GIF file into a PNM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>giftopnm</B> -[<B>--alphaout=</B>{<I>alpha-filename</I>,<B>-</B>}] -[<B>-verbose</B>] -[<B>-comments</B>] -[<B>-image=</B>{<I>N</I>,<B>all</b>}] -[<B>-repair</B>] -[<B>-quitearly</B>] -[<I>GIFfile</I>] +<b>giftopnm</b> +[<b>--alphaout=</b>{<i>alpha-filename</i>,<b>-</b>}] +[<b>-verbose</b>] +[<b>-comments</b>] +[<b>-image=</b>{<i>N</i>,<b>all</b>}] +[<b>-repair</b>] +[<b>-quitearly</b>] +[<i>GIFfile</i>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p>This is a graphics format converter from the GIF format to the PNM (i.e. PBM, PGM, or PPM) format. -<P>If the image contains only black and maximally bright white, the +<p>If the image contains only black and maximally bright white, the output is PBM. If the image contains more than those two colors, but only grays, the output is PGM. If the image contains other colors, the output is PPM. -<P> A GIF image contains rectangular pixels. They all have the same +<p> A GIF image contains rectangular pixels. They all have the same aspect ratio, but may not be square (it's actually quite unusual for them not to be square, but it could happen). The pixels of a Netpbm image are always square. Because of the engineering complexity to do -otherwise, <B>giftopnm</B> converts a GIF image to a Netpbm image +otherwise, <b>giftopnm</b> converts a GIF image to a Netpbm image pixel-for-pixel. This means if the GIF pixels are not square, the Netpbm output image has the wrong aspect ratio. In this case, -<B>giftopnm</B> issues an informational message telling you to run -<B>pamscale</B> to correct the output. +<b>giftopnm</b> issues an informational message telling you to run +<b>pamscale</b> to correct the output. + +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>giftopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>--alphaout=</B><I>alpha-filename</I> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>--alphaout=</b><i>alpha-filename</i> -<DD><B>giftopnm </B> creates a PBM file containing the transparency +<dd><b>giftopnm </b> creates a PBM file containing the transparency information from the input image. This transparency image is the same dimensions as the input image, and each pixel of the transparency image tells whether the corresponding pixel of the input image is transparent. Black means transparent; white means opaque. If you don't -specify <B>--alphaout</B>, <B>giftopnm</B> does not generate a transparency -file, and if the input image has a transparency channel, <B>giftopnm</B> simply +specify <b>--alphaout</b>, <b>giftopnm</b> does not generate a transparency +file, and if the input image has a transparency channel, <b>giftopnm</b> simply discards it. -<P>If you specify <B>-</B> as the filename, <B>giftopnm</B> writes the +<p>If you specify <b>-</b> as the filename, <b>giftopnm</b> writes the transparency output to Standard Output and discards the image. -<P>See <B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B> for one way to use +<p>See <b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b> for one way to use the transparency output file. -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Produce verbose output about the GIF file input. +<dd>Produce verbose output about the GIF file input. -<DT><B>-comments</B> +<dt><b>-comments</b> -<DD> +<dd> With this option, <b>giftopnm</b> issues messages showing the GIF comments (A GIF89 stream can contain comments in comment extensions). <p> By default, <b>giftopnm</b> ignores comment extensions. -<DT><B>-image=</B>{<I>N</I>,<B>all</b>} +<dt><b>-image=</b>{<i>N</i>,<b>all</b>} -<DD> +<dd> This option identifies which image from the GIF stream you want. You can select either one image or all the images. Select all the images with <b>all</b>. Select one image by specifying its sequence @@ -163,59 +167,59 @@ if it doesn't. <p>This option has no effect if you also specify <b>-image=all</b> -<P>This option was new in Netpbm 10.35 (August 2006). Before that, +<p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.35 (August 2006). Before that, <b>giftopnm</b> always reads the entire stream. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="restrictions">RESTRICTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="restrictions">RESTRICTIONS</h2> <p>This does not correctly handle the Plain Text Extension of the GIF89 standard, since I did not have any example input files containing them. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamtogif.html">pamtogif</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B>, -<<A -HREF="http://www.lcdf.org/gifsicle">http://www.lcdf.org/gifsicle</A>>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B>. +<b><a href="pamtogif.html">pamtogif</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, +<<a +href="http://www.lcdf.org/gifsicle">http://www.lcdf.org/gifsicle</a>>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b>. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<p>Copyright (c) 1993 by David Koblas (<A -HREF="mailto:koblas@netcom.com">koblas@netcom.com</A>) +<p>Copyright (c) 1993 by David Koblas (<a +href="mailto:koblas@netcom.com">koblas@netcom.com</a>) -<H2 id="license">LICENSE</H2> +<h2 id="license">LICENSE</h2> -<p>As a historical note, for a long time if you used <B>giftopnm</B>, +<p>As a historical note, for a long time if you used <b>giftopnm</b>, you were using a patent on the LZW compression method which was owned by Unisys, and in all probability you did not have a license from Unisys to do so. Unisys typically asked $5000 for a license for trivial use of the patent. Unisys never enforced the patent against trivial users, and made statements that it is much less concerned about people using the patent for decompression (which is what -<B>giftopnm</B> does than for compression. The patent expired in +<b>giftopnm</b> does than for compression. The patent expired in 2003. -<P>Rumor has it that IBM also owns a patent covering <B>giftopnm</B>. +<p>Rumor has it that IBM also owns a patent covering <b>giftopnm</b>. -<P>A replacement for the GIF format that has never required any patent +<p>A replacement for the GIF format that has never required any patent license to use is the PNG format. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A><H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#restrictions">RESTRICTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -<LI><A HREF="#license">LICENSE</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#restrictions">RESTRICTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#license">LICENSE</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/hdifftopam.html b/hdifftopam.html index e6486394..c6bd314d 100644 --- a/hdifftopam.html +++ b/hdifftopam.html @@ -1,59 +1,70 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Hdifftopam User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>hdifftopam</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Hdifftopam User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>hdifftopam</h1> Updated: 15 April 2002 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> hdifftopam - convert horizontal difference image to original PAM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>hdifftopam</B>[<I>pamfile</I>] -[<B>-pnm</B>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] +<b>hdifftopam</b>[<i>pamfile</i>] +[<b>-pnm</b>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><B>hdifftopam</B> undoes what <B>pamtohdiff</B> does. +<p><b>hdifftopam</b> undoes what <b>pamtohdiff</b> does. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-pnm</B> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DD> - This option tells <B>hdifftopam</B> to create a PNM image (i.e. PGM or - PPM). Without it, <B>hdifftopam</B> creates a PAM image (with a +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>hdifftopam</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-pnm</b> + +<dd> + This option tells <b>hdifftopam</b> to create a PNM image (i.e. PGM or + PPM). Without it, <b>hdifftopam</b> creates a PAM image (with a tuple type of "unhdiff"). If the PAM does not have the proper depth - to be a PGM or PPM (i.e. 1 or 3) and you specify <B>-pnm</B>, - <B>hdifftopam</B> fails. -</DL> + to be a PGM or PPM (i.e. 1 or 3) and you specify <b>-pnm</b>, + <b>hdifftopam</b> fails. + + +<dt><b>-verbose</b> +<dd> + Print output image width, height, depth and maxval to standard error. +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamtohdiff.html">pamtohdiff</A></B> +<b><a href="pamtohdiff.html">pamtohdiff</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Bryan Henderson -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ilbmtoppm.html b/ilbmtoppm.html index 014dbdd0..2e6ace5b 100644 --- a/ilbmtoppm.html +++ b/ilbmtoppm.html @@ -1,79 +1,83 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ilbmtoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ilbmtoppm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ilbmtoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ilbmtoppm</h1> Updated: 12 November 2014 -<BR> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ilbmtoppm - convert an ILBM file into a PPM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ilbmtoppm</B> -[<B>-ignore</B><chunkID><B>]</B> +<b>ilbmtoppm</b> +[<b>-ignore</b><chunkID><b>]</b> [ -<B>-isham</B> | <b>-isnotham</b> | -<B>-isehb</B> | <b>-isnotehb</b> | +<b>-isham</b> | <b>-isnotham</b> | +<b>-isehb</b> | <b>-isnotehb</b> | <b>-isdeep</b> | <b>-isnotdeep</b> ] -[<B>-cmaponly</B>] -[<B>-adjustcolors</B>] +[<b>-cmaponly</b>] +[<b>-adjustcolors</b>] [<b>-transparent </b><i>color</i>] [<b>-maskfile</b> <i>filename</i> -[<B>-verbose</B>] -[<I>ILBMfile</I>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] +[<i>ILBMfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ilbmtoppm</b> reads an IFF ILBM file as input and produces a PPM image as output. <b>ilbmtoppm</b> can handle the following ILBM types: -<UL> -<LI>Normal ILBMs with 1-16 planes. -<LI>Amiga Extra_Halfbrite (EHB) -<LI>Amiga HAM with 3-16 planes. -<LI>24 bit. -<LI>Multiplatte (normal or HAM) pictures. -<LI>Color map (BMHD + CMAP chunk only, nPlanes = 0). -<LI>Unofficial direct color. 1-16 planes for each color component. -</UL> - -<P><B>ilbmtoppm</b> uses these ILBM chunks: BMHD, CMAP, CAMG (only HAM +<ul> +<li>Normal ILBMs with 1-16 planes. +<li>Amiga Extra_Halfbrite (EHB) +<li>Amiga HAM with 3-16 planes. +<li>24 bit. +<li>Multiplatte (normal or HAM) pictures. +<li>Color map (BMHD + CMAP chunk only, nPlanes = 0). +<li>Unofficial direct color. 1-16 planes for each color component. +</ul> + +<p><b>ilbmtoppm</b> uses these ILBM chunks: BMHD, CMAP, CAMG (only HAM & EHB flags used), PCHG, BODY unofficial DCOL chunk to identify direct color ILBM. It ignores these chunks: GRAB, DEST, SPRT, CRNG, CCRT, CLUT, DPPV, DRNG, EPSF. It ignores, but displays in verbose mode, these: NAME, AUTH, (c), ANNO, DPI. It skips chunks whose type it doesn't recognize. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ilbmtoppm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> <dt><b>-transparent </b><i>color</i> <dd>This is the color that should "show through" in places where the image is transparent. -<P><i>color</i> is like the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of +<p><i>color</i> is like the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Give some information about the ILBM file. +<dd>Give some information about the ILBM file. -<DT><B>-ignore</b> <i>chunkID</i> +<dt><b>-ignore</b> <i>chunkID</i> -<DD>Skip a chunk. <i>chunkID</i> is the 4-letter IFF chunk identifier +<dd>Skip a chunk. <i>chunkID</i> is the 4-letter IFF chunk identifier of the chunk to be skipped. -<DT><B>-isham</b> | <b>-isehb</B> +<dt><b>-isham</b> | <b>-isehb</b> -<DD>Treat the input file as a HAM or Extra_Halfbrite picture, even if +<dd>Treat the input file as a HAM or Extra_Halfbrite picture, even if these flags are not set in the CAMG chunk (or if there is no CAMG chunk). @@ -96,47 +100,47 @@ map</em>, not the image itself. ILBM is a pure color map stream (it has a bitmap header with an <i>nplanes</i> value of zero or has no BODY chunk. -<DT><B>-adjustcolors</B> +<dt><b>-adjustcolors</b> -<DD>If all colors in the CMAP have a value of less then 16, ilbmtoppm +<dd>If all colors in the CMAP have a value of less then 16, ilbmtoppm assumes a 4-bit colormap and gives a warning. With this option the colormap is scaled to 8 bits. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> <p>The multipalette PCHG BigLineChanges and Huffman decompression code is untested. -<H2 id="references">REFERENCES</H2> +<h2 id="references">REFERENCES</h2> Amiga ROM Kernel Reference Manual - Devices (3rd Ed.) Addison Wesley, ISBN 0-201-56775-X -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="ppmtoilbm.html">ppmtoilbm</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="ppmtoilbm.html">ppmtoilbm</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<H2 id="authors">AUTHORS</H2> +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<p>Modified October 1993 by Ingo Wilken (<A -HREF="mailto:Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de">Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de</A>) - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#references">REFERENCES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#authors">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p>Modified October 1993 by Ingo Wilken (<a +href="mailto:Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de">Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de</a>) + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#references">REFERENCES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/infotopam.html b/infotopam.html index 2f453655..d254eed1 100644 --- a/infotopam.html +++ b/infotopam.html @@ -1,22 +1,13 @@ -<?xml version="1.1" encoding="iso-8859-1" ?> - -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> - -<head> -<title>Infotopam User Manual</title> -</head> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Infotopam User Manual</title></head> <body> - <h1>infotopam</h1> - -<p>Updated: 07 April 2004</p> - -<p><a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a></p> +Updated: 07 April 2004 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> <h2>NAME</h2> - -<p>infotopam - convert Amiga .info icons to PAM</p> +infotopam - convert Amiga .info icons to PAM <h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> @@ -27,78 +18,83 @@ [<b>-selected</b>] [<i>index color</i> ...] [<i>filename</i>] -</p> + <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in -place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value.</p> +place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. <h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> -<p>By default, <b>infotopam</b> converts the first icon in a .info file:</p> +<p>By default, <b>infotopam</b> converts the first icon in a .info file: <pre> infotopam amiga.info > amiga.first.pam </pre> <p>Use the <i>-selected</i> option to convert the second icon in a .info -file. Here <b>infotopam</b> reads from Standard Input:</p> +file. Here <b>infotopam</b> reads from Standard Input: <pre> infotopam -selected < amiga.info > amiga.second.pam </pre> <p>Use the <i>-forcecolor</i> option to force color conversion for a 1 -bit-plane .info file:</p> +bit-plane .info file: <pre> infotopam -forcecolor bw.info > bw.pam </pre> <p>Use <i>-numcolors</i> to override colors for indexes 0 and 3. Notice the -two ways to specify the color:</p> +two ways to specify the color: <pre> infotopam -numcolors 2 0 green 3 #FF0000 icon.info > icon.pam </pre> <p>Since Amiga monitors do not use square pixels, some icons may appear -squished. Filtering the output through <b>pamscale</b> can fix this:</p> +squished. Filtering the output through <b>pamscale</b> can fix this: <pre> infotopam squish.info | pamtopnm | pamscale -yscale 1.7 > normal.pnm </pre> -<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>infotopam</b> converts an Amiga .info (icon) file to a PAM image. <b>infotopam</b> reads a .info file from <i>filename</i>, or from Standard Input if you do not specify a file name, and writes the converted PAM image to -Standard Output.</p> +Standard Output. <p><b>infotopam</b> currently handles 1 and 2 bit-plane icons. If the .info icon only has 1 bit-plane, <b>infotopam</b> generates a bitmap (black&white) PAM image; otherwise it generates a color PAM image. You can force <b>infotopam</b> to convert 1 bit-plane images to color PAM images by -using the <i>-forcecolor</i> option.</p> +using the <i>-forcecolor</i> option. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>infotopam</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-forcecolor</b></dt> <dd><p>Forces <b>infotopam</b> to convert 1 bit-plane icons to color PAM images instead of bitmap PAM images. <b>infotopam</b> uses the index 2 color for black and the index 1 color for white (more on this - below).</p></dd> + below).</dd> <dt><b>-numcolors</b> <i>numcolors</i></dt> <dd><p>Tells <b>infotopam</b> how many colors to override. Pixels in the Amiga .info files are assigned an index value rather than a specific color. - The standard colors for a 2 bit-plane icon are:</p> + The standard colors for a 2 bit-plane icon are: <pre> Index 0: Blue (00, 55, AA) @@ -111,8 +107,8 @@ using the <i>-forcecolor</i> option.</p> <i>-numcolors</i>, then specify an (<i>index color</i>) pair for each color you want to override, where <i>index</i> is a value from 0 to 3 and <i>color</i> the new color for that index. Specify <i>color</i> as - described for the <a href= "libnetpbm.html#colorname"><b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> - argument</a>.</p></dd> + described for the <a href= "libnetpbm_image.html#colorname"><b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> + argument</a>.</dd> <dt><b>-selected</b></dt> @@ -125,7 +121,7 @@ using the <i>-forcecolor</i> option.</p> </dl> -<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.</p> +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. <h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> @@ -133,23 +129,23 @@ using the <i>-forcecolor</i> option.</p> <a href="pam.html">pam</a> <a href="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</a> <a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a> -</p> + <h2 id="notes">NOTES</h2> <p>Thanks to the following people on comp.sys.amiga.programmer for tips -and pointers on decoding the info file format:</p> +and pointers on decoding the info file format: <ul> - <li>Ben Hutchings</li> - <li>Thomas Richter</li> - <li>Kjetil Svalastog Matheussen</li> - <li>Anders Melchiorsen</li> - <li>Dirk Stoecker</li> - <li>Ronald V.D.</li> + <li>Ben Hutchings + <li>Thomas Richter + <li>Kjetil Svalastog Matheussen + <li>Anders Melchiorsen + <li>Dirk Stoecker + <li>Ronald V.D. </ul> -<p>The format of the Amiga .info file is as follows:</p> +<p>The format of the Amiga .info file is as follows: <pre> DiskObject header 78 bytes @@ -162,19 +158,19 @@ and pointers on decoding the info file format:</p> <p>The DiskObject header contains, among other things, the magic number (0xE310), the object width and height (inside the embedded Gadget header), -and the version.</p> +and the version. <p>Each icon header contains the icon width and height, which can be smaller -than the object width and height, and the number of bit-planes.</p> +than the object width and height, and the number of bit-planes. -<p>The icon data has the following format:</p> +<p>The icon data has the following format: <blockquote> <p><i>BIT-PLANE</i> planes, each with <i>HEIGHT</i> rows of (<i>WIDTH</i> - +15) / 16 * 2 bytes length.</p> + +15) / 16 * 2 bytes length. </blockquote> -<p>So if you have a 9x3x2 icon, the icon data will look like this:</p> +<p>So if you have a 9x3x2 icon, the icon data will look like this: <pre> aaaa aaaa a000 0000 @@ -187,7 +183,7 @@ than the object width and height, and the number of bit-planes.</p> <p>where <i>a</i> is a bit for the first bit-plane, <i>b</i> is a bit for the second bit-plane, and <i>0</i> is padding. Thanks again to Ben Hutchings for -his very helpful post!</p> +his very helpful post! <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -196,29 +192,29 @@ his very helpful post!</p> <h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> -<p><b>infotopam</b> currently only handles 1 and 2 bit-plane icons.</p> +<p><b>infotopam</b> currently only handles 1 and 2 bit-plane icons. <p>There is no <b>pamtoinfo</b> command, since the .info files contain a lot -more than just icon data, and mapping the colors would be difficult.</p> +more than just icon data, and mapping the colors would be difficult. <h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<p>Copyright (C) 2000, 2004 by Richard Griswold.</p> +<p>Copyright (C) 2000, 2004 by Richard Griswold. <hr /> <h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> <ul> - <li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></li> - <li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a></li> - <li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a></li> - <li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a></li> - <li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a></li> - <li><a href="#notes">NOTES</a></li> - <li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a></li> - <li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a></li> - <li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a></li> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#notes">NOTES</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> </ul> </body> diff --git a/jpeg2ktopam.html b/jpeg2ktopam.html index f52ab77a..d9bde090 100644 --- a/jpeg2ktopam.html +++ b/jpeg2ktopam.html @@ -1,49 +1,49 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Jpeg2ktopam User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>Jpeg2ktopam</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Jpeg2ktopam User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>jpeg2ktopam</h1> Updated: 08 October 2009 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> jpeg2ktopam - convert JPEG-2000 code stream to PAM/PNM -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>jpeg2ktopam</B> -[<B>-verbose</B>] -[<B>-debuglevel=</B><I>number</I>] -<I>filename</I> +<b>jpeg2ktopam</b> +[<b>-verbose</b>] +[<b>-debuglevel=</b><i>number</i>] +<i>filename</i> -<?makeman .SH OPTION USAGE ?> +<?makeman .sh option usage ?> <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><B>jpeg2ktopam</b> converts the named JPEG-2000 file (JP2 or JPC), +<p><b>jpeg2ktopam</b> converts the named JPEG-2000 file (JP2 or JPC), or Standard Input if no file is named, to a PBM, PGM, PPM, or PAM file on Standard Output. -<P>The JPEG-2000 specification specifies two different formats: JP2 and +<p>The JPEG-2000 specification specifies two different formats: JP2 and JPEG-2000 code stream (JPC). JP2 represents a visual image quite specifically, whereas JPC is a more or less arbitrary array of codes. A JP2 image contains a JPC stream and metadata describing how that stream represents a visual image. <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> converts both. <p>If the color space identified in the image is grayscale -(JAS_IMAGE_CS_GRAY), <B>jpeg2ktopam</b> generates a PGM image, unless the +(JAS_IMAGE_CS_GRAY), <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> generates a PGM image, unless the image contains only one bit per pixel, in which case <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> generates PBM. If the color space is RGB (JAS_IMAGE_CS_RGB), <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> generates a PPM image. If the input image is anything else, <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> generates a PAM image with no tuple type identified. -<P>In the PGM and PPM cases, <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> assumes the intensity +<p>In the PGM and PPM cases, <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> assumes the intensity values in the input image have the same meaning as for PGM and PPM. One thing that implies is the ITU-R Recommendation BT.709 color space, which means the assumption is false for JP2 input. JP2 input uses @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ and the green component has a precision of 6 bits, the maxval is 63 and the red component codes from the JPEG-2000 image are multiplied by 63/15 to generate the output samples. -<P><b>jpeg2ktopam</b> interprets the JPEG-2000 input with the <a +<p><b>jpeg2ktopam</b> interprets the JPEG-2000 input with the <a href="http://www.ece.uvic.ca/~mdadams/jasper/">Jasper JPEG-2000 library</a>. See documentation of the library for details on what <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> handles. Note that the Jasper library contains @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ the Jasper library write it "JasPer," but Netpbm documentation follows standard American English typography rules, which don't allow that kind of capitalization. -<P>Use <b>pamtojpeg2k</b> to convert in the other direction. +<p>Use <b>pamtojpeg2k</b> to convert in the other direction. <p>The program <b>jasper</b>, which is packaged with the Jasper JPEG-2000 library, also converts between JPEG-2000 and PNM formats. @@ -86,61 +86,66 @@ especially recently added features. However, since it does not use the Netpbm library to read and write the Netpbm formats, it doesn't do as good a job on that side. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DT><B>-verbose</b> +<dl compact> -<DD>This option causes <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> to issue informational +<dt><b>-verbose</b> + +<dd>This option causes <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> to issue informational messages about the conversion process. -<DT><B>-debuglevel</b>=<i>number</i> +<dt><b>-debuglevel</b>=<i>number</i> -<DD>This option controls debug messages from the Jasper library. +<dd>This option controls debug messages from the Jasper library. <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> passes <i>number</i> as the debug level to the Jasper JPEG-2000 decoder. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> <pre> jpeg2ktopam myimg.jpc >myimg.ppm </pre> - -<H2 id="jpeg2000">ABOUT JPEG-2000</H2> +<h2 id="jpeg2000">ABOUT JPEG-2000</h2> <p>See <a href="pamtojpeg2k.html">the <b>pamtojpeg2k</b> manual</a> for general information on JPEG-2000 compression and the JPEG-2000 formats. +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pamtojpeg2k.html">pamtojpeg2k</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="jpegtopnm.html">jpegtopnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamtojpeg2k.html">pamtojpeg2k</a></b>, +<b><a href="jpegtopnm.html">jpegtopnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgm.html">pgm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, -<H2>History</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>jpeg2ktopam</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.12 (November 2002). <p>Before Netpbm 10.49 (December 2009), <b>jpeg2ktopam</b> could not convert a JP2 file -- only JPC. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#jpeg2000">ABOUT JPEG-2000</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/palmtopnm.html b/palmtopnm.html index c8965f73..8f57c050 100644 --- a/palmtopnm.html +++ b/palmtopnm.html @@ -1,45 +1,42 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Palmtopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>palmtopnm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Palmtopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>palmtopnm</h1> Updated: 26 January 2005 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> palmtopnm - convert a Palm Bitmap to a PNM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> - -<B>palmtopnm</B> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -[<B>-verbose</B>] +<b>palmtopnm</b> -[<B>-rendition</B> <I>N</I>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<B>-showhist</B>] +[<b>-rendition</b> <i>N</i>] -<BR> +[<b>-showhist</b>] -[<I>palmfile</I>] +[<i>palmfile</i>] -<BR> +<br> -<B>palmtopnm</B> +<b>palmtopnm</b> -<B>-transparent</B> +<b>-transparent</b> -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>palmfile</I>] +[<i>palmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>palmtopnm</b> reads a Palm Bitmap as input, from Standard Input or -<I>palmfile</I> and produces a PPM image as output. +<i>palmfile</i> and produces a PPM image as output. <p>Alternatively (when you specify <b>-transparent</b>), <b>palmtopnm</b> writes the value of the transparent color in the Palm @@ -59,17 +56,22 @@ the ones we found worth mentioning. <li>Packbits compression (new in Netpbm 10.27 (March 2005)) </ul> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>palmtopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD> +<dd> Display various interesting information about the input file and process. -<DT><B>-transparent</B> +<dt><b>-transparent</b> -<DD> +<dd> If the Palm Bitmap has a transparent color set, <b>palmtopnm</b> writes the value for that color to Standard Output in the form #RRGGBB, where @@ -78,39 +80,39 @@ indicating a value in the range 0 through 255. If no transparent color is set in the Bitmap, <b>palmtopnm</b> writes nothing. <b>palmtopnm</b> does not generate any output image when you specify <b>-transparent</b>. -<DT><B>-rendition N</B> +<dt><b>-rendition N</b> -<DD> +<dd> Palm Bitmaps may contain several different renditions of the same -image, with different depths. By default, <B>palmtopnm </B> operates +image, with different depths. By default, <b>palmtopnm </b> operates on the first rendition (rendition number 1) in the image. This switch allows you to operate on a different rendition. The value must be between 1 and the number of renditions in the image, inclusive. -<DT><B>-showhist</B> +<dt><b>-showhist</b> -<DD> +<dd> This option causes <b>palmtopnm</b> to write a histogram of colors in the input file to Standard Error. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmtopalm.html">pnmtopalm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamtopdbimg.html">pamtopdbimg</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmtopalm.html">pnmtopalm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamtopdbimg.html">pamtopdbimg</a></b>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a>, -<H2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> -<P>You cannot generate a transparency mask if the Palm Bitmap has a +<p>You cannot generate a transparency mask if the Palm Bitmap has a transparent color. However, you can still do this with -<B>ppmcolormask</B> with a Netpbm pipe similar to: +<b>ppmcolormask</b> with a Netpbm pipe similar to: -<P> -<B>palmtopnm bitmap.palm | -ppmcolormask `palmtopnm -transparent bitmap.palm`</B> +<p> +<b>palmtopnm bitmap.palm | +ppmcolormask `palmtopnm -transparent bitmap.palm`</b> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -118,7 +120,7 @@ ppmcolormask `palmtopnm -transparent bitmap.palm`</B> option. But that had been redundant for a long time, since the Netpbm common option <b>-plain</b> does the same thing. -<H2 id="authors">AUTHORS</H2> +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> This program was originally written as Tbmptopnm.c, by Ian Goldberg. It was heavily modified by Bill Janssen to add color, compression, and @@ -126,16 +128,16 @@ transparency function. <p>Copyright 1995-2001 by Ian Goldberg and Bill Janssen. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#authors">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamaltsat.html b/pamaltsat.html index 0df1f4ea..45861054 100644 --- a/pamaltsat.html +++ b/pamaltsat.html @@ -1,8 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<html><head> -<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=windows-1252"> -<title>Pamaltsat User Manual</title> -</head> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamaltsat User Manual</title></head> <body> <h1>pamaltsat</h1> Updated: 14 September 2018 @@ -10,7 +7,6 @@ Updated: 14 September 2018 <a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> <h2>NAME</h2> - pamaltsat - increase or decrease the saturation of an image using one of several alternative methods. @@ -24,8 +20,7 @@ several alternative methods. <h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> -<p>This program is part of -<a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/index.html">Netpbm</a>. +<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pamaltsat</b> decreases or increases the saturation of a Netpbm image by one of various non-standard (<i>alt</i>ernative) methods. @@ -145,6 +140,11 @@ highest value that keeps the resulting color in range. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamaltsat</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-method</b> <i>method</i> <dd>specifies the saturation method to use: @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ highest value that keeps the resulting color in range. <tr><td>Spectral </td><td><tt>spectrum</tt></td></tr> </table> -<P>The default is <b>spectrum</b> +<p>The default is <b>spectrum</b> <dt><b>-strength</b> <i>strength</i> @@ -193,8 +193,8 @@ described under the <b>-strength</b> command-line option. <h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> <p> -<A HREF="pambrighten.html">pambrighten</A>, -<A HREF="ppmflash.html">ppmflash</A>, +<a href="pambrighten.html">pambrighten</a>, +<a href="ppmflash.html">ppmflash</a>, <h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> diff --git a/pambackground.html b/pambackground.html index 5f345dea..795a020e 100644 --- a/pambackground.html +++ b/pambackground.html @@ -1,20 +1,19 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pambackground User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pambackground</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pambackground User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pambackground</h1> Updated: 24 November 2014 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pambackground - create a mask of the background area of an image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pambackground</B> +<b>pambackground</b> -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] [<b>-verbose=</b>] @@ -24,7 +23,7 @@ may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -91,8 +90,8 @@ what a PAM is and expect a mask to be in the form of a PGM or PBM image. To convert <b>pambackground</b>'s output to PBM, use <b>pamtopnm -assume</b>. To convert to PGM, use <b>pgmtopgm</b>. -<P><I>netpbmfile</I> is the file specification of the input file, or -<B>-</B> to indicate Standard Input. The default is Standard Input. +<p><i>netpbmfile</i> is the file specification of the input file, or +<b>-</b> to indicate Standard Input. The default is Standard Input. <p>A common use for a background mask is with <b>pamcomp</b>. You could replace the entire background (or foreground) of your @@ -112,7 +111,12 @@ a background mask in cases that <b>pambackground</b> cannot: where there are see-through holes in the foreground image. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pambackground</b> recognizes the following +command line option: <dl> @@ -137,32 +141,33 @@ are see-through holes in the foreground image. </pre> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgmtopgm.html">pgmtopgm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamstack.html">pamstack</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamstack.html">pamgetcolor</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgmtopgm.html">pgmtopgm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamstack.html">pamstack</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamstack.html">pamgetcolor</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><B>pambackground</B> was new in Netpbm 10.37 (December 2006). - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p><b>pambackground</b> was new in Netpbm 10.37 (December 2006). + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pambayer.html b/pambayer.html index f96c071f..ae83267b 100644 --- a/pambayer.html +++ b/pambayer.html @@ -1,34 +1,31 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><TITLE>Pambayer User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pambayer</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pambayer User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pambayer</h1> Updated: 18 August 2005 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pambayer - interpret Bayer patterns -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pambayer</B> +<b>pambayer</b> <b>-type=</b>{<b>1</b>|<b>2</b>|<b>3</b>|<b>4</b>} [<b>-nointerpolate</b>] -[<I>pamfile</I>] +[<i>pamfile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. - -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pambayer</b> reads a Bayer pattern in a 1-deep Netpbm image and +<p><b>pambayer</b> reads a Bayer pattern in a 1-deep Netpbm image and produces a color image in PAM RGB format as output. <p>A Bayer pattern is what you get from the optical sensor in some @@ -63,9 +60,14 @@ a standard color image. You can convert this to PPM with <b>pamchannel</b> on the output of <b>pambayer</b> to extract it. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pambayer</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + +<dl compact> <dt><b>-type=</b><i>n</i> @@ -94,27 +96,27 @@ that do have that color component. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.49 (December 2009). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="cameratopam.html">cameratopam</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> +<b><a href="cameratopam.html">cameratopam</a></b> +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pambayer</b> was new in Netpbm 10.30 (October 2005). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pambrighten.html b/pambrighten.html index f2ba997a..ed082a37 100644 --- a/pambrighten.html +++ b/pambrighten.html @@ -1,27 +1,27 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pambrighten User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pambrighten</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pambrighten User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pambrighten</h1> Updated: 12 January 2019 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pambrighten - change a PPM image's Saturation and Value -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <b>pambrighten</b> [<b>-saturation=</b>[<b>+</b>|<b>-</b><i>saturation_percent</i>]] [<b>-value=</b>[<b>+</b>|<b>-</b><i>value_percent</i>]] <i>netpbmfile</i> -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ a PAM image (such as a transparency channel) get passed through. <p>If you want to modify the Hues in the image, use <b>pamhue</b>. -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> <p>To double the Value of each pixel: <pre> pambrighten -value=100 @@ -97,47 +97,52 @@ pambrighten -value=100 pambrighten -saturation=+100 -value=-50 </pre> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL> -<DT><b>-value=</b><i>value_percent</i> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pambrighten</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>This option specifies the amount, as a percentage, by which you want to +<dl> +<dt><b>-value=</b><i>value_percent</i> + +<dd>This option specifies the amount, as a percentage, by which you want to change the Value of each pixel. It may be negative. -<DT><b>-saturation=</b><i>value_percent</i> +<dt><b>-saturation=</b><i>value_percent</i> -<DD>This option specifies the amount, as a percentage, by which you want to +<dd>This option specifies the amount, as a percentage, by which you want to change the Saturation of each pixel. It may be negative. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pnmnorm.html">pnmnorm</A>, -<A HREF="ppmdim.html">ppmdim</A>, -<A HREF="pamfunc.html">pamfunc</A>, -<A HREF="ppmflash.html">ppmflash</A>, -<A HREF="pamaltsat.html">pamaltsat</A>, -<A HREF="ppmbrighten.html">ppmbrighten</A>, -<A HREF="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</A>, -<A HREF="pnmgamma.html">pnmgamma</A>, -<A HREF="pamhue.html">pamhue</A>, -<A HREF="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="pnmnorm.html">pnmnorm</a>, +<a href="ppmdim.html">ppmdim</a>, +<a href="pamfunc.html">pamfunc</a>, +<a href="ppmflash.html">ppmflash</a>, +<a href="pamaltsat.html">pamaltsat</a>, +<a href="ppmbrighten.html">ppmbrighten</a>, +<a href="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</a>, +<a href="pnmgamma.html">pnmgamma</a>, +<a href="pamhue.html">pamhue</a>, +<a href="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><B>pambrighten</B> was new in Netphm 10.86 (March 2019). It was a +<p><b>pambrighten</b> was new in Netphm 10.86 (March 2019). It was a PAM conversion of the much older <b>ppmbrighten</b>. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Copyright (C) 1990 by Brian Moffet. Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<P> +<p> Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that @@ -145,16 +150,16 @@ copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamchannel.html b/pamchannel.html index f52473ce..6f1285a5 100644 --- a/pamchannel.html +++ b/pamchannel.html @@ -1,27 +1,26 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamchannel User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamchannel</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamchannel User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamchannel</h1> Updated: 10 January 2006 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamchannel - extract channels from a PAM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamchannel</B> -[<B>-infile=</B><I>infile</I>] -[<B>-tupletype=</B><I>tupletype</I>] -[<I>channum</I> ...] +<b>pamchannel</b> +[<b>-infile=</b><i>infile</i>] +[<b>-tupletype=</b><i>tupletype</i>] +[<i>channum</i> ...] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -33,57 +32,62 @@ the input. with the first channel being zero. The channels in the output are in the order of these arguments. -<P>The output is the same dimensions as the input, except that the depth -is the number of <I>channum</I> arguments you supply. The tuple type -is a null string unless you specify the <B>-tupletype</B> option. +<p>The output is the same dimensions as the input, except that the depth +is the number of <i>channum</i> arguments you supply. The tuple type +is a null string unless you specify the <b>-tupletype</b> option. <p>This program works on multi-image streams, producing a corresponding output stream. But before Netpbm 10.32 (February 2006), it ignored every image after the first. -<P><B>pamstack</B> does the opposite of <B>pamchannel</B>: It takes multiple +<p><b>pamstack</b> does the opposite of <b>pamchannel</b>: It takes multiple PAM or PNM images as input and stacks their planes (channels) on top of one another to yield a single PAM. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamchannel</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><B>-infile</B> <I>infile</I> -<DD> +<dt><b>-infile</b> <i>infile</i> +<dd> This specifies the input file, which defaults to Standard Input. You -may specify <B>-</B> to select Standard Input explicitly. -<P> +may specify <b>-</b> to select Standard Input explicitly. +<p> This is a little unconventional for Netpbm programs, which usually -have the input file specification as an argument. For <B>pamchannel</B>, +have the input file specification as an argument. For <b>pamchannel</b>, the arguments are channel numbers. -<DT><B>-tupletype</B> <I>tupletype</I> -<DD> +<dt><b>-tupletype</b> <i>tupletype</i> +<dd> This specified the tuple type name to be recorded in the output. You may use any string up to 255 characters. Some programs recognize some names. If you omit this option, the default tuple type name is null. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pamstack.html">pamstack</A></B> +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> +<b><a href="pamstack.html">pamstack</a></b> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamchannel</b> was new, along with the PAM format, in Netpbm 9.7 (August 2000). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamcomp.html b/pamcomp.html index cecc7a65..172e13a2 100644 --- a/pamcomp.html +++ b/pamcomp.html @@ -1,57 +1,56 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><TITLE>Pamcomp User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamcomp</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamcomp User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamcomp</h1> Updated: 13 August 2011 <p> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamcomp - composite (overlay) two Netpbm images together -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamcomp</B> +<b>pamcomp</b> -[<B>-align=</B>{<B>left</B> | <B>center</B> | <B>right</B> | -<B>beyondleft</b> | <b>beyondright</b>}] -<BR> -[<B>-valign=</B>{<B>top</B> | <B>middle</B> | <B>bottom</B>| +[<b>-align=</b>{<b>left</b> | <b>center</b> | <b>right</b> | +<b>beyondleft</b> | <b>beyondright</b>}] +<br> +[<b>-valign=</b>{<b>top</b> | <b>middle</b> | <b>bottom</b>| <b>above</b> | <b>below</b>}] -<BR> -[<B>-xoff=</B><I>X</I>] -[<B>-yoff=</B><I>Y</I>] -<BR> -[<B>-alpha=</B><I>alpha-pgmfile</I>] -[<B>-invert</B>] -[<B>-opacity=</b><i>opacity</i>] +<br> +[<b>-xoff=</b><i>X</i>] +[<b>-yoff=</b><i>Y</i>] +<br> +[<b>-alpha=</b><i>alpha-pgmfile</i>] +[<b>-invert</b>] +[<b>-opacity=</b><i>opacity</i>] [<b>-mixtransparency</b>] [<b>-linear</b>] -<BR> -<I>overlay_file</I> -[<I>underlying_file</I> [<I>output_file</I>]] +<br> +<i>overlay_file</i> +[<i>underlying_file</i> [<i>output_file</i>]] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<B>pamcomp</B> reads two images and produces a composite image with +<b>pamcomp</b> reads two images and produces a composite image with one of the images overlayed on top of the other, possible translucently. The images need not be the same size. The input and outputs are Netpbm format image files. -<P>In its simplest use, <B>pamcomp</B> simply places the image in the -file <I>overlay_file</I> on top of the image in the file -<I>underlying_file</I>, blocking out the part of <I>underlying_file</I> +<p>In its simplest use, <b>pamcomp</b> simply places the image in the +file <i>overlay_file</i> on top of the image in the file +<i>underlying_file</i>, blocking out the part of <i>underlying_file</i> beneath it. -<P>If you add the <B>-alpha</B> option, then <B>pamcomp</B> uses the -image in file <I>alpha-pgmfile</I> as a transparency mask, which means it +<p>If you add the <b>-alpha</b> option, then <b>pamcomp</b> uses the +image in file <i>alpha-pgmfile</i> as a transparency mask, which means it determines the level of transparency of each point in the overlay image. The transparency mask must have the same dimensions as the overlay image. In places where the transparency mask defines the overlay image to be @@ -65,9 +64,9 @@ composite image contains a mixture of the overlay image and the underlying image and the level of translucence determines how much of each. -<P>The transparency mask is a PGM file in which a white pixel represents +<p>The transparency mask is a PGM file in which a white pixel represents opaqueness and a black pixel transparency. Anything in between is -translucent. (Like any Netpbm program, <B>pamcomp</B> will see a PBM +translucent. (Like any Netpbm program, <b>pamcomp</b> will see a PBM file as if it is PGM). <p>If the overlay image is a PAM image of tuple type RGB_ALPHA or @@ -86,8 +85,8 @@ you have to use the old method -- extract the transparency information from the original into a separate transparency mask and use that as input to <b>pamcomp</b>. -<P>The output image is always of the same dimensions as the underlying -image. <B>pamcomp</B> uses only parts of the overlay image that fit +<p>The output image is always of the same dimensions as the underlying +image. <b>pamcomp</b> uses only parts of the overlay image that fit within the underlying image. <p>The output image is a PAM image. Its tuples are color, grayscale, or black @@ -100,9 +99,9 @@ and then the opacities are as described under the <b>-mixtransparency</b> option. Before Netpbm 10.56 (September 2011), the output never has an opacity channel. -<P>To specify where on the underlying image to place the overlay -image, use the <B>-align</B>, <B>-valign</B>, <B>-xoff</B>, and -<B>-yoff</B> options. Without these options, the default horizontal +<p>To specify where on the underlying image to place the overlay +image, use the <b>-align</b>, <b>-valign</b>, <b>-xoff</b>, and +<b>-yoff</b> options. Without these options, the default horizontal position is flush left and the default vertical position is flush top. <p>The overlay image, in the position you specify, need not fit entirely @@ -112,18 +111,23 @@ specify positioning such that <em>none</em> of the overlay image is over the underlying image -- i.e. the overlay is out of frame. If you do that, <b>pamcomp</b> issues a warning. -<P> The overlay and underlying images may be of different formats +<p> The overlay and underlying images may be of different formats (e.g. overlaying a PBM text image over a full color PPM image) and have different maxvals. The output image has the more general of the two input formats and a maxval that is the least common multiple the two maxvals (or the maximum maxval allowable by the format, if the LCM is more than that). -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-align=</b><i>alignment</i> -<DD> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamcomp</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-align=</b><i>alignment</i> +<dd> This option selects the basic horizontal position of the overlay image with respect to the underlying image, in syntax reminiscent of HTML. <b>left</b> means flush left, <b>center</b> means centered, and <b>right</b> @@ -139,8 +143,8 @@ added in Netpbm 10.10 (October 2002). <p>The default is <b>left</b>. -<DT><B>-valign=</b><i>alignment</i> -<DD> +<dt><b>-valign=</b><i>alignment</i> +<dd> This option selects the basic vertical position of the overlay image with respect to the underlying image, in syntax reminiscent of HTML. @@ -157,36 +161,36 @@ added in Netpbm 10.10 (October 2002). <p>The default is <b>top</b>. -<DT><B>-xoff=</B><I>x</I> +<dt><b>-xoff=</b><i>x</i> -<DD>This option modifies the horizontal positioning of the overlay +<dd>This option modifies the horizontal positioning of the overlay image with respect to the underlying image as selected by the <b>-align</b> option. <b>pamcomp</b> shifts the overlay image from that basic position <i>x</i> pixels to the right. <i>x</i> can be negative to indicate shifting to the left. <p>The overlay need not fit entirely (or at all) on the underlying image. -<B>pamcomp</B> uses only the parts that lie over the underlying image. +<b>pamcomp</b> uses only the parts that lie over the underlying image. -<P>Before Netpbm 10.10 (October 2002), <b>-xoff</b> was mutually +<p>Before Netpbm 10.10 (October 2002), <b>-xoff</b> was mutually exclusive with <b>-align</b> and always measured from the left edge. -<DT><B>-yoff=</B><I>y</I> +<dt><b>-yoff=</b><i>y</i> -<DD>This option modifies the vertical positioning of the overlay +<dd>This option modifies the vertical positioning of the overlay image with respect to the underlying image as selected by the <b>-valign</b> option. <b>pamcomp</b> shifts the overlay image from that basic position <i>y</i> pixels downward. <i>y</i> can be negative to indicate shifting upward. <p>The overlay need not fit entirely (or at all) on the underlying image. -<B>pamcomp</B> uses only the parts that lie over the underlying image. +<b>pamcomp</b> uses only the parts that lie over the underlying image. -<P>Before Netpbm 10.10 (October 2002), <b>-xoff</b> was mutually +<p>Before Netpbm 10.10 (October 2002), <b>-xoff</b> was mutually exclusive with <b>-valign</b> and always measured from the top edge. -<DT><B>-alpha=</B><i>alpha-pgmfile</i> -<DD> +<dt><b>-alpha=</b><i>alpha-pgmfile</i> +<dd> This option names a file that contains the transparency mask. If you don't specify this option, there is no transparency mask, which is equivalent to having a transparency mask specify total opaqueness everywhere. @@ -195,14 +199,14 @@ You can specify <b>-</b> as the value of this option and the transparency mask will come from Standard Input. If you do this, don't specify Standard Input as the source of any other input image. -<DT><B>-invert</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-invert</b> +<dd> This option inverts the sense of the values in the transparency mask, which effectively switches the roles of the overlay image and the underlying image in places where the two intersect. -<DT><B>-opacity=</B><i>opacity</i> -<DD> +<dt><b>-opacity=</b><i>opacity</i> +<dd> This option tells how opaque the overlay image is to be, i.e. how much of the composite image should be from the overlay image, as opposed to the underlying image. <i>opacity</i> is a floating point number, with @@ -274,7 +278,7 @@ gamma-adjusted numbers and internal intensity-proportional numbers. <p>Sometimes you are not working with true PNM or PAM images, but rather a variation in which the sample values are in fact directly proportional to intensity. If so, use the <b>-linear</b> option to -tell <b>pamcomp</b> this. <b>pamcomp</B> then will skip the +tell <b>pamcomp</b> this. <b>pamcomp</b> then will skip the conversions. <p>The conversion takes time. And the difference between @@ -297,50 +301,50 @@ other transformations that like linear PNM, and then convert it back to true PNM with <b>pnmgamma -ungamma</b>. <b>pnmgamma</b> is often faster than <b>pamcomp</b> in doing the conversion. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> <p><b><a href="pammixmulti.html">pammixmulti.html</a></b> mixes together two or more images of the same size, in various ways. -<p><B><A HREF="ppmmix.html">ppmmix</A></B> and <B><A -HREF="pnmpaste.html">pnmpaste</A></B> are simpler, less general +<p><b><a href="ppmmix.html">ppmmix</a></b> and <b><a +href="pnmpaste.html">pnmpaste</a></b> are simpler, less general versions of the same tool. -<p><B><A HREF="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</A></B> and <B><A -HREF="pbmmask.html">pbmmask</A></B>, and <a +<p><b><a href="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</a></b> and <b><a +href="pbmmask.html">pbmmask</a></b>, and <a href="pambackground.html"><b>pambackground</b></a> can help with generating a transparency mask. -<p><B><A HREF="pnmcomp.html">pnmcomp</A></B> is an older program that +<p><b><a href="pnmcomp.html">pnmcomp</a></b> is an older program that runs faster, but has less function. -<P><B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> +<p><b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamcomp</b> was new in Netpbm 10.21 (March 2004). Its predecessor, <b>pnmcomp</b>, was one of the first programs added to Netpbm when the project went global in 1993. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Copyright (C) 1992 by David Koblas (<A -HREF="mailto:koblas@mips.com">koblas@mips.com</A>). +Copyright (C) 1992 by David Koblas (<a +href="mailto:koblas@mips.com">koblas@mips.com</a>). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamcut.html b/pamcut.html index c0016b37..2ef2201f 100644 --- a/pamcut.html +++ b/pamcut.html @@ -1,57 +1,56 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamcut User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamcut</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamcut User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamcut</h1> Updated: 04 October 2019 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamcut - cut a rectangle out of a PAM, PBM, PGM, or PPM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamcut</B> +<b>pamcut</b> -[<B>-left </B><I>colnum</I>] +[<b>-left </b><i>colnum</i>] -[<B>-right </B><I>colnum</I>] +[<b>-right </b><i>colnum</i>] -[<B>-top </B><I>rownum</I>] +[<b>-top </b><i>rownum</i>] -[<B>-bottom </B><I>rownum</I>] +[<b>-bottom </b><i>rownum</i>] -[<B>-width </B><I>cols</I>] +[<b>-width </b><i>cols</i>] -[<B>-height </B><I>rows</I>] +[<b>-height </b><i>rows</i>] -[<B>-pad</B>] +[<b>-pad</b>] -[<B>-cropleft </B><I>numcols</I>] +[<b>-cropleft </b><i>numcols</i>] -[<B>-cropright </B><I>numcols</I>] +[<b>-cropright </b><i>numcols</i>] -[<B>-croptop </B><I>numrows</I>] +[<b>-croptop </b><i>numrows</i>] -[<B>-cropbottom </B><I>numrows</I>] +[<b>-cropbottom </b><i>numrows</i>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>left</i> <i>top</i> <i>width</i> <i>height</I>] +[<i>left</i> <i>top</i> <i>width</i> <i>height</i>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviations of option are acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviations of option are acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>pamcut</b> reads a PAM, PBM, PGM, or PPM image as input and +<p><b>pamcut</b> reads a PAM, PBM, PGM, or PPM image as input and extracts the specified rectangle, and produces the same kind of image as output. @@ -72,91 +71,96 @@ options. <p>For example, <b>-left=50 -right=200</b> means to keep the 150 columns between Columns 50 and 200 inclusive. -<P>You can code any mixture of the options. What you don't specify defaults. +<p>You can code any mixture of the options. What you don't specify defaults. Those defaults are in favor of minimal cutting and in favor of cutting the right and bottom edges off. It is an error to overspecify, i.e. to specify -all three of <B>-left</B>, <B>-right</B>, and <B>-width</B> or <B>-top</B>, -<B>-bottom</B>, and <B>-height</B> or <b>right</b> as well as +all three of <b>-left</b>, <b>-right</b>, and <b>-width</b> or <b>-top</b>, +<b>-bottom</b>, and <b>-height</b> or <b>right</b> as well as <b>-cropright</b>. -<P>There is an older way to specify the rectangle to keep: positional +<p>There is an older way to specify the rectangle to keep: positional arguments. Arguments were the only way available before July 2000, but you should not use them in new applications. Options are easier to remember and read, more expressive, and allow you to use defaults. -<P>If you use both options and arguments, the two specifications get +<p>If you use both options and arguments, the two specifications get mixed in an unspecified way. -<P>To use arguments, specify all four of the <I>left</I>, <I>top</I>, -<I>width</I>, and <I>height</I> arguments. <I>left</I> and <I>top</I> have -the same effect as specifying them as the argument of a <B>-left</B> or -<B>-top</B> option, respectively. <I>width</I> and <I>height</I> have the -same effect as specifying them as the argument of a <B>-width</B> or -<B>-height</B> option, respectively, where they are positive. Where they are +<p>To use arguments, specify all four of the <i>left</i>, <i>top</i>, +<i>width</i>, and <i>height</i> arguments. <i>left</i> and <i>top</i> have +the same effect as specifying them as the argument of a <b>-left</b> or +<b>-top</b> option, respectively. <i>width</i> and <i>height</i> have the +same effect as specifying them as the argument of a <b>-width</b> or +<b>-height</b> option, respectively, where they are positive. Where they are not positive, they have the same effect as specifying one less than the value -as the argument to a <B>-right</B> or <B>-bottom</B> option, respectively. -(E.g. <I>width</I> = 0 makes the cut go all the way to the right edge). -Before July 2000, negative numbers were not allowed for <I>width</I> and -<I>height</I>. +as the argument to a <b>-right</b> or <b>-bottom</b> option, respectively. +(E.g. <i>width</i> = 0 makes the cut go all the way to the right edge). +Before July 2000, negative numbers were not allowed for <i>width</i> and +<i>height</i>. -<P>Input is from Standard Input if you don't specify the input file -<I>pnmfile</I>. +<p>Input is from Standard Input if you don't specify the input file +<i>pnmfile</i>. -<P>Output is to Standard Output. +<p>Output is to Standard Output. <p><b>pamcut</b> works on a multi-image stream. It cuts each image in the stream independently and produces a multi-image stream output. Before Netpbm 10.32 (March 2006), it ignored all but the first image in the stream. -<P>If you are splitting a single image into multiple same-size images, -<B>pamdice</B> is faster and easier than running <B>pamcut</B> +<p>If you are splitting a single image into multiple same-size images, +<b>pamdice</b> is faster and easier than running <b>pamcut</b> multiple times. <p><b>pamcomp</b> is also useful for cutting and padding an image to a certain size. You create a background image of the desired frame dimensions and overlay the subject image on it. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamcut</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-left=</B><i>colnum</i> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-left=</b><i>colnum</i> -<DD>The column number of the leftmost column to be in the output. +<dd>The column number of the leftmost column to be in the output. Columns left of this get cut out. If a nonnegative number, it refers to columns numbered from 0 at the left, increasing to the right. If negative, it refers to columns numbered -1 at the right, decreasing to the left. -<DT><B>-right=</B><i>colnum</i> +<dt><b>-right=</b><i>colnum</i> -<DD>The column number of the rightmost column to be in the output, -numbered the same as for <B>-left.</B> Columns to the right of this +<dd>The column number of the rightmost column to be in the output, +numbered the same as for <b>-left.</b> Columns to the right of this get cut out. -<DT><B>-top=</B><i>rownum</i> +<dt><b>-top=</b><i>rownum</i> -<DD>The row number of the topmost row to be in the output. Rows above +<dd>The row number of the topmost row to be in the output. Rows above this get cut out. If a nonnegative number it refers to rows numbered from 0 at the top, increasing downward. If negative, it refers to columns numbered -1 at the bottom, decreasing upward. -<DT><B>-bottom=</B><i>rownum</i> +<dt><b>-bottom=</b><i>rownum</i> -<DD>The row number of the bottom-most row to be in the output, -numbered the same as for <B>-top</B>. Rows below this get cut out. +<dd>The row number of the bottom-most row to be in the output, +numbered the same as for <b>-top</b>. Rows below this get cut out. -<DT><B>-width=</B><i>cols</i> +<dt><b>-width=</b><i>cols</i> -<DD>The number of columns to be in the output. Must be positive. +<dd>The number of columns to be in the output. Must be positive. -<DT><B>-height=</B><i>rows</i> +<dt><b>-height=</b><i>rows</i> -<DD>The number of rows to be in the output. Must be positive. +<dd>The number of rows to be in the output. Must be positive. -<DT><B>-cropleft</B> -<DT><B>-cropright</B> -<DT><B>-croptop</B> -<DT><B>-cropbottom</B> +<dt><b>-cropleft</b> +<dt><b>-cropright</b> +<dt><b>-croptop</b> +<dt><b>-cropbottom</b> <dd>These options tell how many rows or columns to crop from the left, right, top, or bottom edges, respectively. @@ -168,15 +172,15 @@ can achieve the same thing with <b>-left</b>, <b>top</b>, and negative values for <b>-right</b> and <b>-bottom</b>. Remember to subtract one in the latter case; e.g. the equivalent of <b>-cropright=1</b> is <b>-right=-2</b>. -<DT><B>-pad</B> +<dt><b>-pad</b> -<DD>If the rectangle you specify is not entirely within the input -image, <B>pamcut</B> fails unless you also specify <B>-pad</B>. In +<dd>If the rectangle you specify is not entirely within the input +image, <b>pamcut</b> fails unless you also specify <b>-pad</b>. In that case, it pads the output with black up to the edges you specify. You can use this option if you need to have an image of certain dimensions and have an image of arbitrary dimensions. -<P><B>pnmpad</B> also adds borders to an image, but you specify their +<p><b>pnmpad</b> also adds borders to an image, but you specify their width directly. <p><b>pamcomp</b> does a more general form of this padding. Create a @@ -185,25 +189,25 @@ on it. You can use options to have the subject image in the center of the frame or against any edge and make the padding any color (the padding color is the color of the background image). -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD> +<dd> Print information about the processing to Standard Error. -</DL> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +</dl> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmcrop.html">pnmcrop</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamdice.html">pamdice</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmpad.html">pnmpad</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgmslice.html">pgmslice</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> +<b><a href="pnmcrop.html">pnmcrop</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamdice.html">pamdice</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmpad.html">pnmpad</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgmslice.html">pgmslice</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><B>pamcut</b> was derived from <b>pnmcut</b> in Netpbm 9.20 (May 2001). +<p><b>pamcut</b> was derived from <b>pnmcut</b> in Netpbm 9.20 (May 2001). It was the first Netpbm program adapted to the new PAM format and programming library. @@ -211,18 +215,19 @@ library. package. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamdice.html b/pamdice.html index 90531131..d3724d36 100644 --- a/pamdice.html +++ b/pamdice.html @@ -1,13 +1,12 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamdice User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamdice</H1> -Updated: 1 April 2007 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamdice User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamdice</h1> +Updated: 01 April 2007 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> pamdice - slice a Netpbm image into many horizontally and/or vertically <h2 id="example">EXAMPLE</h2> @@ -22,29 +21,29 @@ pamdice - slice a Netpbm image into many horizontally and/or vertically </pre> -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamdice</B> +<b>pamdice</b> -<B>-outstem=</B><I>filenamestem</I> +<b>-outstem=</b><i>filenamestem</i> -[<B>-width=</B><I>width</I>] +[<b>-width=</b><i>width</i>] -[<B>-height=</B><I>height</I>] +[<b>-height=</b><i>height</i>] -[<B>-hoverlap=</B><I>hoverlap</I>] +[<b>-hoverlap=</b><i>hoverlap</i>] -[<B>-voverlap=</B><I>voverlap</I>] +[<b>-voverlap=</b><i>voverlap</i>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>filename</I>] +[<i>filename</i>] -<P>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You can use +<p>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You can use two hyphens instead of one. You can separate an option name from its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -53,14 +52,14 @@ splits it horizontally and/or vertically into equal size pieces and writes them into separate files as the same kind of image. You can optionally make the pieces overlap. -<P>See the <B>-outstem</B> option for information on naming of the +<p>See the <b>-outstem</b> option for information on naming of the output files. -<P>The <B>-width</B> and <B>-height</B> options determine the size of +<p>The <b>-width</b> and <b>-height</b> options determine the size of the output pieces. <p><b>pamundice</b> can rejoin the images. For finer control, you can -also use <P><B>pnmcat</B>. +also use <p><b>pnmcat</b>. <p>One use for this is to make pieces that take less computer resources than the whole image to process. For example, you might have an image @@ -76,80 +75,85 @@ it lets you glue the pieces together into a sphere. grid, use <b>pamcut</b>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamdice</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-outstem=</B>filenamestem +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-outstem=</b>filenamestem -<DD>This option determines the names of the output files. Each output +<dd>This option determines the names of the output files. Each output file is named -<I>filenamestem</I><B>_</B><I>y</I><B>_</B><I>x</I><B>.</B><I>type</I> -where <I>filenamestem</I> is the value of the <B>-outstem</B> option, -<I>x</I> and y are the horizontal and vertical locations, +<i>filenamestem</i><b>_</b><i>y</i><b>_</b><i>x</i><b>.</b><i>type</i> +where <i>filenamestem</i> is the value of the <b>-outstem</b> option, +<i>x</i> and y are the horizontal and vertical locations, respectively, in the input image of the output image, zero being the -leftmost and top, and <I>type</I> is <B>.pbm</B>, <B>.pgm</B>, -<B>.ppm</B>, or <B>.pam</B>, depending on the type of image. +leftmost and top, and <i>type</i> is <b>.pbm</b>, <b>.pgm</b>, +<b>.ppm</b>, or <b>.pam</b>, depending on the type of image. -<DT><B>-width=</B><I>width</I> +<dt><b>-width=</b><i>width</i> -<DD>gives the width in pixels of the output images. The rightmost +<dd>gives the width in pixels of the output images. The rightmost pieces are smaller than this if the input image is not a multiple of -<I>width</I> pixels wide. +<i>width</i> pixels wide. -<DT><B>-height=</B><I>height</I> +<dt><b>-height=</b><i>height</i> -<DD>gives the height in pixels of the output images. The bottom +<dd>gives the height in pixels of the output images. The bottom pieces are smaller than this if the input image is not a multiple of -<I>height</I> pixels high. +<i>height</i> pixels high. -<DT><B>-hoverlap=</B><I>hoverlap</I> +<dt><b>-hoverlap=</b><i>hoverlap</i> -<DD>gives the horizontal overlap in pixels between output images. -Each image in a row will overlap the previous one by <I>hoverlap</I> +<dd>gives the horizontal overlap in pixels between output images. +Each image in a row will overlap the previous one by <i>hoverlap</i> pixels. By default, there is no overlap. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.23 (July 2004). -<DT><B>-voverlap=</B><I>voverlap</I> +<dt><b>-voverlap=</b><i>voverlap</i> -<DD>gives the vertical overlap in pixels between output images. -Each row of images will overlap the previous row by <I>voverlap</I> +<dd>gives the vertical overlap in pixels between output images. +Each row of images will overlap the previous row by <i>voverlap</i> pixels. By default, there is no overlap. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.23 (July 2004). -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Print information about the processing to Standard Error. +<dd>Print information about the processing to Standard Error. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamdice</b> was new in Netpbm 9.25 (March 2002). <p>Before Netpbm 10.29 (August 2005), there was a limit of 100 slices in each direction. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pamundice.html">pamundice</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgmslice.html">pgmslice</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmglobe.html">ppmglobe</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#example">EXAMPLE</A> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pamundice.html">pamundice</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgmslice.html">pgmslice</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmglobe.html">ppmglobe</a></b> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#example">EXAMPLE</a> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamenlarge.html b/pamenlarge.html index 70b3ca11..172f4e53 100644 --- a/pamenlarge.html +++ b/pamenlarge.html @@ -1,35 +1,34 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamenlarge User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamenlarge</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamenlarge User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamenlarge</h1> Updated: 07 January 2019 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamenlarge - Enlarge a Netpbm image N times -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamenlarge</B> +<b>pamenlarge</b> [<b>-scale=</b><i>integer</i>] [<b>-xscale=</b><i>integer</i>] [<b>-yscale=</b><i>integer</i>] -[<I>filename</I>] +[<i>filename</i>] -<B>pamenlarge</B> <I>N</I> [<I>pnmfile</I>] +<b>pamenlarge</b> <i>N</i> [<i>pnmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pamenlarge</b> reads a Netpbm image as input, replicates its pixels -<I>N</I> times, and produces a Netpbm image as output. The output is +<i>N</i> times, and produces a Netpbm image as output. The output is the same type of image as the input. -<P>If you enlarge by a factor of 3 or more, you should probably add a +<p>If you enlarge by a factor of 3 or more, you should probably add a <b>pnmsmooth</b> step; otherwise, you can see the original pixels in the resulting image. @@ -56,8 +55,8 @@ but at different speeds, each being faster than the one before. 10.41 (December 2007). Before 10.41, there are no special scale factors and PBM enlargement is significantly slower than today for all scale factors. -<P><b>pamenlarge</b> can enlarge only by integer factors. The slower -but more general <b>pamscale</B> can enlarge or reduce by arbitrary +<p><b>pamenlarge</b> can enlarge only by integer factors. The slower +but more general <b>pamscale</b> can enlarge or reduce by arbitrary factors. <b>pamscale</b> allows you to enlarge by resampling, which gives you smoother enlargements. But it is much slower. @@ -85,6 +84,11 @@ argument goes before the file name argument. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamenlarge</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-scale=</b><i>integer</i> <dt><b>-xscale=</b><i>integer</i> @@ -117,29 +121,29 @@ which was in Pbmplus as far back as 1989. The major difference is that <b>pamenlarge</b> can enlarge PAM format images in addition to PNM. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pbmreduce.html">pbmreduce</A>, -<A HREF="pamscale.html">pamscale</A>, -<A HREF="pamstretch.html">pamstretch</A>, -<A HREF="pbmpscale.html">pbmpscale</A>, -<A HREF="pnmsmooth.html">pnmsmooth</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<a href="pbmreduce.html">pbmreduce</a>, +<a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a>, +<a href="pamstretch.html">pamstretch</a>, +<a href="pbmpscale.html">pbmpscale</a>, +<a href="pnmsmooth.html">pnmsmooth</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#arguments">ARGUMENTS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#arguments">ARGUMENTS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamexec.html b/pamexec.html index a5f9b3af..579a018a 100644 --- a/pamexec.html +++ b/pamexec.html @@ -1,22 +1,21 @@ - <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamexec User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamexec</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamexec User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamexec</h1> Updated: 11 August 2011 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamexec - Execute a shell command on each image in a Netpbm image stream -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamexec</B> +<b>pamexec</b> ["<i>command</i>"] -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] [<b>-check</b>] @@ -25,7 +24,7 @@ hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -33,8 +32,8 @@ space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. runs a specified shell command and supplies the image to it as Standard Input (with a pipe). -<P><I>netpbmfile</I> is the file name of the input file, or -<B>-</B> to indicate Standard Input. The default is Standard Input. +<p><i>netpbmfile</i> is the file name of the input file, or +<b>-</b> to indicate Standard Input. The default is Standard Input. <p>Many Netpbm programs understand multimage Netpbm streams themselves, so you don't need to use <b>pamexec</b> to run the program on the images @@ -55,6 +54,11 @@ the result to <b>pamexec</b>. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamexec</b> recognizes the following +command line option: + <dl> <dt><b>-check</b> @@ -92,24 +96,25 @@ you can buffer through a temporary file like this: <p>Michael Pot wrote it, borrowing from <b>pamsplit</b>. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pamfile.html">pamfile</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pampick.html">pampick</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamsplit.html">pamsplit</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, -<B>cat</b> man page - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#applications">APPLICATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pamfile.html">pamfile</a></b>, +<b><a href="pampick.html">pampick</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamsplit.html">pamsplit</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, +<b>cat</b> man page + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#applications">APPLICATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamfile.html b/pamfile.html index 294075f2..2b8978e8 100644 --- a/pamfile.html +++ b/pamfile.html @@ -1,37 +1,36 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamfile User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamfile</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamfile User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamfile</h1> Updated: 04 July 2020 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamfile - describe a Netpbm (PAM or PNM) file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamfile</B> +<b>pamfile</b> -[<B>-allimages</B>] -[<B>-comments</B>] -[<B>-count</B>] -[<B>-machine</B>] -[<B>-size</B>] +[<b>-allimages</b>] +[<b>-comments</b>] +[<b>-count</b>] +[<b>-machine</b>] +[<b>-size</b>] -[<I>file</i> ...] +[<i>file</i> ...] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviations of options are acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviations of options are acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>pamfile</b> reads one or more Netpbm files as input and writes +<p><b>pamfile</b> reads one or more Netpbm files as input and writes out short descriptions of the image type, size, etc. This is partly for use in shell scripts, so the format is not particularly pretty. @@ -39,13 +38,18 @@ for use in shell scripts, so the format is not particularly pretty. If that file is a pipe, that might cause problems for the process that is feeding the pipe. In that case, see the <b>-allimages</b> option. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamfile</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-allimages</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-allimages</b> -<DD>This option causes <b>pamfile</b> to describe every image in each -input file. Without this option, <B>pamfile</B> describes only the +<dd>This option causes <b>pamfile</b> to describe every image in each +input file. Without this option, <b>pamfile</b> describes only the first image in each input file. <p>This option also causes <b>pamfile</b> to read all the images from @@ -91,8 +95,8 @@ and <b>-size</b>. as with no options. <p>The output is one line of ASCII text per image. Each line consists of - the file name, followed by a colon, followed by a space, then the - following tokens with a space in between: + the file name, followed by a colon, followed by a space, then the + following tokens with a space in between: <ol> <li>Format: "PAM", "PBM", "PGM", or @@ -132,28 +136,27 @@ use <b>-machine</b> instead. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.86 (March 2019). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</A></B>, -<B>file</B> +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</a></b>, +<b>file</b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamfind.html b/pamfind.html index 00690638..103024e2 100644 --- a/pamfind.html +++ b/pamfind.html @@ -1,29 +1,28 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamfind User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamfind</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamfind User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamfind</h1> Updated: 13 March 2019 -<BR> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamfind - Print the locations of all tuples of a certain value in an image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> -<B>pamfind</B> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> +<b>pamfind</b> { <b>-target=</b><i>sample0</i><b>,</b><i>sample1</i><b>,</b> ... | <b>-color=</b><i>color</i> } -[<B>-machine</B>] -[<I>imagefile</I>] +[<b>-machine</b>] +[<i>imagefile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -40,11 +39,11 @@ results as if they are. <p>To do the opposite, see what tuple is at a given location, use <b>pamcut</b> and <b>pamtable</b>: - <PRE> - <TT> + <pre> + <tt> $ pamcut -left=5 -top=7 -width=1 -height=1 | pamtable - </TT> - </PRE> + </tt> + </pre> <p><b>ppmcolormask</b> also finds all the tuples of a certain value, at least in visual images, but instead of printing their coordinates, it generates a @@ -52,7 +51,12 @@ mask image, which you can use to visualize where those tuples are or as input to another program. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamfind</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> @@ -69,7 +73,7 @@ the image (e.g. 3 if it is a color image). <dd> This is the color to find, assuming the image is a color visual image. -<P><i>color</i> is as described for the <a +<p><i>color</i> is as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. @@ -83,31 +87,31 @@ library routine</a>. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.87 (March 2020). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamgetcolor.html">pamgetcolor</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamtable.html">pamtable</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> +<b><a href="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamgetcolor.html">pamgetcolor</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamtable.html">pamtable</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamfind</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.86 (March 2019). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF=#history>HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamfunc.html b/pamfunc.html index d158393e..f58b2c45 100644 --- a/pamfunc.html +++ b/pamfunc.html @@ -1,19 +1,17 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><TITLE>Pamfunc User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> - -<BODY> -<H1>pamfunc</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamfunc User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamfunc</h1> Updated: December 2013 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamfunc - Apply a simple monadic arithmetic function to a Netpbm image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamfunc</B> +<b>pamfunc</b> { <b>-multiplier=</b><i>realnum</i> | <b>-divisor=</b><i>realnum</i> | @@ -29,23 +27,23 @@ pamfunc - Apply a simple monadic arithmetic function to a Netpbm image <b>-shiftright=</b><i>count</i> [<b>-changemaxval</b>] } -[<I>filespec</I>] +[<i>filespec</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pamfunc</b> reads a Netpbm image as input and produces a Netpbm +<p><b>pamfunc</b> reads a Netpbm image as input and produces a Netpbm image as output, with the same format, and dimensions as the input. <b>pamfunc</b> applies a simple transfer function to each sample in the input to generate the corresponding sample in the output. The options determine what function. -<P><b>pamarith</b> is the same thing for binary functions -- it takes +<p><b>pamarith</b> is the same thing for binary functions -- it takes two images as input and applies a specified simple arithmetic function (e.g. addition) on pairs of samples from the two to produce the single output image. @@ -85,8 +83,8 @@ range [0,1]. <h4>Bit string functions</h4> -<P>The bit string functions are those selected by the options -<B>-andmask</B>, <B>-ormask</B>, <B>-xormask</B>, <B>-not</B>, +<p>The bit string functions are those selected by the options +<b>-andmask</b>, <b>-ormask</b>, <b>-xormask</b>, <b>-not</b>, <b>-shiftleft</b>, and <b>-shiftright</b>. <p>With these functions, the maxval has a very different meaning than in @@ -112,44 +110,49 @@ more significant bits than the width indicated by the maxval. greater than the width indicated by the maxval. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamfunc</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-multiplier=<i>realnum</i></B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-multiplier=<i>realnum</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of multiplying by +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of multiplying by <i>realnum</i>. <i>realnum</i> must be nonnegative. If the result is greater than one, it is clipped to one. - <P>Where the input is a PGM or PPM image, this has the effect of + <p>Where the input is a PGM or PPM image, this has the effect of dimming or brightening it. For a different kind of brightening, see <a href="pambrighten.html"><b>pambrighten</b></a> and <a href="ppmflash.html"><b>ppmflash</b></a> - <P>Also, see <a href="ppmdim.html"><b>ppmdim</b></a>, which does the same + <p>Also, see <a href="ppmdim.html"><b>ppmdim</b></a>, which does the same thing as <b>pamfunc -multiplier</b> on a PPM image with a multiplier between zero and one, except it uses integer arithmetic, so it may be faster. - <P>And <a href="ppmfade.html"><b>ppmfade</b></a> can generate a whole + <p>And <a href="ppmfade.html"><b>ppmfade</b></a> can generate a whole sequence of images of brightness declining to black or increasing to white, if that's what you want. -<DT><B>-divisor=<i>realnum</i></B> +<dt><b>-divisor=<i>realnum</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of dividing by +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of dividing by <i>realnum</i>. <i>realnum</i> must be nonnegative. If the result is greater than one, it is clipped to one. - <P>This is the same function as you would get with <b>-multiplier</b>, + <p>This is the same function as you would get with <b>-multiplier</b>, specifying the multiplicative inverse of <i>realnum</i>. -<DT><B>-adder=<i>integer</i></B> +<dt><b>-adder=<i>integer</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of adding +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of adding <i>integer</i>/<i>maxval</i>. If the result is greater than one, it is clipped to one. If it is less than zero, it is clipped to zero. @@ -157,10 +160,10 @@ greater than the width indicated by the maxval. and an "adder" is a snake. We use "adder" because it makes more sense. -<DT><B>-subtractor=<i>integer</i></B> +<dt><b>-subtractor=<i>integer</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of subtracting +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of subtracting <i>integer</i>/<i>maxval</i>. If the result is greater than one, it is clipped to one. If it is less than zero, it is clipped to zero. @@ -168,53 +171,53 @@ greater than the width indicated by the maxval. "subtrahend" rather than a "subtractor." We use "subtractor" because it makes more sense. - <P>This is the same function as you would get with <b>-adder</b>, + <p>This is the same function as you would get with <b>-adder</b>, specifying the negative of <i>integer</i>. -<DT><B>-min=<i>wholenum</i></B> +<dt><b>-min=<i>wholenum</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of taking the maximum of +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of taking the maximum of the argument and <i>wholenum</i>/<i>maxval</i>. I.e the minimum value in the output will be <i>wholenum</i>/<i>maxval</i>. If <i>wholenum</i>/<i>maxval</i> is greater than one, though, every value in the output will be one. -<DT><B>-max=<i>wholenum</i></B> +<dt><b>-max=<i>wholenum</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of taking the minimum of +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of taking the minimum of the argument and <i>wholenum</i>/<i>maxval</i>. I.e the maximum value in the output will be <i>wholenum</i>/<i>maxval</i>. If <i>wholenum</i>/<i>maxval</i> is greater than one, the function is idempotent -- the output is identical to the input. -<DT><B>-andmask=<i>hexmask</i></B> +<dt><b>-andmask=<i>hexmask</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of bitwise anding +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of bitwise anding with <i>hexmask</i>. <p><i>hexmask</i> is in hexadecimal. Example: <kbd>0f</kbd> <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.40 (September 2007). -<DT><B>-ormask=<i>hexmask</i></B> +<dt><b>-ormask=<i>hexmask</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of bitwise +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of bitwise inclusive oring with <i>hexmask</i>. <p>This is analogous to <b>-andmask</b>. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.40 (September 2007). -<DT><B>-xormask=<i>hexmask</i></B> +<dt><b>-xormask=<i>hexmask</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of bitwise +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of bitwise exclusive oring with <i>hexmask</i>. <p>This is analogous to <b>-andmask</b>. @@ -232,18 +235,18 @@ greater than the width indicated by the maxval. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.40 (September 2007). -<DT><B>-shiftleft=<i>count</i></B> +<dt><b>-shiftleft=<i>count</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of bitwise shifting +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of bitwise shifting left by <i>count</i> bits. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.40 (September 2007). -<DT><B>-shiftright=<i>count</i></B> +<dt><b>-shiftright=<i>count</i></b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the transfer function that of bitwise shifting +<dd> + <p>This option makes the transfer function that of bitwise shifting right by <i>count</i> bits. <p>This is analogous to <b>-shiftleft</b>. @@ -280,39 +283,39 @@ and the round trip is idempotent. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.65 (December 2013). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmdim.html">ppmdim</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pambrighten.html">pambrighten</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamarith.html">pamarith</A></B>, -<b><A HREF="pamsummcol.html">pamsummcol</A></b>, -<b><A HREF="pamsumm.html">pamsumm</A></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppmfade.html">ppmfade</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnminvert.html">pnminvert</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppmdim.html">ppmdim</a></b>, +<b><a href="pambrighten.html">pambrighten</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamarith.html">pamarith</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamsummcol.html">pamsummcol</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamsumm.html">pamsumm</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmfade.html">ppmfade</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnminvert.html">pnminvert</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p>This program was added to Netpbm in Release 10.3 (June 2002). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> <ul> <li><a href="#values">Values</a> </ul> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamgauss.html b/pamgauss.html index 07bf977b..69d0a3da 100644 --- a/pamgauss.html +++ b/pamgauss.html @@ -1,18 +1,17 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamgauss User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamgauss</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamgauss User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamgauss</h1> Updated: 18 May 2017 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> <b>pamgauss</b> - create a two-dimensional Gaussian function as a PAM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamgauss</B> +<b>pamgauss</b> <i>width</i> <i>height</i> <b>-sigma=</b><i>number</i> @@ -27,14 +26,14 @@ hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> <pre> pamgauss 7 7 -sigma=.5 -maximize -tupletype=GRAYSCALE | pamtopnm >gauss.pgm pnmconvol -nooffset -normalize gauss.pgm myimage.ppm >blurred.ppm </pre> -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -77,7 +76,12 @@ center of the image and assigns the 3rd sample from the left the mean of those 10 values. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamgauss</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> <dt><b>-sigma=</b><i>number</i> @@ -143,26 +147,27 @@ essentially 1 - there is no oversampling. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgmkernel.html">pgmkernel</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamseq.html">pamseq</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> +<b><a href="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgmkernel.html">pgmkernel</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamseq.html">pamseq</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamgauss</b> was new in Netpbm 10.23 (July 2004). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamgetcolor.html b/pamgetcolor.html index e4b6ae75..b1ebe058 100644 --- a/pamgetcolor.html +++ b/pamgetcolor.html @@ -1,15 +1,12 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<html><head> -<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; -charset=windows-1252"><title>Pamgetcolor User Manual</title> -</head><body> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamgetcolor User Manual</title></head> +<body> <h1>pamgetcolor</h1> Updated: 18 May 2018 <br> <a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> <h2>NAME</h2> - pamgetcolor - display the average colors from specified regions in an image. <h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> @@ -71,6 +68,11 @@ of four pixels and the center at (100,100): <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamgetcolor</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-format</b> @@ -119,7 +121,7 @@ than to brightness, as in true (gamma-adjusted) Netpbm formats. <h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<p><B><A HREF="pnmcolormap.html">pnmcolormap</A></B>, +<p><b><a href="pnmcolormap.html">pnmcolormap</a></b>, <h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> @@ -127,7 +129,7 @@ than to brightness, as in true (gamma-adjusted) Netpbm formats. <p>This program was first submitted by Anton Shepelev (<a href="mailto:anton.txt@gmail.com">anton.txt@gmail.com</a>). -</p><h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p>This program was new in Netpbm 10.83 (June 2018). diff --git a/pamgradient.html b/pamgradient.html index e2bcc7b5..075c61ce 100644 --- a/pamgradient.html +++ b/pamgradient.html @@ -1,24 +1,21 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD> - <TITLE>Pamgradient User Manual</TITLE> -</HEAD> -<BODY> - -<H1>pamgradient</H1>Updated: 21 October 2005 -<BR> -<A href="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamgradient User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamgradient</h1> +Updated: 21 October 2005 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> pamgradient - create a four-corner gradient PAM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamgradient</B> -[<B>-maxval=</B><I>maxval</I>] -<I>color-tl</i> <i>color-tr</i> <i>color-bl</i> <i>color-br</i> +<b>pamgradient</b> +[<b>-maxval=</b><i>maxval</i>] +<i>color-tl</i> <i>color-tr</i> <i>color-bl</i> <i>color-br</i> <br> -<i>width</i> <i>height</I> +<i>width</i> <i>height</i> <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double @@ -26,53 +23,58 @@ hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> -<P>This program is part of <A href="index.html">Netpbm</A>. +<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><B>pamgradient</B> creates an image of the specified -dimensions <I>width</I> by <I>height</I> which contains a smooth, +<p><b>pamgradient</b> creates an image of the specified +dimensions <i>width</i> by <i>height</i> which contains a smooth, two-dimensional gradient between the specified colors of the four corners (from top left to bottom right). -<P>Specify the colors as described for the <a +<p>Specify the colors as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. -<P>If all four colors are gray values, <B>pamgradient</B> creates a +<p>If all four colors are gray values, <b>pamgradient</b> creates a grayscale image (PAM tuple type GRAYSCALE). Otherwise, it creates a color image (PAM tuple type RGB). -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamgradient</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DL compact> - <DT><B>-maxval=</B><I>maxval</I> +<dl compact> + <dt><b>-maxval=</b><i>maxval</i> - <DD>maxval of the generated image. (See <a href="pam.html">PAM</a> and + <dd>maxval of the generated image. (See <a href="pam.html">PAM</a> and <a href="pnm.html">PNM</a> specifications). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="see_also">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A href="pamgradient.html"><b>pamgradient</b></A>, -<A href="ppmmake.html"><b>ppmmake</b></A>, -<A href="ppmrainbow.html"><b>ppmrainbow</b></A>, -<A href="pgmramp.html"><b>pgmramp</b></A>, -<A href="ppmpat.html"><b>ppmpat</b></A>, -<A href="pam.html">pam</A>, -<A href="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<a href="pamgradient.html"><b>pamgradient</b></a>, +<a href="ppmmake.html"><b>ppmmake</b></a>, +<a href="ppmrainbow.html"><b>ppmrainbow</b></a>, +<a href="pgmramp.html"><b>pgmramp</b></a>, +<a href="ppmpat.html"><b>ppmpat</b></a>, +<a href="pam.html">pam</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> -<H2 id="note">NOTE</H2> +<h2 id="note">NOTE</h2> -<P>Only the top left corner of the generated image has exactly +<p>Only the top left corner of the generated image has exactly the specified color. The color of the top right corner is a bit shifted to the left, the bottom left corner a bit up, and the bottom right corner left and up. This ensures nice transitions when combining adjacent (very narrow) gradients, and doesn't play a role when the gradient butts against a solid surface. -<P>This effect is created by the integer arithmetic used for the +<p>This effect is created by the integer arithmetic used for the interpolation of the color values, and since it doesn't make a difference for all practical purposes I might as well sell it as a feature. @@ -81,21 +83,21 @@ feature. <p><b>pamgradient</b> was new in Netpbm 10.31 (December 2005). -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<P>pamgradient was written by Daniel Haude in October 2005. -<HR> +<p>pamgradient was written by Daniel Haude in October 2005. +<hr> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> -<UL> - <LI><A href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> - <LI><A href="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> - <LI><A href="#options">OPTIONS</A> - <LI><A href="#see_also">SEE ALSO</A> - <LI><A href="#note">NOTE</A> - <LI><A href="#history">HISTORY</A> - <LI><A href="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#note">NOTE</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamhue.html b/pamhue.html index 98f0a98c..7d15393d 100644 --- a/pamhue.html +++ b/pamhue.html @@ -1,26 +1,26 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamhue User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamhue</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamhue User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamhue</h1> Updated: 07 January 2018 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamhue - change a Netpbm image's hues -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <b>pamhue</b> [<b>-huechange=</b>[<i>degrees</i>]] <i>filename</i> -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ would change all red pixels to yellow and all yellow pixels to green, etc. <b>pambrighten</b>. -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> <p>To shift the color of each pixel 120 degrees clockwise: <pre> @@ -58,38 +58,43 @@ pamhue -huechange=-120 </pre> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL> -<DT><b>-huechange=</b><i>degrees</i> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamhue</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DD>This option specifies the amount to shift each color. It is in degrees, +<dl> +<dt><b>-huechange=</b><i>degrees</i> + +<dd>This option specifies the amount to shift each color. It is in degrees, with positive meaning clockwise and negative meaning counterclockwise. It may be fractional and may be more than a full revolution. <p>This option is mandatory. -</DL> +</dl> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamhue</b> was new in Netpbm 10.86 (March 2019). -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pambrighten.html">pambrighten</A>, -<A HREF="ppmflash.html">ppmflash</A>, -<A HREF="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="pambrighten.html">pambrighten</a>, +<a href="ppmflash.html">ppmflash</a>, +<a href="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Copyright (C) 2018 by Willem van Schaik. Copyright (C) 1990 by Brian Moffet. Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<P> +<p> Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that @@ -97,16 +102,16 @@ copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamlevels.html b/pamlevels.html index 2b945a67..634839ee 100644 --- a/pamlevels.html +++ b/pamlevels.html @@ -1,29 +1,28 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamlevels User Manual</TITLE> -</HEAD><BODY> -<H1>pamlevels</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamlevels User Manual</title> +</head><body> +<h1>pamlevels</h1> Updated: 13 June 2018 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamlevels - effect a "levels" transformation -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamlevels</B> -<b>-from1</b> <I>from1</I> -<b>-to1</b> <I>to1</I> -<b>-from2</b> <I>from2</I> -<b>-to2</b> <I>to2</I> -[<b>-from3</b> <I>from3</I> -<b>-to3</b> <I>to3</I>] +<b>pamlevels</b> +<b>-from1</b> <i>from1</i> +<b>-to1</b> <i>to1</i> +<b>-from2</b> <i>from2</i> +<b>-to2</b> <i>to2</i> +[<b>-from3</b> <i>from3</i> +<b>-to3</b> <i>to3</i>] [<b>-linear</b>] [<b>-fitbrightness</b>] -[<I>pamfile</I>] +[<i>pamfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -46,10 +45,10 @@ color-mapping options may be shortened to <b>-f1</b>...<b>-f3</b> and <p>When the transformation is linear (i.e. uses two mappings) and preserves zero (i.e. maps black to black), it corresponds to multiplication of light intensity by a constant and preserves -<A HREF="http://www.c-f-systems.com/ColorIntegrity.html">color integrity</A>. +<a href="http://www.c-f-systems.com/ColorIntegrity.html">color integrity</a>. -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> In the examples below, <code>\</code> denotes a line continuation: <p>To brighten an image by setting a darker white point— @@ -73,6 +72,11 @@ The latter tranformation is similar to gamma-correction. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamlevels</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-from1</b> <dt><b>-to1</b> @@ -117,32 +121,32 @@ implemented. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmnorm.html">pnmnorm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamrecolor.html">pamrecolor</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmgamma.html">pnmgamma</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pnm</A></B> +<b><a href="pnmnorm.html">pnmnorm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamrecolor.html">pamrecolor</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmgamma.html">pnmgamma</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pnm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>This program was first submitted by Anton Shepelev -(<A HREF="mailto:anton.txt@gmail.com">anton.txt@gmail.com</A>). +(<a href="mailto:anton.txt@gmail.com">anton.txt@gmail.com</a>). -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamlevels</b> was new in Netpbm 10.83 (June 2018). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamlookup.html b/pamlookup.html index 1dcd593d..d1c558b5 100644 --- a/pamlookup.html +++ b/pamlookup.html @@ -1,30 +1,29 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><title>Pamlookup User Manual</title></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamlookup</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamlookup User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamlookup</h1> Updated: 25 July 2015 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2 id="name">NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamlookup - map an image to a new image by using it as indices into a table -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamlookup</B> -<B>-lookupfile=</B><i>lookupfile</i> -[<B>-byplane</B>] -<B>-missingcolor=</B><i>color</i> -[<B>-fit</B>] -<I>indexfile</I> +<b>pamlookup</b> +<b>-lookupfile=</b><i>lookupfile</i> +[<b>-byplane</b>] +<b>-missingcolor=</b><i>color</i> +[<b>-fit</b>] +<i>indexfile</i> -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -111,7 +110,7 @@ index image file and lookup table file are Standard Input. <h3 id="wholetupleexample">Example - Whole Tuple Indexing</h3> -<P>Here is an example of <b>pamlookup</b>'s function with whole +<p>Here is an example of <b>pamlookup</b>'s function with whole tuple indexing (<b>-byplane</b> not specified). <p>Consider an index image consisting of a 3x2x1 PAM as follows: @@ -171,7 +170,7 @@ is the following PPM image: <h3 id="byplaneexample">Example - By Plane Indexing</h3> -<P>Here is an example of <b>pamlookup</b>'s function with by plane +<p>Here is an example of <b>pamlookup</b>'s function with by plane tuple indexing (<b>-byplane</b> specified). <p>Consider an index image consisting of a 3x2x3 PAM as follows: @@ -200,7 +199,7 @@ corresponds to 4, and Index 2 corresponds to 7. The output of </table> -<h3 id="misc">Miscellaneous</h3> +<h3 id="miscellaneous">Miscellaneous</h3> <p>The <i>indexfile</i> argument identifies the file containing the index PAM or PNM image. <b>-</b> means Standard Input. @@ -214,12 +213,17 @@ output reflects the combination of both inputs), use <b>pamstack</b> to combine the two into one two-plane image (and use a 2-dimensional lookup table image). -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-lookupfile=</B><i>lookupfile</i> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamlookup</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD><i>lookupfile</i> names the file that contains the PAM or PNM +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-lookupfile=</b><i>lookupfile</i> + +<dd><i>lookupfile</i> names the file that contains the PAM or PNM image that is the lookup table. This option is mandatory. <dt><b>-byplane</b> @@ -230,9 +234,9 @@ indexing. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.72 (September 2015). Before that, there is no by plane indexing. -<DT><B>-missingcolor=</B><i>color</i> +<dt><b>-missingcolor=</b><i>color</i> -<DD>This option is meaningful only if the lookup image (and therefore the +<dd>This option is meaningful only if the lookup image (and therefore the output) is a PNM image. <i>color</i> specifies the color that is to go in the output wherever the index from the input is not present in the lookup table (not present means the index exceeds the dimensions @@ -243,19 +247,19 @@ PPM). uses the value from the top left corner of the lookup image whenever an index exceeds the dimensions of the lookup image. -<P>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a +<p>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. -<P>Another way to deal with a too-small lookup image is to use the +<p>Another way to deal with a too-small lookup image is to use the <b>-fit</b> option. <p>This option has no effect if you also specify <b>-fit</b> or <b>-byplane</b>. -<DT><B>-fit</B> +<dt><b>-fit</b> -<DD>This option says to shrink or expand the lookup image as necessary +<dd>This option says to shrink or expand the lookup image as necessary to fit the indices present in the index image, per the index image's maxval. For example, if your index image has a single plane and a maxval of 255 and your lookup image is 1 row of 10 columns, @@ -272,9 +276,9 @@ option has no effect. <b>pamlookup</b> always has the behavior requested by <b>-fit</b> when it does by plane indexing. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> <h3>Example: rainfall map</h3> @@ -315,7 +319,7 @@ Now if there are areas that get more than 100 centimeters of rainfall, they will just show up black in the output. <h3>Example: graphical diff</h3> -<P> +<p> Say you want to compare two PBM (black and white) images visually. Each consists of black foreground pixels on a white background. You want to create an image that contains background where both images contain background @@ -360,36 +364,36 @@ produce the output: </pre> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pamunlookup.html">pamunlookup</A>, -<A HREF="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</A>, -<A HREF="ppmmake.html">ppmmake</A>, -<A HREF="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</A>, -<A HREF="pamstack.html">pamstack</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A>, -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A> +<a href="pamunlookup.html">pamunlookup</a>, +<a href="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</a>, +<a href="ppmmake.html">ppmmake</a>, +<a href="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</a>, +<a href="pamstack.html">pamstack</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a>, +<a href="pam.html">pam</a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamlookup</b> was new in Netpbm 10.13 (December 2002). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL COMPACT> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul compact> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> <ul> <li><a href="#lookupimage">The Lookup Table Image</a> <li><a href="#wholetupleexample">Example - Whole Tuple Indexing</a> <li><a href="#byplaneexample">Example - By Plane Indexing</a> <li><a href="#miscellaneous">Miscellaneous</a> </ul> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pammasksharpen.html b/pammasksharpen.html index d10a0805..6ed01383 100644 --- a/pammasksharpen.html +++ b/pammasksharpen.html @@ -1,40 +1,39 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><TITLE>Pammasksharpen User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pammasksharpen</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pammasksharpen User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pammasksharpen</h1> Updated: 14 June 2006 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pammasksharpen - Sharpen an image via an unsharp mask -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pammasksharpen</B> +<b>pammasksharpen</b> [<b>-sharpness=</b><i>realnum</i>] [<b>-threshold=</b><i>realnum</i>] -<I>maskfile</I> [<I>inputfile</I>] +<i>maskfile</i> [<i>inputfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> <pre> - pamgauss 5 5 -sigma=.7 -tupletype=GRAYSCALE | pamtopnm >gauss.pgm - pnmconvol -nooffset gauss.pgm myimage.ppm >blurred.ppm - pammasksharpen blurred.ppm myimage.ppm >sharpened.ppm + pamgauss 5 5 -sigma=.7 -tupletype=GRAYSCALE | pamtopnm > gauss.pgm + pnmconvol -nooffset gauss.pgm myimage.ppm > blurred.ppm + pammasksharpen blurred.ppm myimage.ppm > sharpened.ppm </pre> -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pammasksharpen</b> reads a Netpbm image as input and produces a +<p><b>pammasksharpen</b> reads a Netpbm image as input and produces a sharpened version of it, in the same format, as output. It does this via an unsharp mask, which you supply as another Netpbm image. @@ -77,13 +76,18 @@ larger detail (more pixels involved), so can use a larger radius. Radius and sharpness (see <b>-sharpness</b> option) interact: reducing one allows you to increase the other. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pammasksharpen</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DT><B>-sharpness=</B><I>realnum</I> +<dl compact> -<DD>This specifies the magnitude of the sharpening. It is the multiple +<dt><b>-sharpness=</b><i>realnum</i> + +<dd>This specifies the magnitude of the sharpening. It is the multiple of edgeness that gets added to each sample as described above. <p><i>realnum</i> is a nonnegative real decimal number. Zero means @@ -96,7 +100,7 @@ no sharpening at all. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.30 (October 2005). Before that, the sharpness was always 1.0. -<DT><B>-threshold=</B><I>realnum</I> +<dt><b>-threshold=</b><i>realnum</i> <dd>This minimum amount of edgeness that will be considered edgeness at all. i.e. if the magnitude of the edgeness is less than this, @@ -113,28 +117,30 @@ areas. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</A>, -<A HREF="pamedge.html">pamedge</A>, -<A HREF="pamsharpness.html">pamsharpness</A>, -<A HREF="pamsharpmap.html">pamsharpmap</A>, -<A HREF="pamarith.html">pamarith</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A>, -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A> +<a href="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</a>, +<a href="pamedge.html">pamedge</a>, +<a href="pamsharpness.html">pamsharpness</a>, +<a href="pamsharpmap.html">pamsharpmap</a>, +<a href="pamarith.html">pamarith</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a>, +<a href="pam.html">pam</a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pammasksharpen</b> was new in Netpbm 10.23 (July 2004). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pammixinterlace.html b/pammixinterlace.html index 8db7b63a..ee421955 100644 --- a/pammixinterlace.html +++ b/pammixinterlace.html @@ -1,31 +1,30 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pammixinterlace User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pammixinterlace</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pammixinterlace User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pammixinterlace</h1> Updated: 22 February 2007 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pammixinterlace - mix adjacent lines to merge interlaced images -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pammixinterlace</B> +<b>pammixinterlace</b> [<b>-filter=</b>{<b>linear</b>, <b>fir</b>, <b>ffmpeg</b>}] [<b>-adaptive</b>] -[<I>infile</I>] +[<i>infile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>pammixinterlace</B> is meant to operate on an image which is the +<p><b>pammixinterlace</b> is meant to operate on an image which is the interlacing of two images, where raster rows 0, 2, 4, etc. are from one image and rows 1, 3, 5, etc. are from another. (See below for why you might expect to encounter such an image). @@ -34,7 +33,7 @@ why you might expect to encounter such an image). of the corresponding row of the input and its two neighbors. It uses half of the main row and a quarter each of the two neighbor rows. -<P>This can be useful if the image is a video capture from an +<p>This can be useful if the image is a video capture from an interlaced video source. In that case, each row shows the subject 1/60 second before or after the two rows that surround it. If the subject is moving, this can detract from the quality of the image. @@ -58,6 +57,11 @@ You can do that with <b>pamdeinterlace</b>. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pammixinterlace</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-filter=</b>{<b>linear</b>,<b>fir</b>,<b>ffmpeg</b>} @@ -79,19 +83,19 @@ a "comb" pattern. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamdeinterlace.html">pamdeinterlace</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> +<b><a href="pamdeinterlace.html">pamdeinterlace</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pampaintspill.html b/pampaintspill.html index e54afcec..935529f2 100644 --- a/pampaintspill.html +++ b/pampaintspill.html @@ -1,50 +1,46 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> -<head> -<title>Pampaintspill User Manual</title> -<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=us-ascii" /> -</head> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pampaintspill User Manual</title></head> <body> - <h1>pampaintspill</h1> +Updated: 09 February 2020 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<p><a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a></p> +<h2>NAME</h2> +pampaintspill - smoothly spill colors into the background -<p>pampaintspill - smoothly spill colors into the background</p> - -<h2><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></h2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <p> <b>pampaintspill</b> [<b>--bgcolor</b>=<i>color</i>] [<b>--wrap</b>] [<b>--all</b>] [<b>--downsample</b>=<i>number</i>] -[<b>--power</b>=<i>number</i>] [<i>filename</i>]</p> +[<b>--power</b>=<i>number</i>] [<i>filename</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviations of option are acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviations of option are acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. <h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> -<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>.</p> +<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pampaintspill</b> produces a smooth color gradient from all of the non-background-colored pixels in an input image, effectively "spilling paint" onto the background. <b>pampaintspill</b> is similar to -<b>pamgradient</b> but differs in the following characteristics:</p> +<b>pamgradient</b> but differs in the following characteristics: <ul> <li><b>pampaintspill</b> accepts any number of paint sources (non-background-colored pixels), which can lie anywhere on the canvas. <b>pamgradient</b> accepts exactly - four paint sources, one in each corner of the image.</li> + four paint sources, one in each corner of the image. <li><b>pampaintspill</b> requires an input image while <b>pamgradient</b> generates a new image from - scratch.</li> + scratch. <li><b>pampaintspill</b> can produce tileable output and can control how tightly the gradient colors bind to their source @@ -53,10 +49,15 @@ paint" onto the background. <b>pampaintspill</b> is similar to <p>Results are generally best when the input image contains just a few, crisp spots of color. Use your drawing program's pencil tool — as opposed to a -paintbrush or airbrush tool — with a small nib.</p> +paintbrush or airbrush tool — with a small nib. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pampaintspill</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>--bgcolor</b>=<i>color</i></dt> <dd>Explicitly specify the background color. <i>color</i> can be @@ -103,14 +104,14 @@ paintbrush or airbrush tool — with a small nib.</p> </dl> -<h2 id="see_also">SEE ALSO</h2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> <ul> <li><a href="pamgradient.html">pamgradient</a> -<li><A href="ppmmake.html"><b>ppmmake</b></A>, -<li><A href="ppmrainbow.html"><b>ppmrainbow</b></A>, -<li><A href="pgmramp.html"><b>pgmramp</b></A>, -<li><A href="ppmpat.html"><b>ppmpat</b></A>, +<li><a href="ppmmake.html"><b>ppmmake</b></a>, +<li><a href="ppmrainbow.html"><b>ppmrainbow</b></a>, +<li><a href="pgmramp.html"><b>pgmramp</b></a>, +<li><a href="ppmpat.html"><b>ppmpat</b></a>, <li><a href="pam.html">pam</a> </ul> @@ -127,13 +128,12 @@ paintbrush or airbrush tool — with a small nib.</p> <h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> <ul> - <li><a href="#name">NAME</a></li> - <li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></li> - <li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a></li> - <li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a></li> - <li><a href="#see_also">SEE ALSO</a></li> - <li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a></li> - <li><a href="#copyright">COPYRIGHT</a></li> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#copyright">COPYRIGHT</a> </ul> </body> diff --git a/pamrecolor.html b/pamrecolor.html index 6acc05be..3f341d4f 100644 --- a/pamrecolor.html +++ b/pamrecolor.html @@ -1,22 +1,13 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN"> -<html> -<head> -<title>Pamrecolor User Manual</title> -<meta http-equiv="Content-type" content="text/html;charset=UTF-8"> -</head> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamrecolor User Manual</title></head> <body> - <h1>pamrecolor</h1> +Updated: 31 July 2010 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<p>Updated: 31 July 2010</p> - -<p><a href="#contents">Table Of Contents</a></p> - - -<h2 id="name">NAME</h2> - -<p>pamrecolor - alter colors without affecting luminance</p> +<h2>NAME</h2> +pamrecolor - alter colors without affecting luminance <h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> @@ -31,7 +22,6 @@ [<b>-randomseed=</b><i>integer</i>] [<i>infile</i>] -</p> <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double @@ -40,7 +30,7 @@ space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. <h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> -<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>.</p> +<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pamrecolor</b> changes an image's colors to be as close as possible to given target colors but with the constraint that the @@ -49,7 +39,7 @@ image will look identical if both are converted to grayscale (e.g. with <a href="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</a>). You can have <b>pamrecolor</b> select target colors randomly, specify a single hue for the entire image, or take the -target colors from a target image.</p> +target colors from a target image. <p><b>pamrecolor</b> works on pseudo-Netpbm images based on arbitrary color spaces. You can define the color space explicitly or choose one @@ -59,11 +49,16 @@ of many that <b>pamrecolor</b> knows by name. exact format of the PAM. If you want a PNM (PBM, PGM, or PPM) image, use <a href="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</a> on the output. There is no need to convert if you will use the image as input to a current Netpbm -program, but many other programs don't know what a PAM is.</p> +program, but many other programs don't know what a PAM is. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamrecolor</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>--colorspace</b>=<i>name</i></dt> @@ -114,12 +109,12 @@ the format that uses sRGB. <p>The default is "ntsc" because this is the color space that the Netpbm formats and many graphics utilities use. As a counterexample, <a href="http://www.gimp.org/">GIMP</a> uses sRGB as its native color -space.</p> +space. <p>The luminance values <b>pamrecolor</b> uses for each of the above come from Bruce Lindbloom's <a href="http://www.brucelindbloom.com/index.html?Eqn_RGB_XYZ_Matrix.html"> -Computing RGB-to-XYZ and XYZ-to-RGB matrices</a> page.</p></dd> +Computing RGB-to-XYZ and XYZ-to-RGB matrices</a> page.</dd> <dt><b>--rmult</b>=<i>fraction</i></dt> <dt><b>--gmult</b>=<i>fraction</i></dt> @@ -142,7 +137,7 @@ library routine</a> (e.g., "hotpink" or "#ff69b4"). <p>If you specify neither <b>--targetcolor</b> nor <b>--colorfile</b>, <b>pamrecolor</b> will randomly select a target color for -each pixel of the input image.</p> +each pixel of the input image. <p>You may not specify both <b>-targetcolor</b> and <b>-colorfile</b>. @@ -159,7 +154,7 @@ image to be repeated in a tile pattern. <p>If you specify neither <b>--targetcolor</b> nor <b>--colorfile</b>, <b>pamrecolor</b> will randomly select a target color for -each pixel of the input image.</p> +each pixel of the input image. <p>You may not specify both <b>-targetcolor</b> and <b>-colorfile</b>. @@ -181,23 +176,23 @@ invocations. <h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> -<p>This command tints an image yellow:</p> +<p>This command tints an image yellow: <pre> - pamrecolor --targetcolor=yellow colorpic.pam > yellowpic.pam + pamrecolor --targetcolor=yellow colorpic.pam > yellowpic.pam </pre> <p>This command takes the colors from <b>colorpicture.ppm</b> and applies -them to <b>graypicture.pgm</b>:</p> +them to <b>graypicture.pgm</b>: <pre> - pamrecolor --colorfile=colorpic.ppm graypic.pgm > colorizedpic.pam + pamrecolor --colorfile=colorpic.ppm graypic.pgm > colorizedpic.pam </pre> <p>The grayscale version of <b>colorizedpic.pam</b> will look just like graypic.pgm. Note that if you use a non-Netpbm tool to do the conversion to grayscale, you may additionally need to specify an -appropriate <b>--colorspace</b> value for your conversion tool.</p> +appropriate <b>--colorspace</b> value for your conversion tool. <h2 id="notes">NOTES</h2> @@ -208,25 +203,25 @@ appropriate <b>--colorspace</b> value for your conversion tool.</p> <ul> <li>Specify a color file that is identical to the input image but with some large, colored text added to it. The text will "magically" -vanish when the image is converted to grayscale.</li> +vanish when the image is converted to grayscale. <li>Provide a low-contrast grayscale image — perhaps a secret message written in similar shades of gray — as the input file and a colorful but completely different image as the color file. If done carefully, the grayscale image can be hidden by the colorful image. Only people who know to convert the result to grayscale can recover -the original grayscale image.</li> +the original grayscale image. <li>Use <b>--targetcolor</b>=tan to make an image look like an old-timey photograph (or, more precisely, a <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Photographic_print_toning">sepia-toned -photograph</a> of the late 1800s).</li> +photograph</a> of the late 1800s). </ul> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<p>Scott Pakin wrote <b>pamrecolor</b> in July 2010.</p> +<p>Scott Pakin wrote <b>pamrecolor</b> in July 2010. <p><b>pamrecolor</b> was new in Netpbm 10.52 (September 2010). @@ -234,7 +229,7 @@ photograph</a> of the late 1800s).</li> <h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Copyright (C) 2010 Scott -Pakin, <a href="mailto:scott+pbm@pakin.org.">scott+pbm@pakin.org.</a></p> +Pakin, <a href="mailto:scott+pbm@pakin.org.">scott+pbm@pakin.org.</a> <h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> @@ -251,16 +246,15 @@ Pakin, <a href="mailto:scott+pbm@pakin.org.">scott+pbm@pakin.org.</a></p> <h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> <ul> -<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></li> -<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a></li> -<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a></li> -<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a></li> -<li><a href="#notes">NOTES</a></li> -<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a></li> -<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a></li> -<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a></li> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#notes">NOTES</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> </ul> </body> </html> - diff --git a/pamrubber.html b/pamrubber.html index 30cce228..2288ba40 100644 --- a/pamrubber.html +++ b/pamrubber.html @@ -1,16 +1,12 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<html> -<head> -<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"> -<title>PamRubber User Manual</title> -</head> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamrubber User Manual</title></head> <body> <h1>pamrubber</h1> Updated: February 2011 -<p> +<br> <a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<h2>NAME</h2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamrubber - a rubber-sheeting utility that stretches an image based on control points @@ -25,12 +21,11 @@ based on control points [<i>filename</i>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of options is acceptable. You may use double -hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options.</p> +hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. <h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> -<p>This program is part -of <a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/index.html">Netpbm</a>.</p> +<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p>The <b>pamrubber</b> utility converts a pam image into a new image with the contents moved around. The transformation is often called "rubber @@ -48,7 +43,7 @@ control points (for both source and target). These are the corners of two quadrilaterals that will act as the coordinate system for both source and target images. Consider them as non-orthogonal (0,0), (0,1), (1,0) and (1,1) points. This transformation comes close to the one <b>pamperspective</b> -does, however that program does other corrections as well.</p> +does, however that program does other corrections as well. <p>When you specify less than four control points, the program adds control points in the following way. With three control points, <b>pamrubber</b> @@ -56,7 +51,7 @@ chooses the fourth one such that the four points form a parallelogram. With two points, <b>pamrubber</b> considers them the opposite corners of a rectangle. When you specify only one control point, <b>pamrubber</b> uses a rectangle from the top left corner of the image to the single control -point.</p> +point. <p>In "tri" mode, <b>pamrubber</b> conceptually cuts up the source and target image into triangles. It Transforms within each corresponding pair @@ -73,7 +68,7 @@ core of this utility in "tri" mode. Between the three edges of the central triangle and the four edges of the image, <b>pamrubber</b> constructs another seven triangles. Four control points define two central connected triangles. In total this results in cutting the source and target image up -into ten triangles.</p> +into ten triangles. <p>In this case clearly a picture says more than a thousand words. There is a graphical illustration of these various modes at @@ -81,7 +76,7 @@ graphical illustration of these various modes at www.schaik.com/netpbm/rubber</a>. An example of how to use this type of rubber sheeting in cartography is in the article <a href="http://www.isprs.org/proceedings/XXXVI/5-W1/papers/21.pdf"> -Visualizing the Landscape of Old-Time Tokyo</a>.</p> +Visualizing the Landscape of Old-Time Tokyo</a>. <h2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</h2> @@ -91,13 +86,18 @@ and <i>y</i>. The source and target image must have the same number of control points. The minimum number of values specified here is 4 for a single control point in the source and target image. The maximum is 16 for four control points in each image. -</p> + <p><i>filename</i> is the name of the input file. If you don't specify -this, <b>pamrubber</b> reads the image from Standard Input.</p> +this, <b>pamrubber</b> reads the image from Standard Input. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamrubber</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl compact> <dt><b>-tri</b> | <b>-quad</b></dt> @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ You must specify exactly one of these options. <dd> <p>This determines whether <b>pamrubber</b> uses nearest neighbor interpolation or bilinear interpolation of four source pixels. -</p> + </dd> <dt><b>-frame</b></dt> @@ -137,20 +137,18 @@ and that still works. </dl> - <h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<b><a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/pam.html">pam</a></b> and -<b><a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/pamperspective.html">pamperspective</a></b> - +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> and +<b><a href="pamperspective.html">pamperspective</a></b> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<p><b>pamrubber</b> was new in Netpbm 10.54 (March 2011).</p> +<p><b>pamrubber</b> was new in Netpbm 10.54 (March 2011). <h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> <p><a href="mailto:willem@schaik.com">Willem van Schaik</a> wrote this program -in February 2011 and contributed it to Netpbm.</p> +in February 2011 and contributed it to Netpbm. <br> <hr> @@ -158,12 +156,12 @@ in February 2011 and contributed it to Netpbm.</p> <h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> <ul> <li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> -</li><li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> -</li><li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> -</li><li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> -</li><li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> -</li><li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> -</li> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> </ul> </body> </html> diff --git a/pamslice.html b/pamslice.html index dd54ca55..42f73975 100644 --- a/pamslice.html +++ b/pamslice.html @@ -1,28 +1,27 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><TITLE>Pamslice User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamslice</H1> -Updated: 8 February 2010 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamslice User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamslice</h1> +Updated: 08 February 2010 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> pamslice - extract one line of values out of a Netpbm image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamslice</B> -{<B>-row=</B><i>rownumber</i> | <B>-column=</B><i>columnnumber</i>} -[<B>-plane=</b><i>planenumber</i>] -[<I>imagefile</I>] +<b>pamslice</b> +{<b>-row=</b><i>rownumber</i> | <b>-column=</b><i>columnnumber</i>} +[<b>-plane=</b><i>planenumber</i>] +[<i>imagefile</i>] -<?makeman .SH OPTION USAGE ?> -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<?makeman .sh option usage ?> +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -45,27 +44,32 @@ numbers mean. <p>If you want to see the entire raster of a Netpbm image, use <b>pamtable</b>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-row=</B><i>rownumber</i> -<DD> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamslice</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-row=</b><i>rownumber</i> +<dd> This indicates that the slice is to be horizontal -- i.e. one row of the image -- and indicates which row. Rows are numbered from the top starting with 0. - <P>You cannot specify both <b>-row</b> and <b>-column</b>. + <p>You cannot specify both <b>-row</b> and <b>-column</b>. -<DT><B>-column=</B><i>colnumber</i> -<DD> +<dt><b>-column=</b><i>colnumber</i> +<dd> This indicates that the slice is to be vertical -- i.e. one column of the image -- and indicates which column. Columns are numbered from the left starting with 0. - <P>You cannot specify both <b>-row</b> and <b>-column</b>. + <p>You cannot specify both <b>-row</b> and <b>-column</b>. -<DT><B>-plane=</B><i>planenumber</i> -<DD> +<dt><b>-plane=</b><i>planenumber</i> +<dd> This specifies that you are interested in only one plane of the image and which one. Planes are numbered from 0 and have meanings that vary on the type of image. In a PPM image, Plane 0 is red, Plane 1 is @@ -76,46 +80,46 @@ numbers mean. If you do specify <b>-plane</b>, each line of output contains one number in addition to the sequence number. -<DT><B>-xmgr</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-xmgr</b> +<dd> This option causes <b>pamslice</b> to format the output as input for a <b>xmgr</b> so you can plot it. The only difference this option makes is that it adds header information to the beginning of the output. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pamtable.html">pamtable</A> -<A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A> -<A HREF="pnmtopnm.html">pnmtopnm</A> -<A HREF="pamchannel.html">pamchannel</A> -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<a href="pamtable.html">pamtable</a> +<a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a> +<a href="pnmtopnm.html">pnmtopnm</a> +<a href="pamchannel.html">pamchannel</a> +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><b>pamslice</b> replaced <b>pgmslice</b> in Netpbm 10.3 (June 2002). +<p><b>pamslice</b> replaced <b>pgmslice</b> in Netpbm 10.3 (June 2002). It was backward compatible, but worked on Netpbm images other than PGM and PBM and added the <b>-plane</b> and <b>-xmgr</b> options. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<P>Jos Dingjan <<A -HREF="mailto:jos@tuatha.org">jos@tuatha.org</A>> wrote +<p>Jos Dingjan <<a +href="mailto:jos@tuatha.org">jos@tuatha.org</a>> wrote <b>pgmslice</b> after being unable to find the source code to Marco Beijersbergen's program with the same name. Bryan Henderson converted it to <b>pamslice</b>. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamstack.html b/pamstack.html index b0818db7..52bef06a 100644 --- a/pamstack.html +++ b/pamstack.html @@ -1,32 +1,29 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><TITLE>Pamstack User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> - -<H1>pamstack</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamstack User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamstack</h1> Updated: 10 January 2006 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2 id="name">NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamstack - stack planes of multiple PAM images into one PAM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamstack</B> -[<B>-tupletype </B><I>tupletype</I>] -[<I>inputfilespec</I> ...] +<b>pamstack</b> +[<b>-tupletype </b><i>tupletype</i>] +[<i>inputfilespec</i> ...] -<P>All options may be abbreviated to the shortest unique prefix. You +<p>All options may be abbreviated to the shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option from -its value with a space instead of <B>=</B>. +its value with a space instead of <b>=</b>. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pamstack</b> reads multiple PAM or PNM images as input and +<p><b>pamstack</b> reads multiple PAM or PNM images as input and produces a PAM image as output, consisting of all the planes (channels) of the inputs, stacked in the order specified. @@ -34,11 +31,11 @@ produces a PAM image as output, consisting of all the planes "-" to mean Standard Input. If you specify no arguments at all, the input is one file: Standard Input. -<P>The output is the same dimensions as the inputs, except that the +<p>The output is the same dimensions as the inputs, except that the depth is the sum of the depths of the inputs. It has the same maxval. -<B>pamstack</B> fails if the inputs are not all the same width, height, +<b>pamstack</b> fails if the inputs are not all the same width, height, and maxval. The tuple type is a null string unless you specify the -<B>-tupletype</B> option. +<b>-tupletype</b> option. <p><b>pamstack</b> works with multi-image streams. It stacks the 1st image in all the streams into one output image (the first one in the @@ -49,15 +46,15 @@ runs dry. It's like a matrix operation. <p>Before Netpbm 10.32 (February 2006), <b>pamstack</b> ignored all but the first image in each input stream. -<P><B>pamchannel</B> does the opposite of <B>pamstack</B>: It extracts +<p><b>pamchannel</b> does the opposite of <b>pamstack</b>: It extracts individual planes from a single PAM. -<P>Use <a href="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</a> to convert a suitable PAM +<p>Use <a href="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</a> to convert a suitable PAM image to a more traditional PNM (PBM, PGM, or PPM) image. (But there's no need to do that if you're going to feed it to a modern Netpbm program -- they all take suitable PAM input directly). -<P>One example of using <B>pamstack</B> is that some Netpbm programs +<p>One example of using <b>pamstack</b> is that some Netpbm programs accept as input a PAM that represents graphic image with transparency information. Taking a color image for example, this would be a PAM with tuple type "RGB_ALPHA". In Netpbm, such images were @@ -73,34 +70,39 @@ $ pamstack -tupletype=RGB_ALPHA myimage.ppm myalpha.pgm | \ </kbd> </pre> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamstack</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><B>-tupletype </B><I>tupletype</I> -<DD> +<dt><b>-tupletype </b><i>tupletype</i> +<dd> This specifies the tuple type name to be recorded in the output. You may use any string up to 255 characters. Some programs recognize some names. If you omit this option, the default tuple type name is null. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pamchannel.html">pamchannel</A></B> +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> +<b><a href="pamchannel.html">pamchannel</a></b> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamstack</b> was new in Netpbm 10.0 (June 2002). -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamstretch.html b/pamstretch.html index 86a9496e..7fbd2649 100644 --- a/pamstretch.html +++ b/pamstretch.html @@ -1,60 +1,59 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamstretch User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamstretch</H1> -Updated: 2 Februrary 2019 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamstretch User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamstretch</h1> +Updated: 02 February 2019 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> pamstretch - scale up a PNM or PAM image by interpolating between pixels. -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamstretch</B> +<b>pamstretch</b> -[<B>-xscale=</B><I>X</I>] +[<b>-xscale=</b><i>X</i>] -[<B>-yscale=</B><I>Y</I>] +[<b>-yscale=</b><i>Y</i>] -<BR> +<br> -[<B>-blackedge</B>] +[<b>-blackedge</b>] -[<B>-dropedge</B>] +[<b>-dropedge</b>] -<I>N</I> +<i>N</i> -[<I>infile</I>] +[<i>infile</i>] -<P>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You can use +<p>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You can use two hyphens instead of one. You can separate an option name from its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>pamstretch </B> scales up pictures by integer values, either -vertically, horizontally, or both. <B>pamstretch </B> differs from -<B>pamscale</B> and <B>pamenlarge</B> in that when it inserts the +<p><b>pamstretch </b> scales up pictures by integer values, either +vertically, horizontally, or both. <b>pamstretch </b> differs from +<b>pamscale</b> and <b>pamenlarge</b> in that when it inserts the additional rows and columns, instead of making the new row or column a -copy of its neighbor, <B>pamstretch</B> makes the new row or column an +copy of its neighbor, <b>pamstretch</b> makes the new row or column an interpolation between its neighbors. In some images, this produces better looking output. -<P>To scale up to non-integer pixel sizes, e.g. 2.5, try <B><A -HREF="pamstretch-gen.html">pamstretch-gen</A></B> instead. +<p>To scale up to non-integer pixel sizes, e.g. 2.5, try <b><a +href="pamstretch-gen.html">pamstretch-gen</a></b> instead. -<P>Options let you select alternative methods of dealing with the +<p>Options let you select alternative methods of dealing with the right/bottom edges of the picture. Since the interpolation is done between the top-left corners of the scaled-up pixels, it's not obvious what to do with the right/bottom edges. The default behaviour is to scale those up without interpolation (more precisely, the right edge is only interpolated vertically, and the bottom edge is only interpolated horizontally), but there are two other possibilities, -selected by the <B>-blackedge</B> and <B>-dropedge</B> options. +selected by the <b>-blackedge</b> and <b>-dropedge</b> options. <p>In the special case that the stretch factor is 1, there is no issue with the right and bottom edges, the edges of the output are identical to the edges @@ -63,73 +62,78 @@ before Netpbm 10.86 (March 2019), <b>-dropedge</b> would cause the edge to be dropped even where the stretch factor was 1. -<H2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</H2> +<h2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</h2> -<P>The <I>N</I> parameter is the scale factor. It is valid only if -you <em>don't</em> specify <B>-xscale</B> or <B>-yscale</B>. In that -case, <B>pamstretch</B> scales in both dimensions and by the scale -factor <I>N</I>. +<p>The <i>N</i> parameter is the scale factor. It is valid only if +you <em>don't</em> specify <b>-xscale</b> or <b>-yscale</b>. In that +case, <b>pamstretch</b> scales in both dimensions and by the scale +factor <i>N</i>. <p>Before Netpbm 10.86 (March 2019), 1 was not a valid value. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamstretch</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-xscale=</B><I>X</I> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-xscale=</b><i>X</i> -<DD>This is the horizontal scale factor. If you don't specify this, but do +<dd>This is the horizontal scale factor. If you don't specify this, but do specify a vertical scale factor, the horizontal scale factor is 1. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 9.21 (December 2001). -<DT><B>-yscale=</B><I>Y</I> +<dt><b>-yscale=</b><i>Y</i> -<DD>This is the vertical scale factor. If you don't specify this, but +<dd>This is the vertical scale factor. If you don't specify this, but do specify a horizontal scale factor, the vertical scale factor is 1. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 9.21 (December 2001). -<DT><B>-blackedge</B> +<dt><b>-blackedge</b> -<DD>interpolate to black at right/bottom edges. +<dd>interpolate to black at right/bottom edges. -<DT><B>-dropedge</B> +<dt><b>-dropedge</b> -<DD>drop one (source) pixel at right/bottom edges. This is arguably +<dd>drop one (source) pixel at right/bottom edges. This is arguably more logical than the default behaviour, but it means producing output which is a slightly odd size. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="limitations">Limitations</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> <p>Usually produces fairly ugly output for PBMs. For most PBM input you'll probably want to reduce the `noise' first using something like -<B><A HREF="pnmnlfilt.html">pnmnlfilt</A></B>. - -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pamstretch-gen.html">pamstretch-gen</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamenlarge.html">pamenlarge</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamscale.html">pamscale</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmnlfilt.html">pnmnlfilt</A></B> - -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> - -<p>Russell Marks (<A -HREF="mailto:russell.marks@ntlworld.com">russell.marks@ntlworld.com</A>). - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#parameters">PARAMETERS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<b><a href="pnmnlfilt.html">pnmnlfilt</a></b>. + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pamstretch-gen.html">pamstretch-gen</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamenlarge.html">pamenlarge</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmnlfilt.html">pnmnlfilt</a></b> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +<p>Russell Marks (<a +href="mailto:russell.marks@ntlworld.com">russell.marks@ntlworld.com</a>). + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamtodjvurle.html b/pamtodjvurle.html index 8828fcb2..7564dc13 100644 --- a/pamtodjvurle.html +++ b/pamtodjvurle.html @@ -1,52 +1,56 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamtodjvurle User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamtodjvurle</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtodjvurle User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamtodjvurle</h1> Updated: 10 April 2004 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamtodjvurle - convert a Netpbm image to DjVu Color RLE format -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamtodjvurle</B> +<b>pamtodjvurle</b> [<b>-transparent</b> <i>color</i>] -[<I>netpbmfile</I> [<I>rlefile</I>]] +[<i>netpbmfile</i> [<i>rlefile</i>]] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of options in acceptable. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pamtodjvurle</b> reads a Netpbm image (PNM or PAM equivalent of PNM) as input and produces DjVu Color RLE format as output. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtodjvurle</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-transparent</b> <i>colorname</i> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-transparent</b> <i>colorname</i> -<DD>This option indicates which color in the image should be +<dd>This option indicates which color in the image should be considered transparent. -<P>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a +<p>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. <p>Default is "white". -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pbmtodjvurle.html">pbmtodjvurle</A> -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A> +<a href="pbmtodjvurle.html">pbmtodjvurle</a> +<a href="pam.html">pam</a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamtodjvurle</b> was new in Netpbm 10.22 (April 2004) but a program that did almost the same thing, called <b>ppmtodjvurle</b>, @@ -55,14 +59,14 @@ contributed to Netpbm by Scott Pakin <scott+pbm@pakin.org>. <b>pamtodjvurle</b> uses techniques taken from <b>ppmtodjvurle</b>, but no code is copied between them. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamtogif.html b/pamtogif.html index 2c761968..c861a3e2 100644 --- a/pamtogif.html +++ b/pamtogif.html @@ -1,66 +1,65 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamtogif User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamtogif</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtogif User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamtogif</h1> Updated: 22 March 2007 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamtogif - convert a Netpbm image to a GIF image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamtogif</B> +<b>pamtogif</b> -[<B>-interlace</B>] +[<b>-interlace</b>] -[<B>-sort</B>] +[<b>-sort</b>] -[<B>-mapfile=</B><I>mapfile</I>] +[<b>-mapfile=</b><i>mapfile</i>] -<BR> +<br> -[<B>-transparent=</B>[<B>=</B>]<I>color</I>] +[<b>-transparent=</b>[<b>=</b>]<i>color</i>] [<b>-alphacolor=</b><i>color</i>] -[<B>-comment=</B><I>text</I>] +[<b>-comment=</b><i>text</i>] -[<B>-noclear</B>] +[<b>-noclear</b>] -[<B>-nolzw</B>] +[<b>-nolzw</b>] [<b>-aspect=</b><i>fraction</i>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -<BR> +<br> -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or an equals sign between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pamtogif</b> reads a Netpbm image as input and produces a GIF file as output. -<P>This program creates only individual GIF images. To combine +<p>This program creates only individual GIF images. To combine multiple GIF images into an animated GIF, use <a -href="http://www.lcdf.org/gifsicle/"><B>gifsicle</B></a> (not part of +href="http://www.lcdf.org/gifsicle/"><b>gifsicle</b></a> (not part of the Netpbm package). -<P><B>pamtogif</B> creates either an original GIF87 format GIF file or +<p><b>pamtogif</b> creates either an original GIF87 format GIF file or the newer GIF89 format. It creates GIF89 when you request features -that were new with GIF89, to wit the <B>-transparent</B> or -<B>-comment</B> options. Otherwise, it creates GIF87. Really old GIF +that were new with GIF89, to wit the <b>-transparent</b> or +<b>-comment</b> options. Otherwise, it creates GIF87. Really old GIF readers conceivably could not recognize GIF89. <p>The GIF format is not capable of representing an image with more than @@ -79,18 +78,23 @@ transparent, so the limit is still 256. <p><b>pamtogif</b> was new in Netpbm 10.37 (December 2006). In older Netpbm, use <b>ppmtogif</b>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtogif</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><B>-interlace</B> +<dt><b>-interlace</b> -<DD> +<dd> Produce an interlaced GIF file. -<DT><B>-sort</B> +<dt><b>-sort</b> -<DD> +<dd> Produce a GIF file with a color map sorted in a predictable order. <p>This does <em>not</em> produce the sorted color map which is part @@ -106,15 +110,15 @@ those made with two versions of the program, because it removes some of the variability. -<DT><B>-mapfile=</B><I>mapfile</I> +<dt><b>-mapfile=</b><i>mapfile</i> -<DD> +<dd> -<P>Use the colors found in the file <I>mapfile</I> to create the -colormap in the GIF file, instead of the colors from <I>netpbmfile</I>. -<I>mapfile</I> can be any PPM file; all that matters is the colors in -it. If the colors in <I>netpbmfile</I> do not match those in -<I>mapfile</I>, <b>pamtogif</b> matches them to a "best +<p>Use the colors found in the file <i>mapfile</i> to create the +colormap in the GIF file, instead of the colors from <i>netpbmfile</i>. +<i>mapfile</i> can be any PPM file; all that matters is the colors in +it. If the colors in <i>netpbmfile</i> do not match those in +<i>mapfile</i>, <b>pamtogif</b> matches them to a "best match." You can obtain a much better result by using <b>pnmremap</b> to change the colors in the input to those in the map file. @@ -148,62 +152,62 @@ once: </pre> -<DT><B>-transparent=</B><I>color</I> +<dt><b>-transparent=</b><i>color</i> -<DD> -<B>pamtogif</B> marks the specified color as transparent in the GIF image. +<dd> +<b>pamtogif</b> marks the specified color as transparent in the GIF image. -<P>If you don't specify <B>-transparent</B>, <B>pamtogif</B> does not +<p>If you don't specify <b>-transparent</b>, <b>pamtogif</b> does not mark any color transparent (except as indicated by the transparency information in the input file). -<P>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a +<p>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. -<p>If the color you specify is not present in the image, <B>pamtogif</B> +<p>If the color you specify is not present in the image, <b>pamtogif</b> selects instead the color in the image that is closest to the one you specify. Closeness is measured as a Cartesian distance between colors -in RGB space. If multiple colors are equidistant, <B>pamtogif</B> +in RGB space. If multiple colors are equidistant, <b>pamtogif</b> chooses one of them arbitrarily. -<P>However, if you prefix your color specification with "=", -e.g. <B>-transparent==red</B>, only the exact color you specify will +<p>However, if you prefix your color specification with "=", +e.g. <b>-transparent==red</b>, only the exact color you specify will be transparent. If that color does not appear in the image, there -will be no transparency. <B>pamtogif</B> issues an information +will be no transparency. <b>pamtogif</b> issues an information message when this is the case. <p>When you specify <b>-transparent</b>, <b>pamtogif</b> ignores explicit transparency information (the "alpha channel") in the input image. -<DT><B>-alpha=</B><I>pgmfile</I> +<dt><b>-alpha=</b><i>pgmfile</i> -<DD>There is no <b>-alpha</b> option. <b>pamtogif</b>'s predecessor had +<dd>There is no <b>-alpha</b> option. <b>pamtogif</b>'s predecessor had such an option because it was not capable of taking PAM input that contains a transparency (alpha) plane, so one used this option to supply a transparency plane as a separate PGM file. This option names a PGM file that contains a transparency mask for the -image. <B>pamtogif</B> creates fully transparent pixels wherever the +image. <b>pamtogif</b> creates fully transparent pixels wherever the transparency mask indicates transparency greater than 50%. The color of -those pixels is that specified by the <B>-alphacolor</B> +those pixels is that specified by the <b>-alphacolor</b> option, or black by default. -<P>To do this, <B>pamtogif</B> creates an entry in the GIF colormap in +<p>To do this, <b>pamtogif</b> creates an entry in the GIF colormap in addition to the entries for colors that are actually in the image. It marks that colormap entry as transparent and uses that colormap index in the output image to create a transparent pixel. -<P> The transparency image must be the same dimensions as the input +<p> The transparency image must be the same dimensions as the input image, but may have any maxval. White means opaque and black means transparent. -<P> You cannot specify both <B>-transparent</B> and <B>-alpha</B>. +<p> You cannot specify both <b>-transparent</b> and <b>-alpha</b>. -<DT><B>-alphacolor=</B><i>color</i> +<dt><b>-alphacolor=</b><i>color</i> -<DD>This specifies the foreground color for transparent pixels. A +<dd>This specifies the foreground color for transparent pixels. A viewer may use the foreground color for a transparent pixel if it chooses not to have another color "show through.". The default is black. @@ -217,14 +221,14 @@ color is the color indicated by that option. color. (There is only one entry in the GIF colormap for transparent pixels). -<P>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a +<p>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. -<DT><B>-comment=</B><I>text</I> +<dt><b>-comment=</b><i>text</i> -<DD> -Include a comment in the GIF output with comment text <I>text</I>. +<dd> +Include a comment in the GIF output with comment text <i>text</i>. <p>Without this option, there are no comments in the output. @@ -235,9 +239,9 @@ think it is multiple arguments: $ pamtogif -comment "this is a comment" <xxx.ppm >xxx.gif </pre> -<DT><B>-noclear</B> +<dt><b>-noclear</b> -<DD> +<dd> <p>This option causes the output not to contain any GIF clear codes. <p>In GIF, the stream defines codes that represent strings of pixels as it @@ -264,27 +268,27 @@ the maximum is reached. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.82 (March 2018). Before that, the program aways uses the clear codes. -<DT><B>-nolzw</B> +<dt><b>-nolzw</b> -<DD> +<dd> <p>This option is mainly of historical interest -- it involves use of a patent that is now expired. -<p>This option causes the GIF output, and thus <B>pamtogif</B>, not to +<p>This option causes the GIF output, and thus <b>pamtogif</b>, not to use LZW (Lempel-Ziv) compression. As a result, the image file is larger and, before the patent expired, no royalties would be owed to the holder of the patent on LZW. See the section LICENSE below. -<P>LZW is a method for combining the information from multiple pixels into a -single GIF code. With the <B>-nolzw</B> option, <B>pamtogif</B> +<p>LZW is a method for combining the information from multiple pixels into a +single GIF code. With the <b>-nolzw</b> option, <b>pamtogif</b> creates one GIF code per pixel, so it is not doing any compression and not using LZW. However, any GIF decoder, whether it uses an LZW decompressor or not, will correctly decode this uncompressed format. An LZW decompressor would see this as a particular case of LZW compression. -<P>Note that if someone uses an LZW decompressor such as the one in -<B>giftopnm</B> or pretty much any graphics display program to process -the output of <B>pamtogif -nolzw </B>, he is then using the LZW +<p>Note that if someone uses an LZW decompressor such as the one in +<b>giftopnm</b> or pretty much any graphics display program to process +the output of <b>pamtogif -nolzw </b>, he is then using the LZW patent. But the patent holder expressed far less interest in enforcing the patent on decoding than on encoding. @@ -312,27 +316,27 @@ the nearest 1/64. pixels are always square. -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>This option causes <b>pamtogif</b> to display information about the +<dd>This option causes <b>pamtogif</b> to display information about the conversion process and the image it produces. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="giftopnm.html">giftopnm</A></B>, +<b><a href="giftopnm.html">giftopnm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppmtogif.html">ppmtogif</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppmtogif.html">ppmtogif</a></b>, -<B>gifsicle</B> <<A -HREF="http://www.lcdf.org/gifsicle">http://www.lcdf.org/gifsicle</A>>, +<b>gifsicle</b> <<a +href="http://www.lcdf.org/gifsicle">http://www.lcdf.org/gifsicle</a>>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>. +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>. <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -348,8 +352,8 @@ pseudo-PGM image (via the <b>-alpha</b> option). <p>Jef Poskanzer wrote <b>ppmtogif</b> in 1989, and it has always been a cornerstone of Pbmplus/Netpbm because GIF is such a popular image -format. Jef based the LZW encoding on GIFENCOD by David Rowley <<A -HREF="mailto:mgardi@watdcsu.waterloo.edu">mgardi@watdcsu.waterloo.edu</A>>. +format. Jef based the LZW encoding on GIFENCOD by David Rowley <<a +href="mailto:mgardi@watdcsu.waterloo.edu">mgardi@watdcsu.waterloo.edu</a>>. Jef included GIFENCOD's GIFCOMPR.C file pretty much whole. Rowley, in turn, adapted the LZW compression code from classic Unix <b>compress</b>, which used techniques described in IEEE Computer, @@ -378,9 +382,9 @@ Virtually all of the code in <b>pamtogif</b> was written by Bryan Henderson and contributed to the public domain. -<H2 id="license">LICENSE</H2> +<h2 id="license">LICENSE</h2> -<p>If you use <B>pamtogif</B> without the <B>-nolzw</B> option, you +<p>If you use <b>pamtogif</b> without the <b>-nolzw</b> option, you are using a patent on the LZW compression method which is owned by Unisys. The patent has expired (in 2003 in the US and in 2004 elsewhere), so it doesn't matter. While the patent was in force, most @@ -389,21 +393,21 @@ license from Unisys to do so. Unisys typically asked $5000 for a license for trivial use of the patent. Unisys never enforced the patent against trivial users. -<P>Rumor has it that IBM also owns or owned a patent covering -<B>pamtogif</B>. +<p>Rumor has it that IBM also owns or owned a patent covering +<b>pamtogif</b>. -<P>A replacement for the GIF format that never required any patents to +<p>A replacement for the GIF format that never required any patents to use is the PNG format. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#license">LICENSE</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#license">LICENSE</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamtohtmltbl.html b/pamtohtmltbl.html index cae34fcc..7e540dcf 100644 --- a/pamtohtmltbl.html +++ b/pamtohtmltbl.html @@ -1,42 +1,40 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><TITLE>Pamtohtmltbl User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamtohtmltbl</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtohtmltbl User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamtohtmltbl</h1> Updated: 13 October 2008 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamtohtmltbl - convert pnm/pam visual image to an HTML table -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamtohtmltbl</B> +<b>pamtohtmltbl</b> [<b>-transparent=</b><i>color</i>] [<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>file</I>] +[<i>file</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pamtohtmltbl</b> converts a visual image to an HTML table with one +<p><b>pamtohtmltbl</b> converts a visual image to an HTML table with one cell per pixel. The cell is empty, but its background color is that of the pixel. -<P><i>file</i> is a PBM, PGM, PPM, or PAM file. If PAM, it must be +<p><i>file</i> is a PBM, PGM, PPM, or PAM file. If PAM, it must be a standard visual image of tuple type RGB, GRAYSCALE, or BLACKANDWHITE, or something equivalent with extra higher numbered channels, but <b>pamtohtmltbl</b> doesn't check the tuple type; it just assumes. -<P>Note that the more normal way to include a visual image in an HTML +<p>Note that the more normal way to include a visual image in an HTML document is with a <IMG> tag. <p>Not all web browsers render tables as <b>pamtohtmltbl</b> expects, @@ -44,51 +42,57 @@ and therefore show a grossly distorted image. Internet Explorer 7 on Windows and Opera 9.02 on Windows have been seen to work; Firefox 2.0.0.16 on the same Windows system has been seen not to. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtohtmltbl</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-transparent=</B><i>color</i> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-transparent=</b><i>color</i> -<DD> +<dd> This option indicates that pixels of the specified color are to be transparent in the HTML table. The table cell for a pixel of this color will have no background color specified. -<P>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a +<p>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. -<DT><B>-verbose</b> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> <dd>This option causes <b>pamtohtmltbl</b> to display messages about the conversion process. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><b>pamtohtmltbl</b> was new in Netpbm 10.15 (April 2003). -</DL> +<p><b>pamtohtmltbl</b> was new in Netpbm 10.15 (April 2003). +</dl> -<H2 id="authors">AUTHORS</H2> +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> <p>Alexander B. Ivanov (SSH) wrote a program he called <b>pnm2html</b>. Bryan Henderson adapted it to use the Netpbm libraries and handle PAM images and follow Netpbm conventions, and named it <b>pamtohtmltbl</b>. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#authors">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamtopdbimg.html b/pamtopdbimg.html index 517b934b..f163e522 100644 --- a/pamtopdbimg.html +++ b/pamtopdbimg.html @@ -1,18 +1,17 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamtopdbimg User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamtopdbimg</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtopdbimg User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamtopdbimg</h1> Updated: 25 September 2010 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamtopdbimg - convert a Netpbm image to a Palm Pilot Image Viewer PDB Image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamtopdbimg</B> +<b>pamtopdbimg</b> [<b>-notefile=</b><i>filename</i>] [<b>-title=</b><i>text</i>] @@ -21,9 +20,9 @@ pamtopdbimg - convert a Netpbm image to a Palm Pilot Image Viewer PDB Image [<b>-maybecompressed</b>] [<b>-4depth</b>] -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -35,28 +34,33 @@ Otherwise, the Pilot image is either 4-level or 16-level grayscale, depending on the <b>-4depth</b> option. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtopdbimg</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><B>-title=</B><i>text</i> +<dt><b>-title=</b><i>text</i> -<DD> +<dd> The title of the image, to be included in the image. -<DT><B>-compressed</B> -<DT><B>-uncompressed</B> -<DT><B>-maybecompressed</B> +<dt><b>-compressed</b> +<dt><b>-uncompressed</b> +<dt><b>-maybecompressed</b> -<DD>You may specify only one of these. +<dd>You may specify only one of these. <b>-compressed</b> says to generate the image in compressed format. <b>-uncompressed</b> says to generate the image in uncompressed format. <b>-maybecompressed</b> says to generate whichever format is smaller (the compression algorithm sometimes actually makes the data larger). -<DT><B>-4depth</B> +<dt><b>-4depth</b> -<DD> +<dd> This option makes <b>pamtopdbimg</b> create the image in 16-level grayscale (4 bits per pixel) format. If you don't specify this, <b>pamtopdbimg</b> uses 4-level (2 bits per pixel) format. @@ -65,21 +69,21 @@ grayscale (4 bits per pixel) format. If you don't specify this, (maxval 1). In that case, <b>pamtopdbimg</b> generates the monochrome (1 bit per pixel) format regardless. -<DT><B>-notefile=</B><i>filename</i> +<dt><b>-notefile=</b><i>filename</i> -<DD> +<dd> Attach the note in the specified file to the image. <p> If you don't specify this, <b>pamtopdbimg</b> does not attach any note. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pdbimgtopam.html">pdbimgtopam</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="palmtopnm.html">palmtopnm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pdbimgtopam.html">pdbimgtopam</a></b>, +<b><a href="palmtopnm.html">palmtopnm</a></b>, -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A>, +<a href="pam.html">pam</a>, <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -88,14 +92,14 @@ It was modelled after Eric A. Howe's <b>imgvtopbm</b> package, which dates back to September 1997. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamtopfm.html b/pamtopfm.html index 3bd47369..751b336a 100644 --- a/pamtopfm.html +++ b/pamtopfm.html @@ -1,25 +1,25 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamtopfm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamtopfm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtopfm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamtopfm</h1> Updated: 10 April 2004 -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamtopfm - Convert Netpbm image to PFM (Portable Float Map) -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> -<B>pamtopfm</B> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> +<b>pamtopfm</b> [<b>-endian=</b>{<b>big</b>|<b>little</b>}] [<b>-scale=</b><i>float</i>] -[<I>imagefile</I>] +[<i>imagefile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -49,20 +49,25 @@ and a non-color PFM otherwise. image to Netpbm format. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-scale=</b><i>float</i> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtopfm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> - <P>This specifies the scale factor of the PFM image. +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-scale=</b><i>float</i> + +<dd> + <p>This specifies the scale factor of the PFM image. Scale factor is a component of the PFM format. Default is 1.0. -<DT><B>-endian=</b>{<b>big</b>|<b>little</b>} +<dt><b>-endian=</b>{<b>big</b>|<b>little</b>} -<DD> - <P>This specifies the endianness of the PFM image. The samples +<dd> + <p>This specifies the endianness of the PFM image. The samples in the raster of a PFM image are 4 byte IEEE floating point numbers. A parameter of the IEEE format, and therefore the PFM format, is endianness, i.e. whether the specified bytes are @@ -74,27 +79,27 @@ image to Netpbm format. <p>Default is whichever endianness the machine on which <b>pamtopfm</b> runs uses internally, which results in the faster execution. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="index.html">Netpbm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pfmtopam.html">pfmtopam</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> +<b><a href="index.html">Netpbm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pfmtopam.html">pfmtopam</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamtopfm</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.22 (April 2004). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamtopng.html b/pamtopng.html index 64b39e72..9a31fa7f 100644 --- a/pamtopng.html +++ b/pamtopng.html @@ -1,10 +1,9 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<html> -<head><title>Pamtopng User Manual</title></head> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtopng User Manual</title></head> <body> <h1>pamtopng</h1> Updated: 13 March 2019 -<BR> +<br> <a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> <h2>NAME</h2> @@ -26,9 +25,9 @@ pamtopng - convert a Netpbm image to PNG [<b>-ztxt=</b><i>file</i>] [<b>-itxt=</b><i>file</i>] [<b>-interlace</b>] -[<I>pnmfile</i>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<?makeman .SH OPTION USAGE ?> +<?makeman .sh option usage ?> <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of a single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space @@ -124,14 +123,19 @@ of the option value to conform to the rest of Netpbm. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtopng</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl compact> <dt><b>-transparent=</b><i>color</i> <dd> <b>pamtopng</b> marks the specified color as transparent in the PNG image. -<P>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for +<p>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> -library routine</a>. E.g. <B>red</B> or <B>rgb:ff/00/0d</B>. +library routine</a>. E.g. <b>red</b> or <b>rgb:ff/00/0d</b>. <dt><b>-background=</b><i>color</i> <dd> @@ -315,7 +319,7 @@ channel, but nothing else. It was a very small program with literally no command line options. <p>The goal in those days was eventually to expand <b>pnmtopng</b> to do the -PAM alpha channel thing, rename it to <B>pamtopng</B>, and retire +PAM alpha channel thing, rename it to <b>pamtopng</b>, and retire <b>pamrgbatopng</b>. But <b>pnmtopng</b> is such a complex program, because of its dizzying array of features and its need for backward compatibility, that adding that one capability to it was a daunting task and for ten years diff --git a/pamtopnm.html b/pamtopnm.html index 46b71477..340b6a5e 100644 --- a/pamtopnm.html +++ b/pamtopnm.html @@ -1,28 +1,27 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamtopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamtopnm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamtopnm</h1> Updated: 02 February 2018 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2 id="name">NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamtopnm - convert PAM image to PBM, PGM, or PPM -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamtopnm</B> +<b>pamtopnm</b> -[<B>-assume</B>] +[<b>-assume</b>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -30,14 +29,14 @@ space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. equivalent PBM, PGM, or PPM (i.e. PNM) image, whichever is most appropriate, as output. -<P><B>pamtopnm</B> assumes the PAM image represents the information +<p><b>pamtopnm</b> assumes the PAM image represents the information required for a PBM, PGM, or PPM image if its tuple type is "BLACKANDWHITE", "GRAYSCALE", or "RGB" and its depth and maxval are appropriate. If this is not the case, -<B>pamtopnm</B> fails. +<b>pamtopnm</b> fails. -<P>However, you can override the tuple type requirement with the -<B>-assume</B> option. +<p>However, you can override the tuple type requirement with the +<b>-assume</b> option. <p><b>pamtopnm</b> produces a PPM image if the input PAM has depth 3 or 4; it produces PGM or PBM if the input PAM has depth 1 or 2. Whether it produced @@ -56,39 +55,44 @@ equivalent PGM, and you can use <b>pamthreshold</b> to convert a PGM image you know is black and white to a black and white PAM image and then use <b>pamtopnm</b> to convert that to PBM. -<P>As with any Netpbm program that reads PAM images, <B>pamtopnm</B> +<p>As with any Netpbm program that reads PAM images, <b>pamtopnm</b> also reads PNM images as if they were PAM. In that case, -<B>pamtopnm</B>'s functions reduces to simply copying the input to the +<b>pamtopnm</b>'s functions reduces to simply copying the input to the output. But this can be useful in a program that doesn't know whether its input is PAM or PNM but needs to feed it to a program that only recognizes PNM. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-assume</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-assume</b> -<DD>When you specify <B>-assume</B>, you tell <B>pamtopnm</B> that you +<dd>When you specify <b>-assume</b>, you tell <b>pamtopnm</b> that you personally vouch for the fact that the tuples contain the same data as belongs in the channels of a PBM, PGM, or PPM file. The depth must still conform, though, so to truly force a conversion, you may have to -run the input through <B>pamchannel</B> first. But be careful with -<B>-assume</B>. When you -assume, you make an -ass of u and me. +run the input through <b>pamchannel</b> first. But be careful with +<b>-assume</b>. When you -assume, you make an -ass of u and me. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pbmtopgm.html">pbmtopgm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamditherbw.html">pamditherbw</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgmtoppm.html">pgmtoppm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamthreshold.html">pamthreshold</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="pbmtopgm.html">pbmtopgm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamditherbw.html">pamditherbw</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgmtoppm.html">pgmtoppm</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamthreshold.html">pamthreshold</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgm.html">pgm</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -96,15 +100,14 @@ run the input through <B>pamchannel</B> first. But be careful with <p><b>pamtopnm</b> was new, along with the PAM format, in Netpbm 9.7 (August 2000). -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamtosrf.html b/pamtosrf.html index d052217e..efc88c95 100644 --- a/pamtosrf.html +++ b/pamtosrf.html @@ -1,34 +1,25 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en"> -<head> -<title>Pamtosrf User Manual</title> -<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=us-ascii" /> -</head> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtosrf User Manual</title></head> <body> - <h1>pamtosrf</h1> - -<p>Updated: 27 May 2011</p> - -<p><a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a></p> - +Updated: 27 May 2011 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> <h2>NAME</h2> - -<p>pamtosrf - convert a sequence of Netpbm images to a SRF image file</p> +pamtosrf - convert a sequence of Netpbm images to a SRF image file -<h2><a id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></h2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <p><b>pamtosrf</b> [<b>-verbose</b>] [<i>netpbmfile</i>] -<h2><a id="description">DESCRIPTION</a></h2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> -<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>.</p> +<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pamtosrf</b> reads a Netpbm image stream as input and produces a an SRF image file as output. I don't know exactly what SRF is, but on popular @@ -36,9 +27,9 @@ use of it is in Garmin vehicle information files, which tell a GPS receiver how to depict a vehicle on its display. <p>An SRF file can contain multiple images; each image in a multi-image -Netpbm input stream becomes one image in the SRF.</p> +Netpbm input stream becomes one image in the SRF. -<P><B>pamtosrf</B> does not care how many images there are or what their +<p><b>pamtosrf</b> does not care how many images there are or what their dimensions or content are. However, a Garmin vehicle information file has specific requirements, so if you don't make your Netpbm input conform, neither will your SRF output. For such a file, you should have two image: the first @@ -47,7 +38,7 @@ image is a horizontal concatenation of 36 square images, each rotated 10 degrees from the previous, thereby covering the full 360 degree circle. You could create this concatenation with <b>pnmcat -lr</b> and you could create the invidual views with <b>pnmrotate</b>. -</P> + <p>One way to use <b>pamtosrf</b> is to get an SRF file, convert it to PAM with <b>srftopam</b>, manipulate it, then convert it back with @@ -59,6 +50,11 @@ Output is always on Standard Output. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtosrf</b> recognizes the following +command line option: + <dl> <dt><b>-verbose</b></dt> <dd>Issue informational messages about the input and the conversion process. @@ -66,7 +62,7 @@ Output is always on Standard Output. </dl> -<h2><a id="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></h2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> <ul> <li><a href="srftopam.html">srftopam</a> @@ -76,20 +72,20 @@ Output is always on Standard Output. <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><b>srftopam</b> was new in Netpbm 10.55 (June 2011). +<p><b>srftopam</b> was new in Netpbm 10.55 (June 2011). -<P>It was contributed by Mike Frysinger. +<p>It was contributed by Mike Frysinger. <hr /> <h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> <ul> -<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></li> -<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a></li> -<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a></li> -<li><a href="#see_also">SEE ALSO</a></li> -<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a></li> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> </ul> </body> diff --git a/pamtosvg.html b/pamtosvg.html index 81a09353..fc02a335 100644 --- a/pamtosvg.html +++ b/pamtosvg.html @@ -1,17 +1,17 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamtosvg User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamtosvg</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtosvg User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamtosvg</h1> Updated: 23 April 2006 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamtosvg - convert a Netpbm image to a SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamtosvg</B> +<b>pamtosvg</b> [<b>-background-color=</b><i>colorname</i>] [<b>-centerline</b>] @@ -27,14 +27,14 @@ pamtosvg - convert a Netpbm image to a SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) image [<b>-preserve-width</b>] [<b>-remove-adjacent-corners</b>] [<b>-log</b>] -[<b>-report-progress</b>] [<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<b>-report-progress</b>] [<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -76,9 +76,14 @@ href="http://www.w3.org/Graphics/SVG/">the Worldwide Web Consortium's SVG web page</a>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtosvg</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + +<dl compact> <dt><b>-background-color=</b><i>colorname</i> <dd>Treat the specified color as the background color and ignore it. @@ -86,7 +91,7 @@ SVG web page</a>. <p>If you don't specify this option, <b>pamtosvg</b> does not recognize any background color. -<P>Specify the color (<i>colorname</i>) as described for the <a +<p>Specify the color (<i>colorname</i>) as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. @@ -169,21 +174,20 @@ when computing the tangent at that point. Default is 3. <dd>Weight factor for fitting the linewidth. -</DL> - +</dl> -<H2 id="applicationnotes">Application Notes</H2> +<h2 id="applicationnotes">APPLICATION NOTES</h2> <p>A convenient way to view an SVG document is with a web browser. Many understand a file whose name ends in ".svg" to be an SVG image and can render it. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmclean.html">pbmclean</A></B>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A>, +<b><a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmclean.html">pbmclean</a></b>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a>, <a href="http://autotrace.sourceforge.net">Autotrace</a> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -205,16 +209,15 @@ Yamato and Martin Weber appear to be the principal creators of it. <p>As of June 2006, there was a <a href="http://autotrace.sourceforge.net">Sourceforge project</a> for it. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#applicationnotes">APPLICATION NOTES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#applicationnotes">APPLICATION NOTES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamtotga.html b/pamtotga.html index c2e5d023..25f251f5 100644 --- a/pamtotga.html +++ b/pamtotga.html @@ -1,31 +1,29 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamtotga User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamtotga</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtotga User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamtotga</h1> Updated: 06 November 2018 -<BR> - -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamtotga - convert a Netpbm image to a TrueVision Targa file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamtotga</B> -[<B>-mono|-cmap|-cmap16|-rgb</B>] -[<B>-norle</B>] +<b>pamtotga</b> +[<b>-mono|-cmap|-cmap16|-rgb</b>] +[<b>-norle</b>] [<b>-name=</b><i>name</i> -[<B>-verhose</B>] -[<I>pamfile</I>] +[<b>-verhose</b>] +[<i>pamfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or equals signs between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -47,11 +45,16 @@ instead of 24 and the raster has an extra byte added to each pixel, at the tail end. The value of that byte has the same meaning as in a PAM image with maxval 255. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtotga</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-cmap</B> -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-cmap</b> +<dd> Make output Targa file use a color map (palette) to make the output smaller. <p> Each color in the color map is 3 bytes, 8 bits each of red, green, and blue, @@ -65,8 +68,8 @@ transparency information. of <b>pamtotga</b>. Implementing a color map that contains transparency information is harder to implement). -<DT><B>-cmap16</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-cmap16</b> +<dd> Same as <b>-cmap</b>, except a color map entry for full color input is 5 bits each of red, green, and blue, stored as two bytes (16 bits). @@ -74,8 +77,8 @@ bits each of red, green, and blue, stored as two bytes (16 bits). <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.85 (December 2018). -<DT><B>-mono</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-mono</b> +<dd> Make output Targa file of type 8 bit monochrome. Input must be PBM or PGM or a PAM with BLACKANDWHITE or GRAYSCALE tuple type. See <b>-cmap</b>. @@ -86,12 +89,12 @@ most highly constrained compatible type is used, where monochrome is more constrained than colormapped which is in turn more constrained than unmapped. -<DT><B>-rgb</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-rgb</b> +<dd> Make output Targa file of type 24 bit unmapped color. See <b>-cmap</b>. -<DT><B>-norle</B> -<DD>Do not use run-length encoding in the output Targa file. +<dt><b>-norle</b> +<dd>Do not use run-length encoding in the output Targa file. Run-length encoded files are smaller, but Some Targa readers can't read run-length encoded files. @@ -111,17 +114,17 @@ Standard Input, <b>pamtotga</b> omits the image ID from the TGA header. process. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="tgatoppm.html">tgatoppm</A>, -<A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a>, -<A HREF="pamstack.html">pamstack</a>, -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A> -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<a href="tgatoppm.html">tgatoppm</a>, +<a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a>, +<a href="pamstack.html">pamstack</a>, +<a href="pam.html">pam</a> +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p>This program was called <b>ppmtotga</b> until Netpbm 10.6 (July 2002). That was always a misnomer, though, because a PPM class program would not be @@ -137,18 +140,19 @@ added to the PAM specification, it was specified with tuple type "RGB_ALPHA". So in Netpbm 10.26 (January 2005), <b>pamtotga</b> changed to recognize "RGB_ALPHA" instead of "RGBA". -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Mark Shand and Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamtris.html b/pamtris.html index 3f4e67c3..1e2bf7fa 100644 --- a/pamtris.html +++ b/pamtris.html @@ -1,8 +1,6 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<html><head> -<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=windows-1252"><title>Pamtris User Manual</title></head> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamtris User Manual</title></head> <body> - <h1>pamtris</h1> Updated: 15 June 2019 <br> @@ -31,19 +29,19 @@ interpolation of generic vertex attributes and depth buffering <p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or an equals sign between an option name -and its value.</p> +and its value. <h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -</p><p><b>pamtris</b> can be used to draw a great variety of 2D and 3D graphics by +<p><b>pamtris</b> can be used to draw a great variety of 2D and 3D graphics by composing arbitrarily complex pictures out of separate triangles, triangle strips and triangle fans. The program reads instructions written in a simple command script notation from Standard Input and outputs its results -as a (potentially multi-image) PAM stream on Standard Output.</p> +as a (potentially multi-image) PAM stream on Standard Output. -<p>For example, the following input</p> +<p>For example, the following input <pre> <code> @@ -66,7 +64,7 @@ as a (potentially multi-image) PAM stream on Standard Output.</p> </code> </pre> -<p>produces this:</p> +<p>produces this: <img src="pamtris_fan.png" alt="Example Pamtris output for fan mode"> @@ -76,7 +74,7 @@ associated with a list of up to 20 "attributes," which are integer values between 0 and a given maxval. In the most common usage, you use <b>pamtris</b> to draw a visual image and a vertex has three attributes, which are an RGB specification of a color. Such attribute lists may be provided on -a per-vertex basis.</p> +a per-vertex basis. <p>Before images can be effectively written to Standard Output, <b>pamtris</b> gradually rasterizes them on an internal frame buffer which consists of an @@ -91,12 +89,12 @@ and 3D computer graphics. One prominent shortcoming of such an approach to depth-sorting, however, is that it does not automatically work with objects which are intended to appear "translucent," therefore requiring more elaborate strategies to incorporate said objects into pictures -generated using this technique.</p> +generated using this technique. <p>The opacity sample is the last sample of the tuple. <b>pamtris</b> manipulates opacity internally and for any tuple it is always either 0 or the maxval. The program does not provide the user direct control over the alpha -image plane.</p> +image plane. <p><b>pamtris</b> rasterizes triangles by approximating their visible area as a collection of tuples at particular positions in the frame buffer, and to @@ -110,32 +108,32 @@ interpolation between the Z-coordinates of the vertices of the corresponding triangle) is compared against the value in the corresponding position in the depth buffer. If the depth value of the incoming tuple equals or is smaller than the depth value already present in said position in -the depth buffer, the following happens.</p> +the depth buffer, the following happens. <ol> <li>Every sample <i>i</i>, where 0 ≤ <i>i</i> < <i>num_attribs</i>, of the tuple in the corresponding position in the image buffer is set to equal the value of the respective sample of the incoming tuple; and the alpha -sample (the last one) is updated to the <i>maxval</i>;</li> +sample (the last one) is updated to the <i>maxval</i>; <li>The depth value in the corresponding position in the depth buffer is updated to a depth value directly proportional to that of the incoming -tuple.</li> +tuple. </ol> <p>Otherwise, that particular tuple effects no change at all in the frame -buffer.</p> +buffer. <p>The frame buffer is initially set so that all samples in every tuple of the image buffer contain the value 0, and all entries in the depth buffer contain -the maximum permitted depth value.</p> +the maximum permitted depth value. <p>The attributes' values, and therefore the samples in the output PAM images, have no fixed interpretation ascribed to them (except for the last image plane, which is deliberately supposed to represent tuple opacity information); one may ascribe any suitable meaning to them, such as that of colors, texture coordinates, surface normals, light interaction -characteristics, texture influence coefficients for multi-texturing, etc.</p> +characteristics, texture influence coefficients for multi-texturing, etc. <h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> @@ -154,7 +152,7 @@ top of the <a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> section. If the file <h3 id="examples_strip">Strip Mode</h3> -<p>The following is an example of strip mode:</p> +<p>The following is an example of strip mode: <pre> <code> @@ -174,7 +172,7 @@ top of the <a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> section. If the file </pre> <p>Save the above code in a file named <b>strip.tris</b> (for instance) -and process it with:</p> +and process it with: <pre> <kbd> @@ -212,7 +210,7 @@ to yield: </pre> <p>Save the above code in a file named <b>pierce.tris</b> (for instance) -and process it with:</p> +and process it with: <pre> <kbd> @@ -232,9 +230,9 @@ directly for any serious drawing; you will probably want to use a general purpose programming language to generate a temporary <b>pamtris</b> command file. -</p><p>For example, the following C program generates <b>pamtris</b> instructions +<p>For example, the following C program generates <b>pamtris</b> instructions to produce a picture of NAMCO's Pac-Man. It generates dozens of -<b>vertex</b> commands tracing around the perimeter of a circle.</p> +<b>vertex</b> commands tracing around the perimeter of a circle. <img alt="Pac-Man" src="pamtris_pacman.png"> @@ -301,7 +299,7 @@ int main(void) what else can be feasibly obtained through this meta-programming approach, especially when combining <b>pamtris</b> with other Netpbm programs (Earth texture from -<a href="https://visibleearth.nasa.gov/view.php?id=73580">nasa.gov</a>):</p> +<a href="https://visibleearth.nasa.gov/view.php?id=73580">nasa.gov</a>): <img alt="Isometric Rainbow Waves" src="pamtris_isowaves.gif"> <img alt="Rotating Earth" src="pamtris_earth.gif"> @@ -309,20 +307,25 @@ texture from <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtris</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl compact="compact"> <dt><b>-width=</b><i>width</i></dt> <dd>Sets the width of the internal frame buffer and, by extension, of the output PAM images, given in number of columns. This must be an integer in the closed range [1, 8192]. -<p>This option is mandatory.</p></dd> +<p>This option is mandatory.</dd> <dt><b>-height=</b><i>height</i></dt> <dd>This is the height of the internal frame buffer and, by extension, of the output PAM images, given in number of rows. This must be an integer in the closed range [1, 8192]. -<p>This option is mandatory.</p></dd> +<p>This option is mandatory.</dd> <dt><b>-num_attribs=</b><i>attributes_per_vertex</i></dt> <dd>This is the number of attributes per vertex and, by extension, the depth @@ -330,23 +333,23 @@ of the output PAM images, which is equal to this value plus one (to accomodate the alpha plane). The argument must be an integer in the closed range [1, 20]. <p>The input instruction sequence may override this with a <b>reset</b> -command.</p> +command. <p>You must specify exactly one of <b>-num_attribs</b>, <b>-rgb</b>, and <b>-grayscale</b>. -</p></dd><dt><b>-tupletype=</b><i>tupletype</i></dt> +</dd><dt><b>-tupletype=</b><i>tupletype</i></dt> <dd>This is the tuple type for the output PAM images. The argument is a string which may be no longer than 255 characters. <p>The input instruction sequence may override this with a <b>reset</b> command. -<p>The default is an empty (null) string.</p> +<p>The default is an empty (null) string. <p>This option cannot be specified together with <b>-rgb</b> or -<b>-grayscale</b>.</p> +<b>-grayscale</b>. </dd> @@ -360,7 +363,7 @@ red, green and blue levels of the color associated with the vertex, in that order. <p>The input instruction sequence may override this with a <b>reset</b> -command.</p> +command. <p>You must specify exactly one of <b>-num_attribs</b>, <b>-rgb</b>, and <b>-grayscale</b>. @@ -374,7 +377,7 @@ alias for <b>-num_attribs=</b>1 <b>-tupletype=GRAYSCALE_ALPHA</b>. The one vertex attribute is the gray level associated with the vertex. <p>The input instruction sequence may override this with a <b>reset</b> -command.</p> +command. <p>You must specify exactly one of <b>-num_attribs</b>, <b>-rgb</b>, and <b>-grayscale</b>. @@ -388,7 +391,7 @@ closed range [1, 65535]. <p>The default value is 255. -</p><p>The input instruction sequence may override this with a +<p>The input instruction sequence may override this with a <b>reset</b> command. </dd> </dl> @@ -396,15 +399,15 @@ closed range [1, 65535]. <h2 id="instruction_code">INSTRUCTION CODE</h2> <p>The input for <b>pamtris</b> consists of a sequence of text lines sent to -it through the Standard Input mechanism.</p> +it through the Standard Input mechanism. <p>Empty lines or lines that contain only white space characters are called -blank lines and are ignored.</p> +blank lines and are ignored. <p>When a <b>#</b> occurs anywhere in a line, <b>pamtris</b> ignores it along with every character after it. In other words, everything from the <b>#</b> until the end of the line receives the same treatment as white -space.</p> +space. <p>Lines which are not blank must contain a sequence of strings separated by white space, called tokens. The first such token must be one of the @@ -417,12 +420,12 @@ out of range argument or one of a kind different of what is expected is given expected), or when an unrecognized command/argument is found. When a number of arguments greater than that required for a particular command is provided, only the portion of the line up to the last required argument is considered -and any further tokens are ignored.</p> +and any further tokens are ignored. <p><b>pamtris</b> is case-insensitive. That is, <b>mode</b>, <b>MODE</b>, -<b>mODe</b>, etc. are all treated the same way.</p> +<b>mODe</b>, etc. are all treated the same way. -<p>The commands recognized by <b>pamtris</b> are:</p> +<p>The commands recognized by <b>pamtris</b> are: <dl> <dt><b>mode</b></dt> <dt><b>attribs</b></dt> @@ -437,16 +440,16 @@ and any further tokens are ignored.</p> an exclamation mark (<b>!</b>) in place of the <b>print</b> command name and an asterisk (<b>*</b>) in place of <b>clear</b>. -</p><p>The functions of the commands are as follows. +<p>The functions of the commands are as follows. -</p><dl> +<dl> <dt><b>mode</b> { triangles | strip | fan }</dt> <dd> <p>This makes <b>pamtris</b> enter a new drawing mode. The argument is a word which specifies the mode to change to. Instead of a full argument name, it is permissible to provide a minimum unique abbreviation, which has the same effect. The drawing mode will remain the same until the next <b>mode</b> -command is given.</p> +command is given. <p>This command also resets the current vertex list, which is (re)initialized to an empty state after the command is executed. One may add @@ -454,19 +457,19 @@ new vertices to this list through successive invocations of the <b>vertex</b> command (see below). You do not have to worry about providing "too many" vertices, since the vertex list is virtualized: <b>pamtris</b> maintains only the state pertaining to three vertices at any one time. The current vertex -list is initially empty.</p> +list is initially empty. <p>It is permissible to give <b>pamtris</b> a <b>mode</b> command which instructs it to enter a drawing mode it is currently already in. One might use this approach to reset the current vertex list without changing the -current drawing mode.</p> +current drawing mode. <p><b>Regardless of the current drawing mode, a new triangle is immediately rasterized into the frame buffer as soon as the necessary vertices for it are -provided through the current vertex list.</b></p> +provided through the current vertex list.</b> <p>In the following descriptions of each drawing mode, triangles' and -vertices' indices (ordinal numbers) are 0-based.</p> +vertices' indices (ordinal numbers) are 0-based. <p>The <b>triangles</b> argument instructs <b>pamtris</b> to enter the "TRIANGLES" drawing mode. While in this mode, a series of separate triangles @@ -475,7 +478,7 @@ specify a new triangle. Formally, this means that every <i>N<sup>th</sup></i> triangle is specified by vertices 3 * <i>N</i>, 3 * <i>N</i> + 1, and 3 * <i>N</i> + 2. This is the default initial mode and is therefore not required to be set explicitly before drawing any triangles. -</p> + <p>The <b>strip</b> argument instructs <b>pamtris</b> to enter the "STRIP" drawing mode. While in this mode, <b>pamtris</b> constructs a "triangle @@ -483,7 +486,7 @@ strip." That is, the first three vertices pushed into the current vertex list specify the first triangle, and every new vertex pushed after that specifies, together with the previous two, the next triangle. Formally, this means that every <i>N</i><sup>th</sup> triangle is specified by vertices -<i>N</i>, <i>N</i> + 1, and <i>N</i> + 2.</p> +<i>N</i>, <i>N</i> + 1, and <i>N</i> + 2. <p>The <b>fan</b> argument instructs <b>pamtris</b> to enter the "FAN" drawing mode. While in this mode, a so-called "triangle fan" is constructed. @@ -491,7 +494,7 @@ That is, the first three vertices pushed into the current vertex list specify the first triangle, and every new vertex pushed after that specifies, together with the previous vertex and the first one, the next triangle. Formally, this means that every <i>N</i><sup>th</sup> triangle is specified by vertices -<i>0</i>, <i>N</i> + 1, and <i>N</i> + 2.</p> +<i>0</i>, <i>N</i> + 1, and <i>N</i> + 2. </dd> <dt> @@ -508,17 +511,17 @@ sequence of values is the just mentioned "current attribute values list." <i>i</i><sup>th</sup> attribute of the current attribute values list. All arguments must be integer values in the closed range [0, <i>maxval</i>]. If a number of arguments less than the current value of <i>num_attribs</i> -is given, the command is considered invalid and is therefore ignored.</p> +is given, the command is considered invalid and is therefore ignored. <p>The current attribute values list remains unchanged until the next valid <b>attribs</b> or <b>reset</b> command is given. The <b>attribs</b> command allows one to change the values of each attribute individually, while the <b>reset</b> command is not specifically designed for that function, but it has the side effect of setting all values in the current attribute values -list to the <i>maxval</i> (see below).</p> +list to the <i>maxval</i> (see below). <p>All values in the current attribute values list are initially set to the -<i>maxval</i>.</p> +<i>maxval</i>. </dd> <dt id="cmd_vertex"><b>vertex</b> <i>x</i> <i>y</i> <i>z</i> [<i>w</i>]</dt> <dd> @@ -526,7 +529,7 @@ list to the <i>maxval</i> (see below).</p> command above), assigning the values of the arguments to its respective coordinates, and the values in the current attribute values list (see the <b>attribs</b> command above) to the respective entries in the -attribute list associated with the vertex.</p> +attribute list associated with the vertex. <p><i>x</i>, <i>y</i> and <i>z</i> must be integer values in the closed range [-32767, 32767]. @@ -546,7 +549,7 @@ does <em>not</em> "warp" the coordinates you give in any way. Therefore, if you want to draw images in perspective, you must compute values for <i>x</i> and <i>y</i> already projected into <b>pamtris</b>' coordinate system yourself, using an external perspective projection -method, prior to giving them to the program.</p> +method, prior to giving them to the program. <p>The <i>z</i> parameter represents the Z-coordinate of the vertex, which is used to compute depth values for tuples within the areas of rasterized @@ -554,7 +557,7 @@ triangles. Intuitively, smaller values for <i>z</i> mean "closer to the viewer," and larger ones mean "farther away from the viewer" (but remember: as said above, the <i>x</i> and <i>y</i> coordinates are not warped in any way, which implies that they are not affected by <i>z</i>; -neither by the next parameter, for that matter).</p> +neither by the next parameter, for that matter). <p>Optionally, you may provide a <i>w</i> parameter which represents a "perspective correction factor" used to properly interpolate vertex attributes @@ -579,13 +582,13 @@ vector <b>r</b> and the 3D unit vector <b>n</b> (i.e. the length of the orthogonal projection of <b>r</b> on the line determined by <b>n</b>) in pixels; where <b>r</b> is the vector which goes from the projection reference point (PRP, or "eye") to the vertex, and <b>n</b> is a view-plane normal -(VPN) of unit length which points away from the PRP.</p> +(VPN) of unit length which points away from the PRP. <p>In case you are performing a mere multiplication of a 4D vector with x, y, z and w components by a so-called perspective projection 4x4 matrix in order to compute the projection of a vertex onto the image plane, then you may supply for <i>w</i> a value which is directly proportional -to the absolute value of the w component of the resulting vector.</p> +to the absolute value of the w component of the resulting vector. <p>[<a id="vertex_note" href="#vertex_note_link">*</a>]: For any two 3D vectors <b>a</b> and <b>b</b>, with respective @@ -595,7 +598,7 @@ b<sub>x</sub>, b<sub>y</sub>, b<sub>z</sub>, the dot product between a<sub>x</sub> * b<sub>x</sub> + a<sub>y</sub> * b<sub>y</sub> + a<sub>z</sub> * b<sub>z</sub>. -</p> + </dd> <dt><b>print</b></dt> @@ -606,20 +609,20 @@ fields are the same as the width and height, respectively, of the frame buffer, which were given on the command line during program invocation. The MAXVAL field is equal to the current maxval; the DEPTH field is equal to the current value of <i>num_attribs</i> + 1; and the TUPLTYPE field is -equal to the current tupletype.</p> +equal to the current tupletype. <p>This command has no effect upon the current drawing state. E. g. it does -not modify the current drawing mode, the current vertex list, etc.</p> +not modify the current drawing mode, the current vertex list, etc. <p>One may issue an arbitrary number of <b>print</b> commands at different positions in the input instruction sequence to produce a multi-image PAM -stream.</p> +stream. </dd> <dt><b>clear</b> [ image | depth ]</dt> <dd> <p>Clears the frame buffer. That is, all samples in the image buffer are once again set to 0, and all entries in the depth buffer are once again set to the -maximum permitted depth value.</p> +maximum permitted depth value. <p>Optionally, one may provide an argument to only clear either the image buffer or the depth buffer individually, while leaving the other intact. With @@ -627,10 +630,10 @@ the <b>image</b> argument, only the image buffer is cleared; with the <b>depth</b> argument, only the depth buffer is cleared. Instead of full argument names, one may provide a minimum unique abbreviation, which has the same effect. The single character <b>z</b> is also accepted as an alias for -<b>depth</b>.</p> +<b>depth</b>. <p>Like the <b>print</b> command, this command has no effect upon the -current drawing state either.</p> +current drawing state either. </dd> <dt><b>reset</b> <i>maxval</i> <i>num_attribs</i> [<i>tupletype</i>]</dt> @@ -639,7 +642,7 @@ current drawing state either.</p> (num_attribs), resetting the <u>image</u> buffer with a new maxval and number of samples per tuple while at it. The parameter <i>maxval</i> must be an integer in the closed range [1, 65535], and <i>num_attribs</i> must be an -integer in the closed range [1, 20].</p> +integer in the closed range [1, 20]. <p>Optionally, after the second argument, one may provide a string to be assigned to the current <i>tupletype</i>. The string goes from the first @@ -647,42 +650,42 @@ character after the second argument which is not white space and continues until (and including) the last character before the end of the line which is not white space. If a new tupletype is not provided, or the provided string is longer than 255 characters, the empty string is assigned to the current -<i>tupletype</i>.</p> +<i>tupletype</i>. -<p>The side effects of running this command are</p> +<p>The side effects of running this command are <ul> <li> The new image buffer is completely cleared once the command is executed. -</li> + <li> All values in the current attribute values list are set to the new maxval. -</li> + <li> The current vertex list is reset. -</li> + </ul> <p>However, it does not touch the depth buffer: it is left the same way as it was found before the command. Also the drawing mode remains the same (e. g. if -<b>pamtris</b> was in FAN mode, it will continue in that same mode, etc.).</p> +<b>pamtris</b> was in FAN mode, it will continue in that same mode, etc.). <p>If this command is given with an invalid value for <i>maxval</i> or <i>num_attribs</i>, it is ignored and therefore none of the above side effects apply, nor do the current maxval, num_attribs or tupletype change at -all.</p> +all. <p>It is permissible to give a value for <i>maxval</i> and <i>num_attribs</i> equal to the current maxval and num_attribs, respectively, although the above -side effects will still apply even in such cases.</p> +side effects will still apply even in such cases. <p>Since this command deals with memory allocation, it may fail to execute successfully. If that happens, no lines of input will be read anymore and -<b>pamtris</b> will be terminated as if the <b>quit</b> command was given.</p> +<b>pamtris</b> will be terminated as if the <b>quit</b> command was given. <dt><b>quit</b></dt> <dd> <p>This terminates <b>pamtris</b>. It will not read any more lines of input -after this command.</p> +after this command. </dd> </dl> @@ -700,11 +703,11 @@ providing the desired texture file as a "lookup table." If you are drawing pictures in perspective, make sure to provide adequate values for the <i>w</i> parameter to your vertex commands (<a href="#cmd_vertex">see above</a>) so that the resulting samples in -the images produced by <b>pamtris</b> are perspective-correct.</p> +the images produced by <b>pamtris</b> are perspective-correct. <p>You might want to consider using <a href="pnmtile.html"><b>pnmtile</b></a> to make textures which are -inteded to be "repeated" along triangle meshes.</p> +inteded to be "repeated" along triangle meshes. <h3>Anti-aliased edges</h3> @@ -716,7 +719,7 @@ the desired final size, and then, when all post-processing is done, down-scale the final image(s) to the desired size. Drawing images with twice the desired width and height, then down-scaling them to the intended size while disregarding gamma (i.e. what <b>pamscale -linear</b> does) -often produces good enough results.</p> +often produces good enough results. <h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> @@ -742,7 +745,7 @@ usability. <p><b>pamtris</b> was new in Netpbm 10.84 (September 2018). -</p><hr> +<hr> <h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> <ul> <li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> @@ -752,13 +755,14 @@ usability. <li><a href="#examples_fan">Fan Mode</a> <li><a href="#examples_strip">Strip Mode</a> <li><a href="#examples_triangles">Triangle Mode</a> - <li><a href="#pamtris_c">Meta-programming</a></li> + <li><a href="#pamtris_c">Meta-programming</a> </ul> <li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> <li><a href="#instruction_code">INSTRUCTION CODE</a> <li><a href="#tips">TIPS</a> <li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> <li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> </ul> diff --git a/pamundice.html b/pamundice.html index 7f1c0afc..a258d72b 100644 --- a/pamundice.html +++ b/pamundice.html @@ -1,13 +1,12 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamundice User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamundice</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamundice User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamundice</h1> Updated: 26 April 2020 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamundice - combine grid of images (tiles) into one <h2 id="example">EXAMPLE</h2> @@ -22,29 +21,29 @@ pamundice - combine grid of images (tiles) into one </pre> -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamundice</B> +<b>pamundice</b> -[<B>-across=</B><I>n</I>] +[<b>-across=</b><i>n</i>] -[<B>-down=</B><I>n</I>] +[<b>-down=</b><i>n</i>] -[<B>-hoverlap=</B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-hoverlap=</b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-voverlap=</B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-voverlap=</b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] {<i>input_filename_pattern</i>, <b>-listfile=</b><i>filename</i>} -<P>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You can use +<p>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You can use two hyphens instead of one. You can separate an option name from its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -160,27 +159,32 @@ produces, except that the precision may be more or less. numbered image). -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamundice</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-across=</B><I>N</I> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-across=</b><i>N</i> -<DD>This is the number of tiles across in the grid, i.e. the number of +<dd>This is the number of tiles across in the grid, i.e. the number of tiles in each rank, or the number of files. <p>Default is 1. -<DT><B>-down=</B><I>N</I> +<dt><b>-down=</b><i>N</i> -<DD>This is the number of tiles up and down in the grid, i.e. the +<dd>This is the number of tiles up and down in the grid, i.e. the number of tiles in each file, or the number of ranks. <p>Default is 1. -<DT><B>-hoverlap=</B><I>pixels</I> +<dt><b>-hoverlap=</b><i>pixels</i> -<DD>This is the amount in pixels to overlap the tiles horizontally. +<dd>This is the amount in pixels to overlap the tiles horizontally. <b>pamundice</b> clips this much off the right edge of every tile before joining it to the adjacent image to the right. The tiles along the right edge remain whole. @@ -192,9 +196,9 @@ option of <b>pamdice</b>. <p>Default is zero -- no overlap. -<DT><B>-voverlap=</B><I>pixels</I> +<dt><b>-voverlap=</b><i>pixels</i> -<DD>This is analogous to <b>-hoverlap</b>, but <b>pamundice</b> +<dd>This is analogous to <b>-hoverlap</b>, but <b>pamundice</b> clips the bottom edge of each image before joining it to the one below. <dt><b>-listfile=</b><i>filename</i> @@ -213,37 +217,37 @@ This is an alternative to specifying a file name pattern as an argument. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.90 (March 2020). -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Print information about the processing to Standard Error. +<dd>Print information about the processing to Standard Error. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamundice</b> was new in Netpbm 10.39 (June 2007). Before that, <b>pnmcat</b> is the best substitute. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pamdice.html">pamdice</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmindex.html">pnmindex</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmtile.html">pnmtile</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#example">EXAMPLE</A> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">ARGUMENTS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pamdice.html">pamdice</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmindex.html">pnmindex</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmtile.html">pnmtile</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#example">EXAMPLE</a> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#arguments">ARGUMENTS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamunlookup.html b/pamunlookup.html index 00071afd..6d8efa58 100644 --- a/pamunlookup.html +++ b/pamunlookup.html @@ -1,27 +1,26 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><title>Pamunlookup User Manual</title></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamunlookup</H1> -Updated: 9 August 2015 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2 id="name">NAME</H2> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamunlookup User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamunlookup</h1> +Updated: 09 August 2015 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> pamunlookup - inverse of pamlookup -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamunlookup</B> -<B>-lookupfile=</B><i>lookupfile</i> -<I>inputfile</I> +<b>pamunlookup</b> +<b>-lookupfile=</b><i>lookupfile</i> +<i>inputfile</i> -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -55,7 +54,7 @@ index image is the size of the lookup table. <h3 id="example">Example</h3> -<P>Here is an example of <b>pamunlookup</b>'s function. +<p>Here is an example of <b>pamunlookup</b>'s function. <p>Consider an input image consisting of a 3x2 PPM as follows: @@ -92,44 +91,49 @@ image file and lookup table file are Standard Input. The output index image goes to Standard Output. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-lookupfile=</B><i>lookupfile</i> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamunlookup</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DD><i>lookupfile</i> names the file that contains the PAM or PNM +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-lookupfile=</b><i>lookupfile</i> + +<dd><i>lookupfile</i> names the file that contains the PAM or PNM image that is the lookup table. This option is mandatory. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pamlookup.html">pamlookup</A>, -<A HREF="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</A>, -<A HREF="pnmcolormap.html">pnmcolormap</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A>, -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A> +<a href="pamlookup.html">pamlookup</a>, +<a href="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</a>, +<a href="pnmcolormap.html">pnmcolormap</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a>, +<a href="pam.html">pam</a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamunlookup</b> was new in Netpbm 10.72 (September 2015). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL COMPACT> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul compact> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> <ul> <li><a href="#example">Example</a> </ul> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamwipeout.html b/pamwipeout.html index 33bfa45b..4e4c170a 100644 --- a/pamwipeout.html +++ b/pamwipeout.html @@ -1,13 +1,9 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<html> -<head> -<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"> -<title>Pamwipeout User Manual</title> -</head> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamwipeout User Manual</title></head> <body> <h1>pamwipeout</h1> -Updated: February 26, 2011 -<p> +Updated: 26 February 2011 +<br> <a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> <h2>NAME</h2> @@ -19,17 +15,17 @@ pamwipeout - replace detail with smooth gradient from one edge to the other [<b><i>filename</i></b>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of options is acceptable. -You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options.</p> +You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. <h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> -<p>This program is part of <a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/index.html">Netpbm</a>.</p> +<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p>The <b>pamwipeout</b> utility takes a Netpbm image as input and the uses two opposite edges of the image to wipe out anything in between. You can use it in combination with <b>pamcut</b> and <b>pnmpaste</b> / <b>pamcomp</b> to remove unwanted parts of a larger image. The program replaces the pixels in -between the two edges with a gradient from one edge to the other.</p> +between the two edges with a gradient from one edge to the other. <p>In <b>top-bottom</b> mode, the program reads the whole image into memory before it can start processing. In <b>left-right</b> it will read the image a @@ -42,14 +38,19 @@ in case of very large images, it may be better to use instead of <a href="http://www.i-am.ws/entry/pnmblend_disappearing_act">www.i-am.ws</a>, the author wrote about a predecessor of "pamwipeout" at the time named "pnmblend". It shows a good example of what can be accomplished with this -utility.</p> +utility. <h2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</h2> <p><b><i>Filename</i></b> is the name of the input file. If you don't -specify this, <b>pamwipeout</b> reads the image from Standard Input.</p> +specify this, <b>pamwipeout</b> reads the image from Standard Input. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamwipeout</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl compact> <dt><b>-tb</b> | <b>-lr</b></dt> <dd> @@ -59,31 +60,31 @@ specify one of these, but not both. </dl> <h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<b><a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/pam.html">pam</a></b> and -<b><a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/pamflip.html">pamflip</a></b>, -<b><a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, -<b><a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, -<b><a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/pnmpaste.html">pnmpaste</a></b>. +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> and +<b><a href="pamflip.html">pamflip</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmpaste.html">pnmpaste</a></b>. <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<p><b>pamwipeout</b> was new in Netpbm 10.54 (March 2011).</p> +<p><b>pamwipeout</b> was new in Netpbm 10.54 (March 2011). <h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> <p><a href="mailto:willem@schaik.com">Willem van Schaik</a> -wrote this program in January 2011 and contributed it to Netpbm.</p> +wrote this program in January 2011 and contributed it to Netpbm. <hr> <h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> <ul> <li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> -</li><li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> -</li><li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> -</li><li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> -</li><li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> -</li><li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> -</li> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> </ul> </body> </html> diff --git a/pamx.html b/pamx.html index 5c9c9984..dad7e27f 100644 --- a/pamx.html +++ b/pamx.html @@ -1,18 +1,17 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamx User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamx</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pamx User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamx</h1> Updated: 02 July 2011 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamx - display Netpbm image in X Window System window -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamx</B> +<b>pamx</b> [<b>-fullscreen</b>] [<b>-install</b>] @@ -28,12 +27,12 @@ pamx - display Netpbm image in X Window System window [<b>-geometry=</b><i>x-geometry-string</i>] [<b>-visual=</b><i>name</i>] <i>netpbm_file</i> -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or an equals sign between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -80,6 +79,11 @@ same resource class that the conventional viewer program <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamx</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-border=</b><i>color</i> @@ -101,7 +105,7 @@ displayed image. <dd>Use the entire screen to display the image. -<dt><b>-geometry=</b><I>W</I><b>x</b><i>H</i>[{<b>+</b>,<b>-</b>}<i>X</i>{<b>+</b>,<b>-</b>}<i>Y</i> +<dt><b>-geometry=</b><i>W</i><b>x</b><i>H</i>[{<b>+</b>,<b>-</b>}<i>X</i>{<b>+</b>,<b>-</b>}<i>Y</i> <dd>This sets the size and position of the window in which <b>pamx</b> displays the image. @@ -167,12 +171,12 @@ the input file, or "stdin" if the image is from Standard Input. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmsvgalib.html">ppmsvgalib</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, -<B>xzgv</B>, +<b><a href="ppmsvgalib.html">ppmsvgalib</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, +<b>xzgv</b>, <b>xwud</b>, <b>xloadimage</b>, <b>xli</b> @@ -239,15 +243,16 @@ Libnetpbm. understand. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#resource">X RESOURCE CLASS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#resource">X RESOURCE CLASS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmclean.html b/pbmclean.html index af370172..dc4fae18 100644 --- a/pbmclean.html +++ b/pbmclean.html @@ -1,37 +1,36 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmclean User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmclean</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmclean User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmclean</h1> Updated: 19 November 2011 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmclean - despeckle a PBM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmclean</B> -[<B>-minneighbors=</B><I>N</I>] -[<B>-black</B>|<B>-white</B>] +<b>pbmclean</b> +[<b>-minneighbors=</b><i>N</i>] +[<b>-black</b>|<b>-white</b>] [<b>-extended</b>] -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<?makeman .SH OPTION USAGE ?> -<P>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You +<?makeman .sh option usage ?> +<p>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You can use two hyphens instead of one. You can separate an option name from its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>pbmclean</B> cleans up a PBM image of random specks. It reads a +<p><b>pbmclean</b> cleans up a PBM image of random specks. It reads a PBM image as input and outputs a PBM that is the same as the input except with isolated pixels inverted. -<P>You can use <B>pbmclean </B> to clean up "snow" on bitmap +<p>You can use <b>pbmclean </b> to clean up "snow" on bitmap images. <p>There are two ways <b>pbmclean</b> can define "isolated" pixels: @@ -40,7 +39,7 @@ uses extended; otherwise it uses basic. <h3 id="basic"></h3> -<P>In basic mode, <B>pbmclean</B> looks at each pixel individually, and any +<p>In basic mode, <b>pbmclean</b> looks at each pixel individually, and any pixel that doesn't have at least a minimum number of pixels of the same color touching it is considered isolated and <b>pbmclean</b> erases it. @@ -52,15 +51,15 @@ isolated. black pixels in an otherwise white field, each of those pixels is isolated, so <b>pbmclean</b> erases them - turns both white. -<P>The default minimum 1 pixel — <b>pbmclean</b> flips only completely +<p>The default minimum 1 pixel — <b>pbmclean</b> flips only completely isolated pixels. -<P>(A <b>-minneighbors</b> value greater than 8 generates a completely -inverted image (but use <B>pnminvert</B> to do that) -- or a -completely white or completely black image with the <B>-black</B> or -<B>-white</B> option). +<p>(A <b>-minneighbors</b> value greater than 8 generates a completely +inverted image (but use <b>pnminvert</b> to do that) -- or a +completely white or completely black image with the <b>-black</b> or +<b>-white</b> option). -<P><B>pbmclean</B> considers the area beyond the edges of the image to +<p><b>pbmclean</b> considers the area beyond the edges of the image to be white. (This matters when you consider pixels right on the edge of the image). @@ -88,20 +87,25 @@ pixels to escape <b>pbmclean</b>'s purge. <p>Extended mode was new in Netpbm 10.56 (September 2011). -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmclean</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-black</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-black</b> -<DT><B>-white</B> +<dt><b>-white</b> -<DD>Flip pixels of the specified color. By default, if you specify -neither <B>-black</B> nor <B>-white</B>, <B>pbmclean</B> flips both +<dd>Flip pixels of the specified color. By default, if you specify +neither <b>-black</b> nor <b>-white</b>, <b>pbmclean</b> flips both black and white pixels which do not have sufficient identical -neighbors. If you specify <B>-black</B>, <B>pbmclean</B> leaves the +neighbors. If you specify <b>-black</b>, <b>pbmclean</b> leaves the white pixels alone and just erases isolated black pixels. Vice versa -for <B>-white</B>. You may specify both <B>-black</B> and -<B>-white</B> to get the same as the default behavior. +for <b>-white</b>. You may specify both <b>-black</b> and +<b>-white</b> to get the same as the default behavior. <dt><b>-minneighbors=</b><i>N</i> @@ -109,8 +113,8 @@ for <B>-white</B>. You may specify both <B>-black</B> and for <b>pbmclean</b> to consider them legitimate and not clean them out of the image. See <a href="#description">Description</a>. -<P>Before December 2001, <B>pbmclean</B> accepted <B>-</B><I>N</I> -instead of <B>-minneighbors</B>. Before Netpbm 10.27 (March 2005), +<p>Before December 2001, <b>pbmclean</b> accepted <b>-</b><i>N</i> +instead of <b>-minneighbors</b>. Before Netpbm 10.27 (March 2005), <b>-minneighbors</b> was <b>-minneighbor</b>. <dt><b>-extended</b> @@ -120,18 +124,18 @@ detection. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.56 (September 2011). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B> +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1990 by Angus Duggan Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. Copyright (C) 2001 by Michael Sternberg. -<P> +<p> Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that @@ -139,14 +143,14 @@ copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmpage.html b/pbmpage.html index 6bd44430..f97e92d3 100644 --- a/pbmpage.html +++ b/pbmpage.html @@ -1,103 +1,107 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmpage User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmpage</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmpage User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmpage</h1> Updated: 08 June 2019 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2 id="name">NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmpage - create a one page test pattern for printing -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmpage</B> -[<B>-a4</B>] -<I>test_pattern</I> +<b>pbmpage</b> +[<b>-a4</b>] +<i>test_pattern</i> -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>pbmpage</B> generates a one page test pattern to print on a +<p><b>pbmpage</b> generates a one page test pattern to print on a sheet of paper, for use in calibrating a printer. The test pattern in is PBM format. -<P><B>pbmpage</B> produces an image intended for 600 dots per inch +<p><b>pbmpage</b> produces an image intended for 600 dots per inch printer resolution. -<P>If you are printing on an HP PPA printer, you can convert the +<p>If you are printing on an HP PPA printer, you can convert the output of this program to a stream that you can feed to the printer -with <B>pbmtoppa</B>. +with <b>pbmtoppa</b>. -<P> +<p> Bear in mind that when you print the test pattern, you are testing not only the printer, but any converter or driver software along the printing path. Any one of these components may adjust margins, crop the image, erase edges, and such. -<P>If, because of addition of margins, the printer refuses to print the -image because it is too big, use <B>pamcut</B> to cut the right and +<p>If, because of addition of margins, the printer refuses to print the +image because it is too big, use <b>pamcut</b> to cut the right and bottom edges off the test pattern until it is small enough to print. -<P><I>test_pattern </I> is the number of the test pattern to generate, -as follows. The default is <B>1</B>. +<p><i>test_pattern </i> is the number of the test pattern to generate, +as follows. The default is <b>1</b>. -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>1</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>1</b> -<DD> +<dd> A black on white grid ruled in numbers of pixels. A black one pixel box is at the very edges of the paper. <p>Before Netpbm 10.18 (August 2003), the perimeter box was not there. -<DT><B>2</B> +<dt><b>2</b> -<DD> +<dd> A vertical line segment, one pixel wide, extending 1/2" up from the exact center of the page. -<DT><B>3</B> +<dt><b>3</b> -<DD> +<dd> Two diagonal line segments, one starting at the upper left corner of the page, the other starting from the lower right corner of the page. Both extend 1/2" toward the center of the page at 45 degrees. -</DL> +</dl> + +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmpage</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-a4</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-a4</b> -<DD>Generate an image for A4 (European) paper. Without this option, -<B>pbmpage</B> generates an image for US standard paper (8 1/2" +<dd>Generate an image for A4 (European) paper. Without this option, +<b>pbmpage</b> generates an image for US standard paper (8 1/2" wide x 11" high). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pbmtoppa.html">pbmtoppa</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B> +<b><a href="pbmtoppa.html">pbmtoppa</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Tim Norman. Copyright (C) 1998. Licensed under GNU Public License -<P>Manual page by Bryan Henderson, May 2000. Contributed to the public +<p>Manual page by Bryan Henderson, May 2000. Contributed to the public domain by its author. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmreduce.html b/pbmreduce.html index a576e1d7..5247d14b 100644 --- a/pbmreduce.html +++ b/pbmreduce.html @@ -1,45 +1,49 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmreduce User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmreduce</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmreduce User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmreduce</h1> Updated: 13 April 2016 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmreduce - read a PBM image and reduce it N times -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmreduce</B> -[<B>-floyd</B>|<B>-fs</B>|<B>-threshold</B>] -[<B>-value</B> <I>val</I>] <I>N</I> +<b>pbmreduce</b> +[<b>-floyd</b>|<b>-fs</b>|<b>-threshold</b>] +[<b>-value</b> <i>val</i>] <i>N</i> [<b>-randomseed=</b><i>integer</i>] -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<P>You can abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. +<p>You can abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmreduce</b> reads a PBM image as input and reduces it by a -factor of <I>N</I>, producing a PBM image as output. +factor of <i>N</i>, producing a PBM image as output. -<P><b>pbmreduce</b> duplicates a lot of the functionality of +<p><b>pbmreduce</b> duplicates a lot of the functionality of <b>pamditherbw</b>; you could do something like <tt>pamscale | pamditherbw</tt>, but <b>pbmreduce</b> is a lot faster. -<P>You can use <B>pbmreduce</B> to "re-halftone" an image. +<p>You can use <b>pbmreduce</b> to "re-halftone" an image. Let's say you have a scanner that only produces black&white, not grayscale, and it does a terrible job of halftoning (most b&w scanners fit this description). One way to fix the halftoning is to scan at the highest possible resolution, say 300 dpi, and then reduce by a factor of three or so using <b>pbmreduce</b>. You can even -correct the brightness of an image, by using the <B>-value</B> option. +correct the brightness of an image, by using the <b>-value</b> option. + +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmreduce</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> @@ -52,7 +56,7 @@ reducing line drawings. <dt><b>-value</b> <dd> -<P>This option alters the thresholding value for all quantizations. It should +<p>This option alters the thresholding value for all quantizations. It should be a real number between 0 and 1. Above 0.5 means darker images; below 0.5 means lighter. @@ -68,25 +72,25 @@ halftoning. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pamenlarge.html">pamenlarge</A>, -<A HREF="pamscale.html">pamscale</A>, -<A HREF="pamditherbw.html">pamditherbw</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<a href="pamenlarge.html">pamenlarge</a>, +<a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a>, +<a href="pamditherbw.html">pamditherbw</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtext.html b/pbmtext.html index e3fbb97a..2f5064e3 100644 --- a/pbmtext.html +++ b/pbmtext.html @@ -1,41 +1,40 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtext User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtext</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtext User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtext</h1> Updated: 29 May 2020 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtext - render text into a PBM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtext</B> -[<B>-wchar</B>] -[<B>-font</B> <I>fontfile</I>] -[<B>-builtin</B> <I>fontname</I>] -[<B>-space</B> <I>pixels</I>] -[<B>-lspace</B> <I>pixels</I>] -[<B>-nomargins</B>] -[<B>-width</B> <i>pixels</i>] +<b>pbmtext</b> +[<b>-wchar</b>] +[<b>-font</b> <i>fontfile</i>] +[<b>-builtin</b> <i>fontname</i>] +[<b>-space</b> <i>pixels</i>] +[<b>-lspace</b> <i>pixels</i>] +[<b>-nomargins</b>] +[<b>-width</b> <i>pixels</i>] [<b>-load-entire-font</b>] [<b>-verbose</b>] [<b>-dry-run</b>] [<b>-text-dump</b>] -[<I>text</I>] +[<i>text</i>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pbmtext</b> takes the specified text, either a single line from +<p><b>pbmtext</b> takes the specified text, either a single line from the command line or multiple lines from standard input, and renders it into a PBM graphical image. @@ -43,7 +42,7 @@ into a PBM graphical image. by spaces, except that if there are no non-option command line arguments, it is Standard Input. -<P>In the image, each line of input is a line of output. Lines are +<p>In the image, each line of input is a line of output. Lines are delimited by newline characters. <p>The program renders any character in an input line that is not in the font @@ -56,11 +55,11 @@ is Standard Input. create tab stops every 8 characters. Note that this is not useful if the font is proportional. -<P>The image is just wide enough for the longest line of text, plus +<p>The image is just wide enough for the longest line of text, plus margins, and just high enough to contain the lines of text, plus margins. -<P>The left and right margins are twice the width of the widest +<p>The left and right margins are twice the width of the widest character in the font; the top and bottom margins are the height of the tallest character in the font. But if the text is only one line, all the margins are half of this. You can use the <b>-nomargins</b> option @@ -80,13 +79,18 @@ a <em>document</em>, you would be better off using a document formatting program to "print" to a Postscript file, then feeding that Postscript to <b>pstopnm</b>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtext</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><B>-wchar</B> +<dt><b>-wchar</b> -<DD> +<dd> <p>By default, <b>pbmtext</b> takes a single-byte character stream as input. When you specify <b>-wchar</b>, it treats input text as a multibyte character @@ -99,10 +103,10 @@ be fed from standard input. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.82 (March 2018). -<DT><B>-font</B> -<DT><B>-builtin</B> +<dt><b>-font</b> +<dt><b>-builtin</b> -<DD> +<dd> <b>-builtin</b> selects a font among those built into Netpbm. @@ -121,37 +125,37 @@ point type printed at 75 dpi). see <a href="#fonts">Fonts</a> below. -<DT><B>-space</B> <I>pixels</I> +<dt><b>-space</b> <i>pixels</i> -<DD> Add <I>pixels</I> pixels of space between characters. This is in +<dd> Add <i>pixels</i> pixels of space between characters. This is in addition to whatever space surrounding characters is built into the font, which is usually enough to produce a reasonable string of text. -<P><I>pixels</I> may be fractional, in which case the number of +<p><i>pixels</i> may be fractional, in which case the number of pixels added varies so as to achieve the specified average. For -example <B>-space=1.5</B> causes half the spaces to be 1 pixel and +example <b>-space=1.5</b> causes half the spaces to be 1 pixel and half to be 2 pixels. -<P><I>pixels</I> may be negative to crowd text together, but the +<p><i>pixels</i> may be negative to crowd text together, but the author has not put much thought or testing into how this works in every possible case, so it might cause disastrous results. -<DT><B>-lspace</B> <I>pixels</I> +<dt><b>-lspace</b> <i>pixels</i> -<DD> Add <I>pixels</I> pixels of space between lines. This is in +<dd> Add <i>pixels</i> pixels of space between lines. This is in addition to whatever space above and below characters is built into the font, which is usually enough to produce a reasonable line spacing. -<P><I>pixels</I> must be a whole number. +<p><i>pixels</i> must be a whole number. -<P><I>pixels</I> may be negative to crowd lines together, but the +<p><i>pixels</i> may be negative to crowd lines together, but the author has not put much thought or testing into how this works in every possible case, so it might cause disastrous results. -<DT><b>-nomargins</b> +<dt><b>-nomargins</b> -<DD>By default, <b>pbmtext</b> adds margins all around the image as +<dd>By default, <b>pbmtext</b> adds margins all around the image as described above. This option causes <b>pbmtext</b> not to add any margins. @@ -160,9 +164,9 @@ because a character itself may include space at its edges. To eliminate all surrounding background, so the type touches all four edges of the image, use <b>pnmcrop</b>. -<DT><b>-width</b> <i>pixels</i> +<dt><b>-width</b> <i>pixels</i> -<DD>This specifies how much horizontal space the text is supposed to fit +<dd>This specifies how much horizontal space the text is supposed to fit into. <p>If the input is one line, <b>pbmtext</b> breaks it into multiple @@ -213,30 +217,30 @@ specified by the current locale. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.82 (March 2018). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="usage">USAGE</H2> +<h2 id="usage">USAGE</h2> -<P>Often, you want to place text over another image. One way to do this is -with <B>ppmlabel</B>. For more flexible (but complex) drawing of text on an +<p>Often, you want to place text over another image. One way to do this is +with <b>ppmlabel</b>. For more flexible (but complex) drawing of text on an image, there is <b>ppmdraw</b>. These do not give you the font options that -<B>pbmtext</B> does, though. +<b>pbmtext</b> does, though. -<P>Another way is to use <B>pbmtext</B> to create an image containing -the text, then use <B>pamcomp</B> to overlay the text image onto your +<p>Another way is to use <b>pbmtext</b> to create an image containing +the text, then use <b>pamcomp</b> to overlay the text image onto your base image. To make only the text (and not the entire rectangle containing it) cover the base image, you will need to give -<B>pamcomp</B> a mask, via its <B>-alpha</B> option. You can just use +<b>pamcomp</b> a mask, via its <b>-alpha</b> option. You can just use the text image itself as the mask, as long as you also specify the -<B>-invert</B> option to <B>pamcomp</B>. +<b>-invert</b> option to <b>pamcomp</b>. -<P>If you want to overlay colored text instead of black, just use -<B>ppmchange</B> to change all black pixels to the color of your +<p>If you want to overlay colored text instead of black, just use +<b>ppmchange</b> to change all black pixels to the color of your choice before overlaying the text image. But still use the original black and white image for the transparency mask. -<P>If you want the text at an angle, use <B>pnmrotate</B> on the text +<p>If you want the text at an angle, use <b>pnmrotate</b> on the text image (and transparency mask) before overlaying. <h2 id="fonts">FONTS</h2> @@ -291,7 +295,7 @@ option), you just create a PBM image of the text matrix below. <p>The first step is to display text matrix below on the screen, e.g. in an X11 window. -<PRE> +<pre> M ",/^_[`jpqy| M @@ -306,7 +310,7 @@ e.g. in an X11 window. M ",/^_[`jpqy| M -</PRE> +</pre> <p>Make sure it's a fixed width font -- This should display as a perfect rectangle. @@ -331,11 +335,11 @@ matrix. For example, "l" might display with a little piece of the "m" attached on its right. <p>Do a screen grab or window dump of that text, using for instance -<B>xwd</B>, <B>xgrabsc</B>, or <B>screendump</B>. Convert the result into a -pbm file. If necessary, use <B>pamcut</B> to remove anything you grabbed in +<b>xwd</b>, <b>xgrabsc</b>, or <b>screendump</b>. Convert the result into a +pbm file. If necessary, use <b>pamcut</b> to remove anything you grabbed in addition to the text pictured above (or be a wimp and use a graphical editor -such as Gimp). Finally, run it through <B>pnmcrop</B> to make sure the edges -are right up against the text. <B>pbmtext</B> can figure out the sizes and +such as Gimp). Finally, run it through <b>pnmcrop</b> to make sure the edges +are right up against the text. <b>pbmtext</b> can figure out the sizes and spacings from that. <p>There are some historical computer fonts, such as that used by the original @@ -373,10 +377,10 @@ the user to supply a BDF file covering the necessary glyphs with the <h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> -<P>If the text is from Standard Input, no line may be longer than 4999 +<p>If the text is from Standard Input, no line may be longer than 4999 characters. If one is, the program aborts with an appropriate error message. -<P>If the text is from Standard Input and contains a null character, the +<p>If the text is from Standard Input and contains a null character, the results are abnormal. Lines may be truncated, and a single line may be considered multiple lines. Normal text does not contain null characters, so this isn't a big problem. @@ -448,39 +452,39 @@ of 8-bit character sets. <b>otf2bdf</b> by Mike Leisher</a>. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pbmtextps.html">pbmtextps</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmcrop.html">pnmcrop</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmrotate.html">pnmrotate</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmlabel.html">ppmlabel</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmdraw.html">ppmdraw</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pbmtextps.html">pbmtextps</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmcrop.html">pnmcrop</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmrotate.html">pnmrotate</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmlabel.html">ppmlabel</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmdraw.html">ppmdraw</a></b>, +<b><a href="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, <b><a href="http://www.pango.org">Pango</a></b>, <b><a href="http://cairographics.org">Cairo</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1993 by Jef Poskanzer and George Phillips -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#usage">USAGE</A> -<LI><A HREF="#fonts">FONTS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#multibyte">MULTI-BYTE INPUT</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#tips">TIPS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#usage">USAGE</a> +<li><a href="#fonts">FONTS</a> +<li><a href="#multibyte">MULTI-BYTE INPUT</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#tips">TIPS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtextps.html b/pbmtextps.html index 1a7341a0..f2009bb3 100644 --- a/pbmtextps.html +++ b/pbmtextps.html @@ -1,19 +1,20 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><title>Pbmtextps User Manual</title></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtextps</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtextps User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtextps</h1> Updated: 15 June 2016 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtextps - render text into a PBM image using a postscript interpreter -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtextps</B> -[<B>-font</B> <I>fontname</I>] -[<B>-fontsize</B> <I>float</I>] -[<B>-resolution</B> <I>n</I>] +<b>pbmtextps</b> +[<b>-font</b> <i>fontname</i>] +[<b>-fontsize</b> <i>float</i>] +[<b>-resolution</b> <i>n</i>] [<b>-leftmargin=</b><i>n</i>] [<b>-rightmargin=</b><i>n</i>] [<b>-topmargin=</b><i>n</i>] @@ -22,16 +23,16 @@ pbmtextps - render text into a PBM image using a postscript interpreter [<b>-descent=</b><i>n</i>] [<b>-pad</b>] [<b>-crop</b>] -[<B>-stroke</B> <I>n</I>] +[<b>-stroke</b> <i>n</i>] [<b>-verbose</b>] [<b>-dump-ps</b>] -<I>text</I> +<i>text</i> -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pbmtextps</b> takes a single line of text from the command line and +<p><b>pbmtextps</b> takes a single line of text from the command line and renders it into a PBM image. The image is of a single line of text; newline characters in the input have no effect. @@ -43,7 +44,7 @@ no effect before Netpbm 10.42 (March 2008). The output is always raw PBM. <h3 id="margins">Margins</h3> -<P>By default, the image is cropped at the top and the right. It is not +<p>By default, the image is cropped at the top and the right. It is not cropped at the left or bottom so that the text begins at the same position relative to the origin. The size of the default left and bottom margins is explained below. @@ -119,7 +120,7 @@ It is the same as <kbd>-leftmargin=0 -rightmargin=0 -topmargin=0 <p>You cannot specify any other margin-affecting options with <b>-crop</b>. -<P>The default top margin, when you specify neither <b>-ascent</b>, +<p>The default top margin, when you specify neither <b>-ascent</b>, <b>-topmargin</b>, nor <b>-pad</b>, is as if you specified <b>topmargin=0</b>. @@ -127,29 +128,34 @@ It is the same as <kbd>-leftmargin=0 -rightmargin=0 -topmargin=0 <b>-bottommargin</b>, nor <b>-pad</b>, is as if you specified <b>-descent=</b><i>1.5*fontsize</i>. -<P>The default left margin, when you do not specify <b>-leftmargin</b>, is +<p>The default left margin, when you do not specify <b>-leftmargin</b>, is as if you specified <b>-leftmargin=</b><i>0.5*fontsize</i>. -<P>The default right margin, when you do not specify <b>-rightmargin</b>, +<p>The default right margin, when you do not specify <b>-rightmargin</b>, is as if you specified <b>-rightmargin=0</b>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtextps</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-font=</B><i>fontname</i> -<DD> -<P>This specifies the font to use. <i>fontname</i> is the name of any valid +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-font=</b><i>fontname</i> +<dd> +<p>This specifies the font to use. <i>fontname</i> is the name of any valid postscript font which is installed on the system. <p>The default is <b>TimesRoman</b>. -<P><strong>Warning:</strong> if <i>fontname</i> does not name a valid font, +<p><strong>Warning:</strong> if <i>fontname</i> does not name a valid font, <b>pbmtextps</b> just uses the default font. It does not tell you it is doing this. -<DT><B>-fontsize=</B><i>float</i> -<DD> +<dt><b>-fontsize=</b><i>float</i> +<dd> This is the size of the font in points. See the <b>-resolution</b> option for information on how to interpret this size. @@ -157,8 +163,8 @@ information on how to interpret this size. <p>Before Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016), this has to be a whole number. -<DT><B>-resolution=</B><i>n</i> -<DD> +<dt><b>-resolution=</b><i>n</i> +<dd> This is the resolution in dots per inch of distance measurements pertaining to generation of the image. PBM images don't have any inherent resolution, so a distance such as "1 inch" doesn't mean anything unless you separately specify @@ -180,7 +186,7 @@ edge of the type. See <a href="#margins">Margins</a> for details. <p>All sizes are in points, as a floating point number. -<P>These options were new in Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016). +<p>These options were new in Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016). <dt><b>-ascent=</b><i>n</i> <dt><b>-descent=</b><i>n</i> @@ -190,7 +196,7 @@ the text baseline. See <a href="#margins">Margins</a> for details. <p>Sizes are in points, as a floating point number. -<P>These options were new in Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016). +<p>These options were new in Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016). <dt><b>-pad</b> <dd> @@ -198,7 +204,7 @@ This pads the image on the top and bottom to the where the highest and lowest characters in the font would reach, even if you don't have those characters in your text. See <a href="#margins">Margins</a> for details. -<P>This option was new in Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016). +<p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016). <dt><b>-crop</b> <dd> @@ -206,10 +212,10 @@ This makes the program crop all sides to the far edge of the type. It is the same as <kbd>-leftmargin=0 -rightmargin=0 -topmargin=0 -bottommargin=0</kbd>. See <a href="#margins">Margins</a> for details. -<P>This option was new in Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016). +<p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016). -<DT><B>-stroke=</B><i>n</i> -<DD> +<dt><b>-stroke=</b><i>n</i> +<dd> This is the width of line, in points, to use for stroke font. There is no default stroke width because the characters are solid by default. @@ -225,49 +231,49 @@ program it would use to create the image, rather than the image itself. You can use this as input to a Postscript interpreter (such as Ghostscript or a a printer) or to understand the program better. -<P>This option was new in Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016). +<p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.75 (June 2016). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="usage">USAGE</H2> +<h2 id="usage">USAGE</h2> You can generate antialiased text by using a larger resolution than the default and scaling the image down using <b>pamscale</b>. -<P>See the manual for the similar <B>pbmtext</B> for more advice on +<p>See the manual for the similar <b>pbmtext</b> for more advice on usage. -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pbmtextps</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.0 (June 2002). -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pbmtext.html">pbmtext</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmcrop.html">pnmcrop</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmrotate.html">pnmrotate</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamscale.html">pamscale</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmlabel.html">ppmlabel</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B> +<b><a href="pbmtext.html">pbmtext</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmcrop.html">pnmcrop</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmrotate.html">pnmrotate</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmlabel.html">ppmlabel</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 2002 by James McCann -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#usage">USAGE</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#usage">USAGE</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtocis.html b/pbmtocis.html index ebed2807..62d482b3 100644 --- a/pbmtocis.html +++ b/pbmtocis.html @@ -1,22 +1,22 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtocis User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtocis</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtocis User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtocis</h1> Updated: 05 July 2009 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtocis - convert a PBM image to a CompuServe RLE image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtocis</B> +<b>pbmtocis</b> [<b>-i</b>] [<b>-w</b>] -[<I>cisfile</I>] +[<i>cisfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -25,6 +25,11 @@ RLE image as output. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtocis</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-i</b> @@ -37,29 +42,29 @@ pad with white pixels rather than black. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="cistopbm.html">cistopbm</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<a href="cistopbm.html">cistopbm</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a>, <a href="http://staticweb.rasip.fer.hr/research/compress/algorithms_run-length_coding.htm#examples">CompuServe RLE file format</a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pbmtocis</b> was new in Netpbm 10.48 (September 2009). -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 2009 John Elliot <jce@seasip.demon.co.uk> -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtog3.html b/pbmtog3.html index ee2bd6bc..dc53eccb 100644 --- a/pbmtog3.html +++ b/pbmtog3.html @@ -1,24 +1,23 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtog3 User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtog3</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtog3 User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtog3</h1> Updated: 20 April 2017 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtog3 - convert a PBM image into a Group 3 MH fax file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtog3</B> +<b>pbmtog3</b> [<b>-reversebits</b>] [<b>-nofixedwidth</b>] [<b>-align8</b>|<b>-align16</b>] -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -28,11 +27,16 @@ file as output. <p>You can also generate a TIFF file that uses the same encoding inside, with <b>pamtotiff</b>. -<P>There is no program in Netpbm that generates other fax formats, +<p>There is no program in Netpbm that generates other fax formats, such as MR and MMR, but <b>pamtotiff</b> can generate TIFF files that use those encodings. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtog3</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> <dt><b>-reversebits</b> @@ -66,19 +70,18 @@ You cannot specify both. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="g3topbm.html">g3topbm</A>, -<A HREF="pamtotiff.html">pamtotiff</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> -<A HREF="faxformat.html">fax formats</A> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> +<a href="g3topbm.html">g3topbm</a>, +<a href="pamtotiff.html">pamtotiff</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a>, +<a href="faxformat.html">fax formats</a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p>Before Netpbm 10.79 (June 2017), there was a different program by the same name in Netpbm, which was written by by Paul Haeberli -<<A HREF="mailto:paul@manray.sgi.com">paul@manray.sgi.com</A>> in 1989 +<<a href="mailto:paul@manray.sgi.com">paul@manray.sgi.com</a>> in 1989 and then modified extensively by others. <p>Akira Urushibata <afu@wta.att.ne.jp> wrote the current version, with @@ -87,14 +90,14 @@ public domain. <p>The current program is backward compatible with the pre-10.79 version. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#references">REFERENCES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtoibm23xx.html b/pbmtoibm23xx.html index 753ad5f0..71e49efe 100644 --- a/pbmtoibm23xx.html +++ b/pbmtoibm23xx.html @@ -1,27 +1,26 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtoibm23xx User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtoibm23xx</H1> -Updated: October 16, 2004 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtoibm23xx User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtoibm23xx</h1> +Updated: 16 October 2004 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtoibm23xx - convert a PBM image to IBM 23XX printer stream -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtoibm23xxx</B> +<b>pbmtoibm23xxx</b> [<b>-xres=</b><i>dpi</i>] [<b>-yres=</b><i>dpi</i>] -[<I>pbmfile</I> ...] +[<i>pbmfile</i> ...] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -32,7 +31,12 @@ all the files to Standard Output. <p>If you don't specify any file names, <b>pbmtoibm23xx</b> reads from Standard Input. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtoibm23xx</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> <dt><b>-xres=</b><i>dpi</i> @@ -63,27 +67,27 @@ me know if you find any. <p><b>pbmtoibm23xx</b> was new in Netpbm 10.25 (October 2004). -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a>, Ghostscript (<b>gs</b>). -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Copyright (C) 2004 Jorrit Fahlke <jorrit@jorrit.de>. Copying policy: GNU GPL version 2 -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtolj.html b/pbmtolj.html index 97d0c274..08b85190 100644 --- a/pbmtolj.html +++ b/pbmtolj.html @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtolj User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtolj</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtolj User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtolj</h1> Updated: 23 April 2005 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtolj - convert a PBM image to HP LaserJet format -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtolj</B> -[<B>-resolution</B> <I>N</I>] -[<B>-float</B>] -[<B>-noreset</B>] -[<B>-packbits</B>] -[<B>-delta</B>] -[<B>-compress</B>] -[<I>pbmfile</I>] -[<B>-copies</B> <I>N</I>] +<b>pbmtolj</b> +[<b>-resolution</b> <i>N</i>] +[<b>-float</b>] +[<b>-noreset</b>] +[<b>-packbits</b>] +[<b>-delta</b>] +[<b>-compress</b>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] +[<b>-copies</b> <i>N</i>] -<P>You can abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. +<p>You can abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -47,49 +47,54 @@ after the first one are ignored. <p>Note that there is no ljtopbm tool. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-resolution</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtolj</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Specifies the resolution of the output device, in dpi. Another +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-resolution</b> + +<dd>Specifies the resolution of the output device, in dpi. Another way to look at this is as a declaration of the resolution of the input image (PBM images don't have inherent resolution). Typical values are 75, 100, 150, 300, and 600. The default is 75. -<DT><B>-float</B> +<dt><b>-float</b> -<DD>Suppresses positioning commands. By default, <b>pbmtolj</b> -places the sequence <I>ESC & l 0 E</I> in the output, which means +<dd>Suppresses positioning commands. By default, <b>pbmtolj</b> +places the sequence <i>ESC & l 0 E</i> in the output, which means to force the top margin to zero. With <b>-float</b>, <b>pbmtolj</b> omits that command. -<DT><B>-noreset</B> +<dt><b>-noreset</b> -<DD>Prevents pbmtolj from writing the reset sequences to the beginning +<dd>Prevents pbmtolj from writing the reset sequences to the beginning and end of the output file. -<DT><B>-packbits</B> +<dt><b>-packbits</b> -<DD>Enables use of TIFF packbits compression. +<dd>Enables use of TIFF packbits compression. -<DT><B>-delta</B> +<dt><b>-delta</b> -<DD>Enables use of delta-between-rows compression. +<dd>Enables use of delta-between-rows compression. -<DT><B>-compress</B> +<dt><b>-compress</b> -<DD>Enables use of both TIFF packbits, and delta-between-rows compression. +<dd>Enables use of both TIFF packbits, and delta-between-rows compression. -<DT><B>-copies</B> +<dt><b>-copies</b> -<DD>Specifies the number of copies. The default is 1. This option +<dd>Specifies the number of copies. The default is 1. This option controls the "number of copies" printer control; -<B>pbmtolj</B> generates only one copy of the image. +<b>pbmtolj</b> generates only one copy of the image. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> <a href="pnmtopclxl.html"><b>pnmtopclxl</b></a>, <a href="ppmtolj.html"><b>ppmtolj</b></a>, @@ -97,23 +102,23 @@ controls the "number of copies" printer control; <a href="ppmtopj.html"><b>ppmtopj</b></a>, <a href="ppmtopjxl.html"><b>ppmtopjxl</b></a>, <a href="thinkjettopbm.html"><b>thinkjettopbm</b></a>, -<a href="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988 by Jef Poskanzer and Michael Haberler. -<B>-float</B> and <B>-noreset</B> options added by Wim Lewis. -<B>-delta</b>, <b>-packbits</B>, and <B>-compress</B> options added by +<b>-float</b> and <b>-noreset</b> options added by Wim Lewis. +<b>-delta</b>, <b>-packbits</b>, and <b>-compress</b> options added by Dave Platt. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtomacp.html b/pbmtomacp.html index a685fde8..f68a9f2b 100644 --- a/pbmtomacp.html +++ b/pbmtomacp.html @@ -1,35 +1,34 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtomacp User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtomacp</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtomacp User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtomacp</h1> Updated: 26 April 2015 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtomacp - convert a PBM image to a MacPaint file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtomacp</B> -[<B>-left</B> <I>left</I>] +<b>pbmtomacp</b> +[<b>-left</b> <i>left</i>] -[<B>-right</B> <I>right</I>] +[<b>-right</b> <i>right</i>] -[<B>-top</B> <I>top</I>] +[<b>-top</b> <i>top</i>] -[<B>-bottom</B> <I>bottom</I>] +[<b>-bottom</b> <i>bottom</i>] -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or equals signs between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -38,13 +37,18 @@ file as output. <p>If you do not specify <i>pbmfile</i>, <b>pbmtomacp</b> uses Standard Input. -<P> The generated file is only the data fork of a picture. You will -need a program such as <B>mcvert</B> to generate a Macbinary or a +<p> The generated file is only the data fork of a picture. You will +need a program such as <b>mcvert</b> to generate a Macbinary or a BinHex file that contains the necessary information to identify the file as a PNTG file to MacOS. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtomacp</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> @@ -78,34 +82,32 @@ more flexibly by processing the input through <b>pamcut</b>. </dl> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="macptopbm.html">macptopbm</A>, -<A HREF="ppmtopict.html">ppmtopict</A>, -<A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A>, +<a href="macptopbm.html">macptopbm</a>, +<a href="ppmtopict.html">ppmtopict</a>, +<a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a>, <b>mcvert</b> documentation - -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pbmtomacp</b> was added to Netpbm in 1988, written by Douwe van der Schaaf (...!mcvax!uvapsy!vdschaaf). -<p>In 2015, Akira Urushibata ("Douso") replaced the program with -the current version, using different logic and none of the original code. -The new version used the "packed PBM" facilities of the Netpbm -library and the shhopt method of command line parsing. - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p>In 2015, Akira Urushibata replaced the program with the current +version, using different logic and none of the original code. The new +version used the "packed PBM" facilities of the Netpbm library and the +shhopt method of command line parsing. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtonokia.html b/pbmtonokia.html index 67428181..ad71b936 100644 --- a/pbmtonokia.html +++ b/pbmtonokia.html @@ -1,113 +1,117 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtonokia User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtonokia</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtonokia User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtonokia</h1> Updated: 14 September 2006 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtonokia - convert a PBM image to Nokia Smart Messaging Formats -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtonokia</b> +<b>pbmtonokia</b> [ <b>-fmt</b> { - <B>HEX_NOL</B>, - <B>HEX_NGG</B>, - <B>HEX_NPM</B>, - <B>NOL</B>, - <B>NGG</B>, - <B>NPM</B> + <b>HEX_NOL</b>, + <b>HEX_NGG</b>, + <b>HEX_NPM</b>, + <b>NOL</b>, + <b>NGG</b>, + <b>NPM</b> } ] <br> -[<B>-net</b> <i>networkcode</i>] +[<b>-net</b> <i>networkcode</i>] [<b>-txt</b> <i>text</i>] -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmtonokia</b> reads a PBM image as input and produces a Nokia Smart Messaging (hexcode, .ngg, .nol, .npm) file as output. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-fmt</B> -<DD> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtonokia</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-fmt</b> +<dd> Specifies the output format (default is HEX_NOL). <dl> -<DT><b>HEX_NOL</b> -<DD> +<dt><b>HEX_NOL</b> +<dd> Nokia Operator Logo as (uploadable) hexcode. Use option -net to specify network code. -<DT><b>HEX_NGG</b> -<DD> +<dt><b>HEX_NGG</b> +<dd> Nokia Group Graphic as (uploadable) hexcode. -<DT><b>HEX_NPM</b> -<DD> +<dt><b>HEX_NPM</b> +<dd> Nokia Picture Message as (uploadable) hexcode. Use option <b>-txt</b> to specify an optional text message. -<DT><b>NOL</b> -<DD>Nokia Operator Logo as .nol format. This is editable by -the Group-Graphic Editor from Kessler Wireless Design (<A -HREF="http://www.kessler-design.com">www.kessler-design.com</A>) +<dt><b>NOL</b> +<dd>Nokia Operator Logo as .nol format. This is editable by +the Group-Graphic Editor from Kessler Wireless Design (<a +href="http://www.kessler-design.com">www.kessler-design.com</a>) -<DT><b>NGG</b> +<dt><b>NGG</b> -<DD>Nokia Group Graphic as .ngg format. This is editable by the -Group-Graphic Editor from Kessler Wireless Design (<A -HREF="http://www.kessler-design.com">www.kessler-design.com</A>) +<dd>Nokia Group Graphic as .ngg format. This is editable by the +Group-Graphic Editor from Kessler Wireless Design (<a +href="http://www.kessler-design.com">www.kessler-design.com</a>) -<DT><b>NPM</b> +<dt><b>NPM</b> -<DD>Nokia Picture Message as .npm format. This is editable by the -Picture-Message Editor from Kessler Wireless Design (<A -HREF="http://www.kessler-design.com">www.kessler-design.com</A>) +<dd>Nokia Picture Message as .npm format. This is editable by the +Picture-Message Editor from Kessler Wireless Design (<a +href="http://www.kessler-design.com">www.kessler-design.com</a>) <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.36 (October 2006). </dl> -<DT><B>-net</B> +<dt><b>-net</b> -<DD>Specifies the 6 hex-digit operator network code for Operator +<dd>Specifies the 6 hex-digit operator network code for Operator Logos (Default is 62F210 = D1,Germany). -<DT><B>-txt</B> +<dt><b>-txt</b> -<DD> +<dd> Specifies the text message for Picture Messages. The maximum size text message allowed by the format is 120 characters. <p>Default is no text message. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> This program currently accepts all PBM images with up to 255 rows or up to 255 columns. (Valid Nokia Group Graphics or Operator Logos can be 72 columns by 14 rows and 78 columns by 21 rows; valid Nokia Picture Messages are 72 columns by 28 rows.) This program generates black and white graphics, not animated. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> <ul> -<li><B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, +<li><b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, -<li>Nokia Smart Messaging Specification (<A -HREF="http://forum.nokia.com">http://forum.nokia.com</A>) +<li>Nokia Smart Messaging Specification (<a +href="http://forum.nokia.com">http://forum.nokia.com</a>) <li><a href="http://www.kessler-design.com/wireless/samples.html"> http://www.kessler-design.com/wireless/samples.html</a> @@ -116,20 +120,20 @@ http://www.kessler-design.com/wireless/samples.html</a> </ul> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> - -Copyright (C) 2001 Tim Ruehsen <<A -HREF="mailto:tim.ruehsen@openmediasystem.de">tim.ruehsen@openmediasystem.de</A>>. - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Copyright (C) 2001 Tim Ruehsen <<a +href="mailto:tim.ruehsen@openmediasystem.de">tim.ruehsen@openmediasystem.de</a>>. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtoppa.html b/pbmtoppa.html index c4ec7d92..5a7d4121 100644 --- a/pbmtoppa.html +++ b/pbmtoppa.html @@ -1,57 +1,57 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtoppa User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtoppa</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtoppa User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtoppa</h1> Updated: 01 May 2005 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtoppa - convert PBM image to HP Printer Performance Architecture (PPA) -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtoppa</B> -[<I>pbm_file</I> -[<I>ppa_file</I>]] +<b>pbmtoppa</b> +[<i>pbm_file</i> +[<i>ppa_file</i>]] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<B>pbmtoppa</B> converts page images in PBM format to Hewlett +<b>pbmtoppa</b> converts page images in PBM format to Hewlett Packard's PPA (Printer Performance Architecture) format, which is the data stream format expected by some HP "Windows-only" printers including the HP Deskjet 820C series, the HP DeskJet 720 series, and the HP DeskJet 1000 series. -<P><I>pbm_file</I> is the file specification of the input file or -<B>-</B> for Standard Input. The default is Standard Input. +<p><i>pbm_file</i> is the file specification of the input file or +<b>-</b> for Standard Input. The default is Standard Input. -<P>The input file contains one or more PBM images, with each one +<p>The input file contains one or more PBM images, with each one being a single page. Each image must have the exact dimensions of a page (at 600 pixels per inch in both directions). Significantly, this is the format that Ghostscript produces. -<P><I>ppa_file</I> is the file specification of the output file or -<B>-</B> for Standard Output. The default is Standard Output. +<p><i>ppa_file</i> is the file specification of the output file or +<b>-</b> for Standard Output. The default is Standard Output. -<P>To print Postscript on an HP PPA printer, just use Ghostscript with -the <B>pbmraw</B> (or <B>pbm</B>) device driver. +<p>To print Postscript on an HP PPA printer, just use Ghostscript with +the <b>pbmraw</b> (or <b>pbm</b>) device driver. -<P>You can generate a test page for use with this program with -<B>pbmpage</B>. +<p>You can generate a test page for use with this program with +<b>pbmpage</b>. -<P>You can also set up a printer filter so you can submit PBM input +<p>You can also set up a printer filter so you can submit PBM input directly to your print queue. See the documentation for your print spooler for information on how to do that, or look in hp820install.doc for an example lpd print filter for Postscript and text files. -<P>Sometimes, <B>pbmtoppa</B> generates a file which the printer will -not print (because <B>pbmtoppa</B>'s input is unprintable). When this +<p>Sometimes, <b>pbmtoppa</b> generates a file which the printer will +not print (because <b>pbmtoppa</b>'s input is unprintable). When this happens, all three lights blink to signal the error. This is usually because there is material outside of the printer's printable area. To -make the file print, increase the margins via <B>pbmtoppa</B> options +make the file print, increase the margins via <b>pbmtoppa</b> options or a configuration file. See <a href="#calibration">the section on calibration </a> below. @@ -74,171 +74,176 @@ reduced compared to a conventional printer. (Printer Control Language) language. HP manufactured PPA printers for only a few years, and no one else ever did. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-v</B> <I>version</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtoppa</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-v</b> <i>version</i> + +<dd> printer version (720, 820, or 1000) -<DT><B>-x</B> <I>xoff</I> +<dt><b>-x</b> <i>xoff</i> -<DD> +<dd> horizontal offset adjustment in 1/600 inches. -<DT><B>-y</B> <I>yoff</I> +<dt><b>-y</b> <i>yoff</i> -<DD> +<dd> vertical offset adjustment in 1/600 inches. -<DT><B>-t</B> <I>topmarg</I> +<dt><b>-t</b> <i>topmarg</i> -<DD> +<dd> top margin in 1/600 inches (default: 150 = 0.25 inch) -<DT><B>-l</B> <I>leftmarg</I> +<dt><b>-l</b> <i>leftmarg</i> -<DD> +<dd> left margin in 1/600 inches (default: 150 = 0.25 inch) -<DT><B>-r</B> <I>rightmarg</I> +<dt><b>-r</b> <i>rightmarg</i> -<DD> +<dd> right margin in 1/600 inches (default: 150 = 0.25 inch) -<DT><B>-b</B> <I>botmarg</I> +<dt><b>-b</b> <i>botmarg</i> -<DD> +<dd> bottom margin in 1/600 inches (default: 150 = 0.25 inch) -<DT><B>-s</B> <I>paper</I> +<dt><b>-s</b> <i>paper</i> -<DD>paper size: <B>us</B> or <B>a4</B>. Default is <B>us</B>. +<dd>paper size: <b>us</b> or <b>a4</b>. Default is <b>us</b>. <dt><b>-d</b> <i>dpi</i> <dd> Print resolution in dots per inch. -<DT><B>-f</B> <I>cfgfile</I> +<dt><b>-f</b> <i>cfgfile</i> -<DD>Read parameters from the configuration file named <I>cfgfile</I>. +<dd>Read parameters from the configuration file named <i>cfgfile</i>. See <a href="#configfile">CONFIGURATION FILES</a> -</DL> +</dl> -<P>The offset adjustments you specify with <B>-x</B> and <B>-y</B> +<p>The offset adjustments you specify with <b>-x</b> and <b>-y</b> accumulate. I.e. if you specify them multiple times, the total offset adjustment is the sum of the adjustments you specify. <b>-x 60 -x 120</b> is the same as <b>-x 180</b>. -<P>The <B>-v</B> option undoes any preceding <b>-x</b> and <b>-y</b> +<p>The <b>-v</b> option undoes any preceding <b>-x</b> and <b>-y</b> options, leaving the horizontal and vertical adjustments their default values. -<H2 id="configfile">CONFIGURATION FILES</H2> +<h2 id="configfile">CONFIGURATION FILES</h2> -<P>You can use a configuration file to specify parameters rather than -use invocation options. <B>pbmtoppa</B> processes the file +<p>You can use a configuration file to specify parameters rather than +use invocation options. <b>pbmtoppa</b> processes the file <b>/etc/pbmtoppa.conf</b>, if it exists, before processing any options. It then processes each configuration file named by a -<B>-f</B> option in order, applying the parameters from the +<b>-f</b> option in order, applying the parameters from the configuration file as if they were invocation options used in the -place of the <B>-f</B> option. +place of the <b>-f</b> option. -<P>Configuration files have the following format: +<p>Configuration files have the following format: -<PRE> -<B>#</B><I>Comment</I> -<I>key1</I> <I>value1</I> -<I>key2</I> <I>value2</I> +<pre> +<b>#</b><i>Comment</i> +<i>key1</i> <i>value1</i> +<i>key2</i> <i>value2</i> [etc.] -</PRE> +</pre> -<P>Valid <I>key</I>s are <B>version</B>, <B>xoffset</B>, -<B>yoffset</B>, <B>topmargin</B>, <B>leftmargin</B>, -<B>rightmargin</B>, <B>bottommargin</B>, <B>papersize</B>, or any +<p>Valid <i>key</i>s are <b>version</b>, <b>xoffset</b>, +<b>yoffset</b>, <b>topmargin</b>, <b>leftmargin</b>, +<b>rightmargin</b>, <b>bottommargin</b>, <b>papersize</b>, or any non-null prefix of these words. Valid values are the same as with the corresponding invocation parameters. -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> -<P>Print a test pattern: -<PRE> -<B>pbmpage | pbmppa >/dev/lp1</B> +<p>Print a test pattern: +<pre> +<b>pbmpage | pbmppa >/dev/lp1</b> </pre> -<P> +<p> Print three pages: -<PRE> -<B>cat page1.pbm page2.pbm page3.pbm | pbmppa >/dev/lp1</B> +<pre> +<b>cat page1.pbm page2.pbm page3.pbm | pbmppa >/dev/lp1</b> </pre> -<P> +<p> Print the Postscript file myfile.ps: -<PRE> +<pre> gs -sDEVICE=rawpbm -q -dNOPAUSE -r600 \ -sOutputFile=- myfile.ps ;\ | pbmtoppa | lpr </pre> -<H2 id="calibration">CALIBRATION</H2> +<h2 id="calibration">CALIBRATION</h2> <p>To be able to print successfully and properly, you need to tell -<B>pbmtoppa</B> an X and a Y offset appropriate for your printer to +<b>pbmtoppa</b> an X and a Y offset appropriate for your printer to use when generating the page. You can specify these offsets with the -<B>-x</B> and <B>-y</B> invocation options or with the <B>xoff</B> and -<B>yoff</B> parameters in a <B>pbmtoppa</B> configuration file. +<b>-x</b> and <b>-y</b> invocation options or with the <b>xoff</b> and +<b>yoff</b> parameters in a <b>pbmtoppa</b> configuration file. -<P>To determine the correct offsets, use the <B>pbmpage</B> program. +<p>To determine the correct offsets, use the <b>pbmpage</b> program. -<P>If while trying to do this calibration, the printer refuses to +<p>If while trying to do this calibration, the printer refuses to print a page, but just blinks all three lights, specify large margins -(e.g. 600 pixels -- one inch) via <B>pbmpage</B> invocation options +(e.g. 600 pixels -- one inch) via <b>pbmpage</b> invocation options while doing the calibration. -<P>For example: -<PRE> -<B>pbmpage | pbmtoppa >/dev/lp1</B> +<p>For example: +<pre> +<b>pbmpage | pbmtoppa >/dev/lp1</b> </pre> or <pre> -<B>pbmpage | pbmtoppa | lpr -l</B> +<b>pbmpage | pbmtoppa | lpr -l</b> </pre> (if your printer filter recognizes the '-l' (direct output) parameter). -<P>In the test pattern, the grid is marked off in pixel coordinate +<p>In the test pattern, the grid is marked off in pixel coordinate numbers. Unfortunately, these coordinates are probably cut off before the edge of the paper. You'll have to use a ruler to estimate the pixel coordinate of the left and top edges of the actual sheet of paper (should be within +/- 300, may be negative; there are 600 pixels per inch). -<P>Add these coordinates to the X and Y offsets by either editing the -configuration file or using the <B>-x </B> and <B>-y</B> command-line +<p>Add these coordinates to the X and Y offsets by either editing the +configuration file or using the <b>-x </b> and <b>-y</b> command-line parameters. -<P>When <B>pbmtoppa</B> is properly calibrated, the center mark should +<p>When <b>pbmtoppa</b> is properly calibrated, the center mark should be in the center of the paper. Also, the margins should be able to be as small as 1/4 inch without causing the printer to choke with 'blinking lights syndrome'. -<H2 id="redhat">RED HAT LINUX INSTALLATION</H2> +<h2 id="redhat">RED HAT LINUX INSTALLATION</h2> -<P>RedHat users may find the following tip from Panayotis Vryonis -<<A HREF="mailto:vrypan@hol.gr">vrypan@hol.gr</A>> helpful. The +<p>RedHat users may find the following tip from Panayotis Vryonis +<<a href="mailto:vrypan@hol.gr">vrypan@hol.gr</a>> helpful. The same should work for the 820 and 1000, but it hasn't been tested. Also, use the pbmraw GSDriver if you have it; it's faster. -<P>Here is a tip to integrate HP720C support in RedHat's printtool: +<p>Here is a tip to integrate HP720C support in RedHat's printtool: -<P>Install pbmtoppa. Copy pbmtoppa to /usr/bin. +<p>Install pbmtoppa. Copy pbmtoppa to /usr/bin. -<P>Edit "printerdb" (in my system it is found in +<p>Edit "printerdb" (in my system it is found in /usr/lib/rhs/rhs-printfilters ) and append the following lines: -<PRE> +<pre> <code> ----------------------Cut here----------------------- @@ -262,45 +267,45 @@ EndEntry </code> </pre> -<P>Now you can add an HP720C printer just like any other, using +<p>Now you can add an HP720C printer just like any other, using printtool. -<H2 id="seealos">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pbmpage.html">pbmpage</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B> +<b><a href="pbmpage.html">pbmpage</a></b>, +<b><a href="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b> -<P>This program was derived from <B>pbm2ppa</B>. <B>pbm2ppa</B> is obsolete -and has been replaced by <B>pnm2ppa</B>, which does the same things as -<B>pbmtoppa</B> except it also works with color and has lots more features. See -<A HREF="http://pnm2ppa.sourceforge.net">http://pnm2ppa.sourceforge.net</A> +<p>This program was derived from <b>pbm2ppa</b>. <b>pbm2ppa</b> is obsolete +and has been replaced by <b>pnm2ppa</b>, which does the same things as +<b>pbmtoppa</b> except it also works with color and has lots more features. See +<a href="http://pnm2ppa.sourceforge.net">http://pnm2ppa.sourceforge.net</a> for more information about the PPA protocol and the separately distributed -<B>pnm2ppa</B> program. +<b>pnm2ppa</b> program. -<P>The file INSTALL-MORE in the pbmtoppa directory of the Netpbm +<p>The file INSTALL-MORE in the pbmtoppa directory of the Netpbm source code contains detailed instructions on setting up a system to use pbmtoppa to allow convenient printing on HP PPA printers. It was written by Michael Buehlmann. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Tim Norman. Copyright (C) 1998. Licensed under GNU Public License -<P>Manual page by Bryan Henderson, May 2000. - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#configfile">CONFIGURATION FILES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#calibration">CALIBRATION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#redhat">REDHAT LINUX INSTALLATION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p>Manual page by Bryan Henderson, May 2000. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#configfile">CONFIGURATION FILES</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#calibration">CALIBRATION</a> +<li><a href="#redhat">RED HAT LINUX INSTALLATION</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtopsg3.html b/pbmtopsg3.html index 08c5fb2c..51cd3b3b 100644 --- a/pbmtopsg3.html +++ b/pbmtopsg3.html @@ -1,35 +1,36 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtopsg3 User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtopsg3</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtopsg3 User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtopsg3</h1> Updated: 12 March 2017 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtopsg3 - convert PBM images to Postscript with G3 fax compression -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtopsg3</B> -[<B>--title=</B><I>title</I>] -[<B>--dpi=</B><I>dpi</I>] -[<I>filespec</I>] +<b>pbmtopsg3</b> +[<b>--title=</b><i>title</i>] +[<b>--dpi=</b><i>dpi</i>] +[<i>filespec</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pbmtopsg3</b> converts the PBM images in the input PBM file to +<p><b>pbmtopsg3</b> converts the PBM images in the input PBM file to pages in a Postscript file encoded with G3 fax compression. <p><b>pnmtops</b> is a more general program for converting from the Netpbm formats to Postscript, though it cannot produce the particular subformat that <b>pbmtopsg3</b> does. -<P>If you don't specify <I>filespec</I>, the input is from Standard +<p>If you don't specify <i>filespec</i>, the input is from Standard Input. -<P>Remember that you can create a multi-image PBM file simply by +<p>Remember that you can create a multi-image PBM file simply by concatenating single-image PBM files, so if each page is in a different file, you might do: @@ -37,38 +38,43 @@ different file, you might do: cat faxpage* | pbmtopsg3 >fax.ps </pre> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> - -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-title</B> - -<DD>The Postscript title value. Default is no title. - -<DT><B>-dpi</B> - -<DD>The resolution of the Postscript output. Default is 72 dpi. - -</DL> - -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pnmtops.html">pnmtops</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</A></B>, -<B>gs</b>, -<B><A HREF="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtolps.html">pbmtolps</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtoepsi.html">pbmtoepsi</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtog3.html">pbmtog3</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="g3topbm.html">g3topbm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B> - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtopsg3</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-title</b> + +<dd>The Postscript title value. Default is no title. + +<dt><b>-dpi</b> + +<dd>The resolution of the Postscript output. Default is 72 dpi. + +</dl> + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pnmtops.html">pnmtops</a></b>, +<b><a href="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</a></b>, +<b>gs</b>, +<b><a href="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmtolps.html">pbmtolps</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmtoepsi.html">pbmtoepsi</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmtog3.html">pbmtog3</a></b>, +<b><a href="g3topbm.html">g3topbm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, +<b><a href="faxformat.html">fax formats</a></b> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtoxbm.html b/pbmtoxbm.html index 53207b71..3463c67f 100644 --- a/pbmtoxbm.html +++ b/pbmtoxbm.html @@ -1,32 +1,36 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtoxbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtoxbm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pbmtoxbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtoxbm</h1> Updated: 25 October 2006 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtoxbm - convert a PBM image to an X11 bitmap -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtoxbm</B> +<b>pbmtoxbm</b> [{<b>-x10</b>|<b>-x11</b>}] -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <b>pbmtoxbm</b> reads a PBM image as input and produces an X10 or X11 bitmap as output. - <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtoxbm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-x10</b> @@ -51,23 +55,24 @@ XBM. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pbmtox10bm.html">pbmtox10bm</A>, -<A HREF="xbmtopbm.html">xbmtopbm</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<a href="pbmtox10bm.html">pbmtox10bm</a>, +<a href="xbmtopbm.html">xbmtopbm</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pdbimgtopam.html b/pdbimgtopam.html index 8c397286..97767b0b 100644 --- a/pdbimgtopam.html +++ b/pdbimgtopam.html @@ -1,60 +1,63 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pdbimgtopam User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pdbimgtopam</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pdbimgtopam User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pdbimgtopam</h1> Updated: 25 September 2010 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pdbimgtopam - convert a Palm Pilot Image Viewer PDB Image to a PAM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pdbimgtopam</B> +<b>pdbimgtopam</b> [<b>-notefile=</b><i>filename</i>] [<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>pdbimgfile</I>] +[<i>pdbimgfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pdbimgtopam</b> reads a Palm Pilot Image Viewer image (and Image record in a PDB file) as input, from Standard Input or -<I>palmfile</I>, and produces a PAM image as output. +<i>palmfile</i>, and produces a PAM image as output. <p>If the Pilot image is monochrome, the PAM output has maxval 1. Otherwise, it has maxval 255. Note that Pilot images are always monochrome. The PAM image has tuple type GRAYSCALE. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pdbimgtopam</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD> +<dd> Display various interesting information about the input file and process. -<DT><B>-notefile=</B><i>filename</i> +<dt><b>-notefile=</b><i>filename</i> -<DD> +<dd> Write the image note (if any) to the specified file. <p> If you don't specify this, <b>pdbimgtopam</b> ignores any image note. -</DL> - -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +</dl> -<B><A HREF="pamtopdbimg.html">pamtopdbimg</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmtopalm.html">pnmtopalm</A></B>, +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A>, +<b><a href="pamtopdbimg.html">pamtopdbimg</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmtopalm.html">pnmtopalm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -63,14 +66,14 @@ It was modelled after Eric A. Howe's <b>imgvtopbm</b> package, which dates back to September 1997. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pfmtopam.html b/pfmtopam.html index 5d9a06a6..adcdb44a 100644 --- a/pfmtopam.html +++ b/pfmtopam.html @@ -1,25 +1,25 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pfmtopam User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pfmtopam</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pfmtopam User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pfmtopam</h1> Updated: 10 April 2004 -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pfmtopam - Convert PFM (Portable Float Map) image to Netpbm format -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> -<B>pfmtopam</B> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> +<b>pfmtopam</b> [<b>-maxval=</b><i>n</i>] [<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>imagefile</I>] +[<i>imagefile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -40,40 +40,45 @@ subformat. image to Netpbm format. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-maxval=</b><i>n</i> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pfmtopam</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> - <P>This specifies the maxval for the PAM. Default is 255. +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-maxval=</b><i>n</i> -<DT><B>-verbose</b> +<dd> + <p>This specifies the maxval for the PAM. Default is 255. -<DD> - <P>This causes <b>pfmtopam</b> to display messages describing +<dt><b>-verbose</b> + +<dd> + <p>This causes <b>pfmtopam</b> to display messages describing the PFM input file. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamtopfm.html">pamtopfm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamtopfm.html">pamtopfm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pfmtopam</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.22 (April 2004). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pgmkernel.html b/pgmkernel.html index 763466b1..a05ffcfb 100644 --- a/pgmkernel.html +++ b/pgmkernel.html @@ -1,28 +1,27 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pgmkernel User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pgmkernel</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pgmkernel User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pgmkernel</h1> Updated: 19 December 2013 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pgmkernel - generate a convolution kernel -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <p> -<B>pgmkernel</B> -[<B>-weight=</B><I>number</I>] -[<b>-maxval=</b>] {<I>size</I> | <i>width</i> <i>height</i>} +<b>pgmkernel</b> +[<b>-weight=</b><i>number</i>] +[<b>-maxval=</b>] {<i>size</i> | <i>width</i> <i>height</i>} -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -30,7 +29,7 @@ space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. with <b>pnmconvol</b>. The kernel is one where the weight of each location is inversely proportional to its distance from the center of the kernel. -<p><b>pgmkernel</b> generates a PGM image of width and height <I>size</I> +<p><b>pgmkernel</b> generates a PGM image of width and height <i>size</i> if you specify one argument, or width <i>width</i> and height <i>height</i> if you specify two arguments. @@ -40,7 +39,7 @@ if you specify two arguments. K(i,j) = 1 / ( 1 + w * sqrt(i^2 + j^2)) </blockquote> -where <I>w</I> is a coefficient specified via the <b>-weight</b> +where <i>w</i> is a coefficient specified via the <b>-weight</b> option. <i>i</i> and <i>j</i> are measured in pixels. K is zero everywhere beyond the specified kernel width and height. @@ -49,7 +48,12 @@ the protocol <b>pnmconvol</b> specifies for representing the real numbers K in PGM. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pgmkernel</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> <dt><b>-weight=</b><i>number</i> @@ -71,9 +75,9 @@ maxval is always 255. </dl> -<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> -<P>The computation time is proportional to <I>width</I>*<I>height</I>. +<p>The computation time is proportional to <i>width</i>*<i>height</i>. This increases rapidly with the increase of the kernel size. A better approach could be using a FFT in these cases. @@ -89,30 +93,30 @@ the program never worked with negative numbers and it isn't clear that the result would be useful, so <b>-weight</b> is now required to be nonnegative and the program fails gracefully if you specify a negative value. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</A>, -<A HREF="pnmsmooth.html">pnmsmooth</A> -<A HREF="pamgauss.html">pamgauss</A> -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<a href="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</a>, +<a href="pnmsmooth.html">pnmsmooth</a> +<a href="pamgauss.html">pamgauss</a> +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Alberto Accomazzi (<A -HREF="mailto:alberto@cfa.harvard.edu">alberto@cfa.harvard.edu</A>). +Alberto Accomazzi (<a +href="mailto:alberto@cfa.harvard.edu">alberto@cfa.harvard.edu</a>). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pgmmake.html b/pgmmake.html index 001ef242..436ba571 100644 --- a/pgmmake.html +++ b/pgmmake.html @@ -1,40 +1,40 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><title>Pgmmake User Manual</title></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pgmmake</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pgmmake User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pgmmake</h1> Updated: 19 February 2006 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pgmmake - create a PGM image of a specified gray level and dimensions -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pgmmake</B> +<b>pgmmake</b> [<b>-maxval=</b><i>maxval</i>] -<I>graylevel</I> -<I>width</I> -<i>height</I> +<i>graylevel</i> +<i>width</i> +<i>height</i> -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or an equals sign between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>pgmmake</b> produces a PGM image of the specified gray level, width, +<p><b>pgmmake</b> produces a PGM image of the specified gray level, width, height, and maxval. -<P>Specify the gray level (<i>graylevel</i>) as a decimal floating point +<p>Specify the gray level (<i>graylevel</i>) as a decimal floating point number in the range [0, 1]. E.g. 1 is white, 0 is black, and 0.5 is half luminosity gray. -<h2 id="example">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="example">EXAMPLES</h2> <pre> pgmmake 1 50 50 @@ -44,19 +44,24 @@ half luminosity gray. </pre> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL> -<DT><b>-maxval=</b><i>maxval</i> -<DD> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pgmmake</b> recognizes the following +command line option: + +<dl> +<dt><b>-maxval=</b><i>maxval</i> +<dd> The maxval for the generated image. Default is 255. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pbmmake.html">pbmmake</A>, -<A HREF="ppmmake.html">ppmmake</A>, -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<a href="pbmmake.html">pbmmake</a>, +<a href="ppmmake.html">ppmmake</a>, +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -64,14 +69,15 @@ half luminosity gray. <p>With older Netpbm, use <b>ppmmake</b> and <b>ppmtopgm</b>. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#example">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#example">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pgmmedian.html b/pgmmedian.html index 9e38c112..e0f20b36 100644 --- a/pgmmedian.html +++ b/pgmmedian.html @@ -1,37 +1,35 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pgmmedian User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pgmmedian</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pgmmedian User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pgmmedian</h1> Updated: 28 August 2005 -<p> - -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pgmmedian - apply a median filter to a PGM file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pgmmedian</B> +<b>pgmmedian</b> [<b>-width=</b><i>n</i>] [<b>-height=</b><i>n</i>] -[<B>-type=</B><I>median_type</I>] +[<b>-type=</b><i>median_type</i>] -[<B>-cutoff=</B><I>int</I>] +[<b>-cutoff=</b><i>int</i>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -47,12 +45,17 @@ Such pixels typically show up as speckles. how <b>pgmmedian</b> chooses between the two methods. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pgmmedian</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-cutoff</b> <i>int</i> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-cutoff</b> <i>int</i> -<DD>This option provides the cutoff value that <b>pgmmedian</b> uses +<dd>This option provides the cutoff value that <b>pgmmedian</b> uses to decide between using the histogram sort or select kth value method to find the median. @@ -66,29 +69,29 @@ value. <p>The default is 250 -<DT><B>-width=</b><i>n</i> +<dt><b>-width=</b><i>n</i> -<DD>Width of the median mask to apply. +<dd>Width of the median mask to apply. <p>Default is 3. -<DT><B>-height=</b><i>n</i> +<dt><b>-height=</b><i>n</i> -<DD>Height of the median mask to apply. +<dd>Height of the median mask to apply. <p>Default is 3. -<DT><B>-type</b> <i>median_type</i> +<dt><b>-type</b> <i>median_type</i> -<DD>This option selects which method to use to find median regardless +<dd>This option selects which method to use to find median regardless of cutoff value. Choices are <b>histogram_sort</b> and <b>select</b>. <p>By default, <b>pgmmedian</b> decides which method to use as described under the <b>-cutoff</b> option. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="references">REFERENCES</H2> +<h2 id="references">REFERENCES</h2> <ul> @@ -105,37 +108,37 @@ Pitas, Prentice Hall, 1993 ISBN 0-13-145814-0 </ul> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pgmnoise.html">pgmnoise</A>, -<A HREF="pamaddnoise.html">pamaddnoise</A>, -<A HREF="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</A>, -<A HREF="pgmmorphconv.html">pgmmorphconv</A>, -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<a href="pgmnoise.html">pgmnoise</a>, +<a href="pamaddnoise.html">pamaddnoise</a>, +<a href="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</a>, +<a href="pgmmorphconv.html">pgmmorphconv</a>, +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><b>pgmmedian</b> was added to Netpbm in Version 10.29 (August 2005). +<p><b>pgmmedian</b> was added to Netpbm in Version 10.29 (August 2005). It had been distributed by Mike Burns via his own web site before that (and continued to be so). -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Copyright (C) 1996 by Mike Burns <<A -HREF="mailto:burns@cac.psu.edu">burns@cac.psu.edu</A>> +Copyright (C) 1996 by Mike Burns <<a +href="mailto:burns@cac.psu.edu">burns@cac.psu.edu</a>> -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#references">REFERENCES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#references">REFERENCES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> -</BODY> -</HTML> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pgmnoise.html b/pgmnoise.html index 8b262e8d..4e7f5030 100644 --- a/pgmnoise.html +++ b/pgmnoise.html @@ -1,34 +1,32 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><TITLE>Pgmnoise User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pgmnoise</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pgmnoise User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pgmnoise</h1> Updated: 27 June 2013 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pgmnoise - create a PGM image made up of white noise -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pgmnoise</B> <I>width</i> <i>height</I> +<b>pgmnoise</b> <i>width</i> <i>height</i> [<b>-maxval=</b><i>n</i>] [<b>-randomseed=</b><i>integer</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviations of option are acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviations of option are acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>pgmnoise</b> creates a PGM image that is made up of pixels +<p><b>pgmnoise</b> creates a PGM image that is made up of pixels of random brightness. <p>You specify the dimensions of the image with the <i>width</i> @@ -41,6 +39,11 @@ identical output. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pgmnoise</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-maxval=</b><i>n</i> <dd>The maxval of the generated image. @@ -62,24 +65,24 @@ invocations. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1993 by Frank Neumann -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/picttoppm.html b/picttoppm.html index 793c414f..525f0b2e 100644 --- a/picttoppm.html +++ b/picttoppm.html @@ -1,34 +1,33 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Picttoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>picttoppm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Picttoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>picttoppm</h1> Updated: 17 June 2006 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> picttoppm - convert a Macintosh PICT file to a PPM -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>picttoppm</B> +<b>picttoppm</b> -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<B>-fullres</B>] +[<b>-fullres</b>] -[<B>-noheader</B>] +[<b>-noheader</b>] -[<B>-quickdraw</B>] +[<b>-quickdraw</b>] <br> -[<B>-fontdir</B> <i>file</i>] +[<b>-fontdir</b> <i>file</i>] -[<I>pictfile</I>] +[<i>pictfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -46,44 +45,49 @@ Macintosh applications. <p>In MacOS X, PDF replaces PICT as the main graphics format. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-fontdir </B><I>file</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>picttoppm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Make the list of BDF fonts in <i>file</i> available for use by +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-fontdir </b><i>file</i> + +<dd>Make the list of BDF fonts in <i>file</i> available for use by <b>picttoppm</b> when drawing text. See below for the format of the fontdir file. This is in addition to the built-in fonts and those in the file <b>fontdir</b>. -<DT><B>-fullres</B> +<dt><b>-fullres</b> -<DD>Force any images in the PICT file to be output with at least their +<dd>Force any images in the PICT file to be output with at least their full resolution. A PICT file may indicate that a contained image is to be scaled down before output. This option forces images to retain their sizes and prevent information loss. This option disables all PICT operations except images. -<DT><B>-noheader</B> +<dt><b>-noheader</b> -<DD>Do not assume the first 512 bytes of the file are a header. All PICT +<dd>Do not assume the first 512 bytes of the file are a header. All PICT files have such a header, but this is useful when you have PICT data that was not stored in the data fork of a PICT file. -<DT><B>-quickdraw</B> +<dt><b>-quickdraw</b> -<DD>Execute only pure quickdraw operations. In particular, turn off +<dd>Execute only pure quickdraw operations. In particular, turn off the interpretation of special PostScript printer operations. -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Print a whole bunch of information about the PICT file and the +<dd>Print a whole bunch of information about the PICT file and the conversion process that only <b>picttoppm</b> hackers really care about. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> The PICT file format is a general drawing format. <b>picttoppm</b> does not recognize all the drawing commands, but it does fully @@ -107,11 +111,11 @@ directory files. in the current directory, if it exists. You may specify an additional font directory file with the <b>-fontdir</b> option. -<P>Obviously the font definitions are strongly related to the +<p>Obviously the font definitions are strongly related to the Macintosh. You can find more font numbers and information about fonts in Macintosh documentation. -<H3 id="fontdir">Font Directory File Format</H3> +<h3 id="fontdir">Font Directory File Format</h3> <p>Each line in the file is either a comment or font information. A comment begins with <b>#</b>. The font information consists of 4 @@ -120,7 +124,7 @@ is the font size in pixels, the third is the font style and the fourth is the name of a BDF file containing the font. The BDF format is defined by the X Window System and is beyond the scope of this document. -<P>The font number indicates the type face. Here is a list of known +<p>The font number indicates the type face. Here is a list of known font numbers and their faces. <dl> @@ -143,7 +147,7 @@ font numbers and their faces. <dt>24 <dd>Taliesin </dl> -<P>The font style indicates a variation on the font. Multiple +<p>The font style indicates a variation on the font. Multiple variations may apply to a font and the font style is the sum of the variation numbers which are: @@ -158,27 +162,27 @@ variation numbers which are: </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> Inside Macintosh volumes 1 and 5, -<A HREF="ppmtopict.html">ppmtopict</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="ppmtopict.html">ppmtopict</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright 1993 George Phillips -<HR> -<H2 id="inedex">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#fonts">FONTS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#fonts">FONTS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pngtopam.html b/pngtopam.html index 47d82cd7..8bcd6739 100644 --- a/pngtopam.html +++ b/pngtopam.html @@ -1,33 +1,32 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pngtopam User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pngtopam</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pngtopam User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pngtopam</h1> Updated: 22 July 2008 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pngtopam - convert a PNG image into a Netpbm image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pngtopam</B> +<b>pngtopam</b> [<b>-verbose</b>] [<b>-alphapam</b> | <b>-alpha</b> | <b>-mix</b>] [<b>-background</b>=<i>color</i>] -<BR> +<br> [<b>-gamma</b>=<i>value</i>] [<b>-text</b>=<i>filename</i>] [<b>-time</b>] -[<B>-byrow</B>] -[<I>pngfile</I>] +[<b>-byrow</b>] +[<i>pngfile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -47,20 +46,25 @@ transparency information in a PAM file, as you might generate with <b>pngtopam features, but probably not ones that matter in the modern world. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pngtopam</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Display various information about the input PNG image and the +<dd>Display various information about the input PNG image and the conversion process. <p>If you want even more information about the PNG image, use <b>pngcheck</b> (not part of Netpbm). -<DT><B>-alphapam</B> +<dt><b>-alphapam</b> -<DD>Produce a single output image containing the main image (foreground) +<dd>Produce a single output image containing the main image (foreground) and the transparency channel or transparency mask. This image is in the PAM format with tuple type of either GRAYSCALE_ALPHA (which has a depth of 2 channels) or RGB_ALPHA (which has a depth of 4 channels). @@ -69,11 +73,11 @@ format with tuple type of either GRAYSCALE_ALPHA (which has a depth of <b>-mix</b>. With none of them, <b>pngtopam</b> produces an image of the foreground of the input image and discards transparency information. -<P>This option was new in Netpbm 10.44 (September 2008). +<p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.44 (September 2008). -<DT><B>-alpha</B> +<dt><b>-alpha</b> -<DD>Output the transparency channel or transparency mask of the image. The +<dd>Output the transparency channel or transparency mask of the image. The result is either a PBM file or a PGM file, depending on whether different levels of transparency appear. @@ -83,9 +87,9 @@ different levels of transparency appear. <b>-mix</b>. With none of them, <b>pngtopam</b> produces an image of the foreground of the input image and discards transparency information. -<DT><B>-mix</B> +<dt><b>-mix</b> -<DD>Compose the image with the transparency or transparency mask against a +<dd>Compose the image with the transparency or transparency mask against a background. The background color is determined by the bKGD chunk in the PNG, except that you can override it with <b>-background</b>. If the PNG has no bKGD chunk and you don't specify <b>-background</b>, @@ -95,13 +99,13 @@ the background color is white. <b>-mix</b>. With none of them, <b>pngtopam</b> produces an image of the foreground of the input image and discards transparency information. -<DT><B>-background=</b><i>color</i> +<dt><b>-background=</b><i>color</i> -<DD> +<dd> This option specifies the background color with which to mix the image when you specify <b>-mix</b>. -<P><i>color</i> is as described for the <a +<p><i>color</i> is as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. @@ -122,7 +126,7 @@ white. caused a usability problem). -<DT><B>-gamma=</b><i>value</i> +<dt><b>-gamma=</b><i>value</i> <dd>This option causes <b>pngtopam</b> to respect the image gamma information in the PNG file (from the gAMA chunk). Probably by historical accident, @@ -171,42 +175,42 @@ correction, those three shades are indistinguishable, so <b>pngtopam</b> considers pixels of all three shades to be transparent. -<DT><B>-text=</b><i>file</i> +<dt><b>-text=</b><i>file</i> -<DD>Writes the tEXt and zTXt chunks to a file, in a format as +<dd>Writes the tEXt and zTXt chunks to a file, in a format as described in the <b>pnmtopng</b> user manual. These chunks contain text comments or annotations. -<DT><B>-time</B> +<dt><b>-time</b> -<DD>Prints the tIME chunk to stderr. +<dd>Prints the tIME chunk to stderr. -<DT><B>-byrow</B> +<dt><b>-byrow</b> -<DD>This option can make <b>pngtopam</b> run faster or in environments +<dd>This option can make <b>pngtopam</b> run faster or in environments where it would otherwise fail. -<P><B>pngtopam</B> has two ways to do the conversion from PNG to PAM, using +<p><b>pngtopam</b> has two ways to do the conversion from PNG to PAM, using respectively two facilities of the PNG library: -<DL> +<dl> -<DT>Whole Image +<dt>Whole Image -<DD>Decode the entire image into memory at once, using +<dd>Decode the entire image into memory at once, using <b>png_read_image()</b>, then convert to PAM and output row by row. -<DT>Row By Row -<DD>Read, convert, and output one row at a time using <b>png_read_row()</b>. +<dt>Row By Row +<dd>Read, convert, and output one row at a time using <b>png_read_row()</b>. -</DL> +</dl> -<P>Whole Image is generally preferable because the PNG library does more of +<p>Whole Image is generally preferable because the PNG library does more of the work, which means it understands more of the PNG format possibilities now and in the future. Also, if the PNG is interlaced, <b>pngtopam</b> does not know how to assemble the rows in the right order. -<P>Row By Row uses far less memory, which means with large images, it +<p>Row By Row uses far less memory, which means with large images, it can run in environments where Whole Image cannot and may also run faster. And because Netpbm code does more of the work, it's possible that it can be more flexible or at least give better diagnostic @@ -215,8 +219,8 @@ information if there's something wrong with the PNG. <p>The Netpbm native code may do something correctly that the PNG library does incorrectly, or vice versa. -<P>In Netpbm, we stress function over performance, so by default -<B>pngtopam</B> uses Whole Image. You can select Row By Row with +<p>In Netpbm, we stress function over performance, so by default +<b>pngtopam</b> uses Whole Image. You can select Row By Row with <b>-byrow</b> if you want the speed or resource requirement improvement. <p><b>-byrow</b> was new in Netpbm 10.54 (March 2011). @@ -237,21 +241,21 @@ is oriented that way. considerable amount of processing for <b>tifftopnm</b> to convert it to Netpbm format. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pnmtopng.html">pamtopng</A>, -<A HREF="pnmtopng.html">pnmtopng</A>, -<A HREF="pngtopnm.html">pngtopnm</A>, +<a href="pnmtopng.html">pamtopng</a>, +<a href="pnmtopng.html">pnmtopng</a>, +<a href="pngtopnm.html">pngtopnm</a>, <b>ptot</b>, -<A HREF="pnmgamma.html">pnmgamma</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<a href="pnmgamma.html">pnmgamma</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> <p>For information on the PNG format, see <a href="http://schaik.com/png">http://schaik.com/png</a>. -<H2 id="note">NOTE</H2> +<h2 id="note">NOTE</h2> <p>A PNG image contains a lot of information that can't be represented in Netpbm formats. Therefore, you lose information when you convert to @@ -259,12 +263,12 @@ another format with "pngtopam | pnmtoxxx". If there is a specialized converter that converts directly to the other format, e.g. <b>ptot</b> to convert from PNG to TIFF, you'll get better results using that. -<H2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> <p>There could be an option to include PNG comment chunks in the output image as PNM comments instead of putting them in a separate file. -<P>The program could be much faster, with a bit of code optimizing. +<p>The program could be much faster, with a bit of code optimizing. As with any Netpbm program, speed always takes a back seat to quick present and future development. @@ -289,21 +293,21 @@ simpler reference applications by Alexander Lehmann <b>pnmtopng</b> package, most of it just to improve maintainability. -<H2 id="authors">AUTHORS</H2> +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> Copyright (C) 1995-1997 by Alexander Lehmann and Willem van Schaik. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#note">NOTE</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#authors">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#note">NOTE</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmconvol.html b/pnmconvol.html index 893d1c15..f7a87f54 100644 --- a/pnmconvol.html +++ b/pnmconvol.html @@ -1,35 +1,34 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmconvol User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmconvol</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmconvol User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmconvol</h1> Updated: 30 November 2018 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmconvol - general MxN convolution on a Netpbm image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <b>pnmconvol</b> { <b>-matrix=</b><i>convolution_matrix</i> | -<B>-matrixfile=</B><i>filename</i>[<b>,</b><i>filename</i>[<b>,</b> ...]] +<b>-matrixfile=</b><i>filename</i>[<b>,</b><i>filename</i>[<b>,</b> ...]] } [<b>-normalize</b>] [<b>-bias=<i>n</i></b>] -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] <p> -<B>pnmconvol</B> -<I>convolution_matrix_file</I> +<b>pnmconvol</b> +<i>convolution_matrix_file</i> [<b>-normalize</b>] [<b>-nooffset</b>] -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double @@ -37,7 +36,7 @@ hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -47,14 +46,14 @@ a specified convolution matrix, and writes a Netpbm image as output. <p>A command use for convolution is blurring. See examples in the <a href="pamgauss.html"><b>pamgauss</b></a> manual. -<P>Convolution means replacing each pixel with a weighted average of +<p>Convolution means replacing each pixel with a weighted average of the nearby pixels. The weights and the area to average are determined by the convolution matrix (sometimes called a convolution kernel), which you supply in one of several ways. See <a href="#convolutionmatrix"> Convolution Matrix</a>. -<P>At the edges of the convolved image, where the convolution matrix would -extend over the edge of the image, <B>pnmconvol</B> just copies the input +<p>At the edges of the convolved image, where the convolution matrix would +extend over the edge of the image, <b>pnmconvol</b> just copies the input pixels directly to the output. It's often better to deal with the pixels near an edge by assuming some blank or background color beyond the edge. To do that, use <b>pnmpad</b> to add a margin all around whose size is half that of @@ -233,14 +232,14 @@ by dividing by the maxval. to be a simple average of its corresponding input pixel and its 8 neighbors, resulting in a smoothed image: -<PRE> +<pre> P2 3 3 18 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 -</PRE> +</pre> <p>(Note that the above text is an actual PGM file -- you can cut and paste it. If you're not familiar with the plain PGM format, see @@ -271,16 +270,16 @@ and then normalizes by dividing by half the maxval. So to get the same result as we did above with <b>-nooffset</b>, the convolution matrix PNM image would have to look like this: -<PRE> +<pre> P2 3 3 18 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 -</PRE> +</pre> -<P>To see how this works, do the above-mentioned offset: 10 - 18/2 +<p>To see how this works, do the above-mentioned offset: 10 - 18/2 gives 1. The normalization step divides by 18/2 = 9, which makes it 1/9 - exactly what you want. The equivalent matrix for 5x5 smoothing would have maxval 50 and be filled with 26. @@ -288,7 +287,7 @@ would have maxval 50 and be filled with 26. <p>Note that with maxval 18, the range of possible values is 0 to 18. After offset, that's -9 to 9, and after normalizing, the range is -1 to 1. -<P>The convolution file will usually be a PGM, so that the same +<p>The convolution file will usually be a PGM, so that the same convolution gets applied to each color component. However, if you want to use a PPM and do a different convolution to different colors, you can certainly do that. @@ -309,30 +308,35 @@ filter but the output value is the minimum or maximum of the values in the window. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmconvol</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><B>-matrix=</b><i>convolution_matrix</i> -<DD>The value of the convolution matrix. See +<dt><b>-matrix=</b><i>convolution_matrix</i> +<dd>The value of the convolution matrix. See <a href="#matrixopt">Convolution Matrix</a>. <p>You may not specify both this and <b>-matrixfile</b>. -<P>This option was new in Netpbm 10.49 (December 2009). Before +<p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.49 (December 2009). Before that, use a PNM file for the convolution matrix. -<DT><B>-matrixfile=</b><i>filename</i> -<DD>This specifies that you are supplying the convolution matrix in +<dt><b>-matrixfile=</b><i>filename</i> +<dd>This specifies that you are supplying the convolution matrix in a file and names that file. See <a href="#matrixfile">Convolution Matrix</a>. <p>You may not specify both this and <b>-matrix</b>. -<P>This option was new in Netpbm 10.49 (December 2009). Before +<p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.49 (December 2009). Before that, use a PNM file for the convolution matrix. -<DT><B>-normalize</B> +<dt><b>-normalize</b> <dd>This option says to adjust the weights in your convolution matrix so they all add up to one. You usually want them to add up to one so that the @@ -389,53 +393,54 @@ output image, it clips it to the maxval. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.68 (September 2014). -<DT><B>-nooffset=</b> -<DD>This is part of the obsolete PNM image method of specifying the +<dt><b>-nooffset=</b> +<dd>This is part of the obsolete PNM image method of specifying the convolution matrix. See <a href="#matrixpnm">Convolution Matrix</a>. </dl> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> <p>The <b>-nooffset</b> option was new in Netpbm -10.23 (July 2004), making it substantially easier to specify a convolution -matrix, but still hard. In Netpbm 10.49 (December 2009), the PNM convolution +<p>The <b>-nooffset</b> option was new in Netpbm 10.23 (July 2004), +making it substantially easier to specify a convolution matrix, but +still hard. In Netpbm 10.49 (December 2009), the PNM convolution matrix tyranny was finally ended with the <b>-matrix</b> and -<b>-matrixfile</b> options. In between, <b>pnmconvol</b> was broken for a -while because the Netpbm library started enforcing the requirement that a -sample value not exceed the maxval of the image. <b>pnmconvol</b> used the -Netpbm library to read the PNM convolution matrix file, but in the pseudo-PNM -format that <b>pnmconvol</b> uses, a sample value sometimes has to exceed -the maxval. - - -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pnmsmooth.html">pnmsmooth</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgmmorphconv.html">pgmmorphconv</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgmmedian.html">pgmmedian</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmnlfilt.html">pnmnlfilt</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgmkernel.html">pgmkernel</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamgauss.html">pamgauss</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pammasksharpen.html">pammasksharpen</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmpad.html">pnmpad</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> - -<H2 id="authors">AUTHORS</H2> +<b>-matrixfile</b> options. In between, <b>pnmconvol</b> was broken +for a while because the Netpbm library started enforcing the +requirement that a sample value not exceed the maxval of the +image. <b>pnmconvol</b> used the Netpbm library to read the PNM +convolution matrix file, but in the pseudo-PNM format +that <b>pnmconvol</b> uses, a sample value sometimes has to exceed the +maxval. + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pnmsmooth.html">pnmsmooth</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgmmorphconv.html">pgmmorphconv</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgmmedian.html">pgmmedian</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmnlfilt.html">pnmnlfilt</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgmkernel.html">pgmkernel</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamgauss.html">pamgauss</a></b>, +<b><a href="pammasksharpen.html">pammasksharpen</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmpad.html">pnmpad</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> + +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<BR> +<br> -Modified 26 November 1994 by Mike Burns, <A -HREF="mailto:burns@chem.psu.edu">burns@chem.psu.edu</A> +Modified 26 November 1994 by Mike Burns, <a +href="mailto:burns@chem.psu.edu">burns@chem.psu.edu</a> -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> <ul> <li><a href="#convolutionmatrix">Convolution Matrix</a> <ul> @@ -444,10 +449,10 @@ HREF="mailto:burns@chem.psu.edu">burns@chem.psu.edu</A> <li><a href="#matrixpnm">PNM File</a> </ul> </ul> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#authors">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmcrop.html b/pnmcrop.html index 951d8e2b..3c9c572c 100644 --- a/pnmcrop.html +++ b/pnmcrop.html @@ -1,40 +1,39 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmcrop User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmcrop</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmcrop User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmcrop</h1> Updated: 04 October 2019 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmcrop - crop a Netpbm image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmcrop</B> +<b>pnmcrop</b> -[<B>-white</B> -|<B>-black</B> -|<B>-sides</B> +[<b>-white</b> +|<b>-black</b> +|<b>-sides</b> |<b>-bg-color=</b><i>color</i> |<b>-bg-corner=</b>{ <b>topleft</b>|<b>topright</b>|<b>bottomleft</b>|<b>bottomright</b>} ] -[<B>-left</B>] +[<b>-left</b>] -[<B>-right</B>] +[<b>-right</b>] -[<B>-top</B>] +[<b>-top</b>] -[<B>-bottom</B>] +[<b>-bottom</b>] -[<B>-margin=</B><i>pixels</i>] +[<b>-margin=</b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-closeness=</B><I>closeness_percent</I>] +[<b>-closeness=</b><i>closeness_percent</i>] -[<B>-borderfile=</B><i>filename</i>] +[<b>-borderfile=</b><i>filename</i>] [<b>-blank-image=</b>{<b>abort</b>|<b>pass</b>|<b>minimize</b>|<b>maxcrop</b>}] @@ -42,14 +41,14 @@ pnmcrop - crop a Netpbm image [<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -57,18 +56,18 @@ from its value. borders that are the background color, and produces the same type of image as output. -<P>If you don't specify otherwise, <B>pnmcrop</B> assumes the +<p>If you don't specify otherwise, <b>pnmcrop</b> assumes the background color is whatever color the top left and right corners of the image are and if they are different colors, something midway between them. You can specify that the background is white or black -with the <B>-white</B> and <B>-black</B> options or make -<B>pnmcrop</B> base its guess on all four corners instead of just two -with <B>-sides</B>. +with the <b>-white</b> and <b>-black</b> options or make +<b>pnmcrop</b> base its guess on all four corners instead of just two +with <b>-sides</b>. -<P>By default, <B>pnmcrop</B> chops off any stripe of background color -it finds, on all four sides. You can tell <B>pnmcrop</B> to remove -only specific borders with the <B>-left</B>, <B>-right</B>, - <B>-top</B>, and <B>-bottom</B> options. +<p>By default, <b>pnmcrop</b> chops off any stripe of background color +it finds, on all four sides. You can tell <b>pnmcrop</b> to remove +only specific borders with the <b>-left</b>, <b>-right</b>, + <b>-top</b>, and <b>-bottom</b> options. <p>But note that <b>pnmcrop</b>'s determination of the background color is independent of which edges you crop, which may not be intuitive. For example, @@ -78,7 +77,7 @@ to crop the black border, but you actually won't crop anything, because <b>pnmcrop</b> considers the background color to be whatever color the top two corners are, which is blue, and there is no blue at the bottom of the image. If you do want <b>pnmcrop</b> to take the background color from the -edges being cropped, use <B>-bg-corner</B>. +edges being cropped, use <b>-bg-corner</b>. <p>If you want to leave some border, use the <b>-margin</b> option. It will not only spare some of the border from cropping, but will fill in @@ -92,27 +91,32 @@ of images of the same dimensions, you may end up with images of differing dimensions. Before Netpbm 10.37 (December 2006), <b>pnmcrop</b> ignored all input images but the first. -<P>If you want to chop a specific amount off the side of an image, use -<B>pamcut</B>. +<p>If you want to chop a specific amount off the side of an image, use +<b>pamcut</b>. + +<p>If you want to add different borders after removing the existing +ones, use <b>pnmcat</b> or <b>pamcomp</b>. -<P>If you want to add different borders after removing the existing -ones, use <B>pnmcat</B> or <B>pamcomp</B>. +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmcrop</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-white</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-white</b> -<DD>Take white to be the background color. <B>pnmcrop</B> removes +<dd>Take white to be the background color. <b>pnmcrop</b> removes borders which are white. <p>You may specify at most one of <b>-black</b>, <b>-white</b>, <b>-sides</b>, <b>-bg-color</b>, and <b>-bg-corner</b>. -<DT><B>-black</B> +<dt><b>-black</b> -<DD>Take black to be the background color. <B>pnmcrop </B> removes +<dd>Take black to be the background color. <b>pnmcrop </b> removes borders which are black. <p>You may specify at most one of <b>-black</b>, <b>-white</b>, <b>-sides</b>, @@ -130,23 +134,23 @@ areas of this color. <i>color</i> is a value that would be used as the <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.86 (March 2019). -<DT><B>-sides</B> +<dt><b>-sides</b> -<DD>Determine the background color from the colors of the four corners -of the input image. <B>pnmcrop</B> removes borders which are of the +<dd>Determine the background color from the colors of the four corners +of the input image. <b>pnmcrop</b> removes borders which are of the background color. -<P>If at least three of the four corners are the same color, -<B>pnmcrop </B> takes that as the background color. If not, -<B>pnmcrop</B> looks for two corners of the same color in the +<p>If at least three of the four corners are the same color, +<b>pnmcrop </b> takes that as the background color. If not, +<b>pnmcrop</b> looks for two corners of the same color in the following order, taking the first found as the background color: top, left, right, bottom. If all four corners are different colors, -<B>pnmcrop</B> assumes an average of the four colors as the background +<b>pnmcrop</b> assumes an average of the four colors as the background color. -<P>The <B>-sides</B> option slows <B>pnmcrop</B> down, as it reads the +<p>The <b>-sides</b> option slows <b>pnmcrop</b> down, as it reads the entire image to determine the background color in addition to the up -to three times that it would read it without <B>-sides</B>. +to three times that it would read it without <b>-sides</b>. <p>You may specify at most one of <b>-black</b>, <b>-white</b>, <b>-sides</b>, <b>-bg-color</b>, and <b>-bg-corner</b>. @@ -162,21 +166,21 @@ color. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.86 (March 2019). -<DT><B>-left</B> +<dt><b>-left</b> -<DD>Remove any left border. +<dd>Remove any left border. -<DT><B>-right</B> +<dt><b>-right</b> -<DD>Remove any right border. +<dd>Remove any right border. -<DT><B>-top</B> +<dt><b>-top</b> -<DD>Remove any top border. +<dd>Remove any top border. -<DT><B>-bottom</B> +<dt><b>-bottom</b> -<DD>Remove any bottom border. +<dd>Remove any bottom border. <dt><b>-margin=</b><i>pixels</i> @@ -185,9 +189,9 @@ if necessary. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.29 (August 2005). -<dt><B>-closeness=</B><I>closeness_percent</I> +<dt><b>-closeness=</b><i>closeness_percent</i> -<p>Any color in the image that is at least this close to the operative +<dd>Any color in the image that is at least this close to the operative background color is considered to be background. <p>You can use this if the image has borders that vary slightly in color, such @@ -341,35 +345,34 @@ bottom, width, and height. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.86 (March 2019). -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Print on Standard Error information about the processing, +<dd>Print on Standard Error information about the processing, including exactly how much is being cropped off of which sides. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pamfile.html">pamfile</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamfile.html">pamfile</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmgamma.html b/pnmgamma.html index fce97752..5aa734ab 100644 --- a/pnmgamma.html +++ b/pnmgamma.html @@ -1,16 +1,15 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmgamma User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmgamma</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmgamma User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmgamma</h1> Updated: 30 June 2007 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmgamma - perform gamma adjustment on a PNM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <p> <b>pnmgamma</b> @@ -28,31 +27,31 @@ pnmgamma - perform gamma adjustment on a PNM image [<i>pnmfile</i>] <p> -<B>pnmgamma </B> +<b>pnmgamma </b> [ - <B>-bt709ramp</B> | - <B>-srgbramp</B> + <b>-bt709ramp</b> | + <b>-srgbramp</b> ] [<b>-ungamma</b>] <br> -[{<I>gamma</I> | <i>redgamma</i> <i>greengamma</i> <i>bluegamma</i>} -[<I>pnmfile</I>]] +[{<i>gamma</i> | <i>redgamma</i> <i>greengamma</i> <i>bluegamma</i>} +[<i>pnmfile</i>]] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>Pnmgamma</b> performs gamma adjustment on pseudo-PNM images. -<P>The PPM format specification specifies that certain sample values +<p>The PPM format specification specifies that certain sample values in a file represent certain light intensities in an image. In particular, they specify that the sample values are directly proportional to luminance as defined by ITU-R Recommendation BT.709. BT.709 luminance as a function of radiance is a power function modified with a linear ramp near black. -<P>However, people sometimes work with approximations of PPM and PGM +<p>However, people sometimes work with approximations of PPM and PGM where the sample values represent intensity in different ways: <p>In one common variation, the sample value is directly proportional @@ -63,33 +62,33 @@ luminance as defined by the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) SRGB standard. The SRGB gamma transfer function is like the BT.709 one except with different constants in it. -<P>Note that SRGB is often spelled "sRGB". In this +<p>Note that SRGB is often spelled "sRGB". In this document, we use standard English typography, though, which doesn't allow for that kind of capitalization. -<P><B>pnmgamma</B> allows you to manipulate the gamma transfer +<p><b>pnmgamma</b> allows you to manipulate the gamma transfer function, thus working with and/or creating pseudo-PPM files that are useful for various things. -<P>For example, if you feed a true PPM to <kbd>pnmgamma -bt709tolinear +<p>For example, if you feed a true PPM to <kbd>pnmgamma -bt709tolinear </kbd>, you get as output a file which is PPM in every respect except that the sample values are radiances. If you feed such a file to <kbd>pnmgamma -linearto709</kbd>, you get back a true PPM. -<P>The situation for PGM images is analogous. And <B>pnmgamma</B> +<p>The situation for PGM images is analogous. And <b>pnmgamma</b> treats PBM images as PGM images. -<P>When you feed a radiance-proportional pseudo-PPM image to a display +<p>When you feed a radiance-proportional pseudo-PPM image to a display program that expects a true PPM, the display appears darker than it -should, so <B>pnmgamma</B> has the effect of lightening the image. +should, so <b>pnmgamma</b> has the effect of lightening the image. When you feed a true PPM to a display program that expects radiance-proportional sample values, and therefore does a gamma adjustment of its own on them, the display appears lighter than it -should, so <B>pnmgamma</B> with a gamma value less than one (the +should, so <b>pnmgamma</b> with a gamma value less than one (the multiplicative inverse of whatever gamma value the display program uses) has the effect of darkening the image. -<H2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</H2> +<h2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</h2> <p>The form of the parameters depends on whether you're using the old syntax or the new syntax. With the old syntax, the parameters are @@ -109,9 +108,14 @@ modern <b>-gamma</b>, <b>-rgamma</b>, <b>-ggamma</b>, and <b>-bgamma</b> options described below. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmgamma</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> <dt><b>-bt709tolinear</b> @@ -149,24 +153,24 @@ I.e. convert to true PPM or PGM from an SRGB-based variation. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.32 (February 2006). -<DT><B>-bt709ramp</B> +<dt><b>-bt709ramp</b> -<DD>Same as <b>-lineartobt709</b>, but using the old syntax. +<dd>Same as <b>-lineartobt709</b>, but using the old syntax. -<P>This option was renamed in Netpbm 10.32 (February 2006). Before that, +<p>This option was renamed in Netpbm 10.32 (February 2006). Before that, its name is <b>-cieramp</b>. <dt><b>-cieramp</b> <dd>This is an obsolete synonym for <b>-bt709ramp</b>. -<P>The name of this option comes from a former belief that this was a +<p>The name of this option comes from a former belief that this was a standard of CIE (International Commission On Illumination), but it now (August 2005) looks like it never was. -<DT><B>-srgbramp </B> +<dt><b>-srgbramp </b> -<DD>Convert the image from radiance to SRGB luminance. Note that it is +<dd>Convert the image from radiance to SRGB luminance. Note that it is true SRGB only if you use the default gamma value (i.e. don't specify any gamma parameters). @@ -182,9 +186,9 @@ before there was a standard definition of what the sample values of a Netpbm image measure, and <b>pnmgamma</b> considered radiance-linear to be the proper intermediate format. -<DT><B>-ungamma</B> +<dt><b>-ungamma</b> -<DD>Apply the inverse of the specified transfer function (i.e. go from +<dd>Apply the inverse of the specified transfer function (i.e. go from gamma-adjusted luminance to radiance). <p>This is valid only with <b>-bt709ramp</b> (aka <b>-cieramp</b>), @@ -253,17 +257,17 @@ maxval at least 3 times the input maxval. you can achieve the same result by increasing the maxval of the input or decreasing the maxval of the output using <b>pamdepth</b>. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="gamma">WHAT IS GAMMA?</H2> +<h2 id="gamma">WHAT IS GAMMA?</h2> -<P>A good explanation of gamma is in Charles Poynton's Gamma FAQ at -<A HREF="http://www.poynton.com/GammaFAQ.html"> -http://www.poynton.com/GammaFAQ.html</A> and Color FAQ at <A -HREF="http://www.poynton.com/ColorFAQ.html"> -http://www.poynton.com/ColorFAQ.html</A>. +<p>A good explanation of gamma is in Charles Poynton's Gamma FAQ at +<a href="http://www.poynton.com/GammaFAQ.html"> +http://www.poynton.com/GammaFAQ.html</a> and Color FAQ at <a +href="http://www.poynton.com/ColorFAQ.html"> +http://www.poynton.com/ColorFAQ.html</a>. -<P>In brief: The simplest way to code an image is by using sample +<p>In brief: The simplest way to code an image is by using sample values that are directly proportional to the radiance of the color components. Radiance is a physical quantification based on the amount of power in the light; it is easily measurable in a laboratory, but @@ -285,10 +289,10 @@ psychological. Also, perception of brightness varies according to a variety of factors, including the surrounding in which an image is viewed. Therefore, there is not just one gamma transfer function. -<P>Virtually all image formats, either specified or de facto, use +<p>Virtually all image formats, either specified or de facto, use gamma-adjusted values for their sample values. -<P>What's really nice about gamma is that by coincidence, the inverse +<p>What's really nice about gamma is that by coincidence, the inverse function that you have to do to convert the gamma-adjusted values back to radiance is done automatically by CRTs. You just apply a voltage to the CRT's electron gun that is proportional to the @@ -296,31 +300,30 @@ gamma-adjusted sample value, and the radiance of the light that comes out of the screen is close to the radiance value you had before you applied the gamma transfer function! -<P>And when you consider that computer video devices usually want you +<p>And when you consider that computer video devices usually want you to store in video memory a value proportional to the signal voltage you want to go to the monitor, which the monitor turns into a proportional drive voltage on the electron gun, it is really convenient to work with gamma-adjusted sample values. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Bill Davidson and Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#parameters">PARAMETERS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#gamma">WHAT IS GAMMA?</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#gamma">WHAT IS GAMMA?</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmhistmap.html b/pnmhistmap.html index 497870c2..b1a70690 100644 --- a/pnmhistmap.html +++ b/pnmhistmap.html @@ -1,24 +1,23 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmhistmap User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmhistmap</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmhistmap User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmhistmap</h1> Updated: 13 July 2009 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmhistmap - draw a histogram for a PGM or PPM file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmhistmap</B> +<b>pnmhistmap</b> -[<B>-red</B>] [<B>-green</B>] [<B>-blue</B>] +[<b>-red</b>] [<b>-green</b>] [<b>-blue</b>] -[<B>-black</B>] [<B>-white</B>] +[<b>-black</b>] [<b>-white</b>] -[<B>-max</B> <I>N</I>] +[<b>-max</b> <i>N</i>] [<b>-lval</b>] [<b>-rval</b>] @@ -26,16 +25,16 @@ pnmhistmap - draw a histogram for a PGM or PPM file [<b>-dots</b>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -50,10 +49,15 @@ one for the green input, and a blue one for the blue input. <p><img src="testimg.png" alt="image"> <img src="testimg_histbar.png" alt="histogram from image"> -<p>If the input is PBM, <b>pnmhistmap</B> produces an error message +<p>If the input is PBM, <b>pnmhistmap</b> produces an error message and no output image. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmhistmap</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> @@ -112,15 +116,15 @@ some buckets represent no color (the count is zero). <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.26 (January 2005). Before that, the dimensions were always what the default is today. -<DT><B>-black </B> +<dt><b>-black </b> -<DD>Ignore the count of black pixels when scaling the histogram. +<dd>Ignore the count of black pixels when scaling the histogram. -<DT><B>-white</B> +<dt><b>-white</b> -<DD>Ignore the count of white pixels when scaling the histogram. +<dd>Ignore the count of white pixels when scaling the histogram. -<P>The -black and -white options, which can be used separately or +<p>The -black and -white options, which can be used separately or together, are useful for images with a large percentage of pixels whose value is zero or 255, which can cause the remaining histogram data to become unreadably small. Note that, for color inputs, these @@ -128,48 +132,48 @@ options apply to all colors; if, for example, the input has a large number of bright-red areas, you will probably want to use the -white option. -<DT><B>-max N</B> +<dt><b>-max N</b> -<DD>Force the scaling of the histogram to use N as the largest-count value. +<dd>Force the scaling of the histogram to use N as the largest-count value. This is useful for inputs with a large percentage of single-color pixels which are not black or white. -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Report the progress of making the histogram, including the largest-count +<dd>Report the progress of making the histogram, including the largest-count value used to scale the output. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> -<P><b>pnmhistmap</b> assumes maxval is always 255. Images with a +<p><b>pnmhistmap</b> assumes maxval is always 255. Images with a smaller maxval will only use the lower-value side of the histogram. You can overcome this either by piping the input through <b>pamdepth</b> or by cutting and scaling the lower-value side of the histogram. Neither is a particularly elegant solution to the problem. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="pgmhist.html">pgmhist</A>, -<A HREF="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</A>, -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> - -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> - -<p>Wilson H. Bent. Jr. (<A HREF="mailto:whb@usc.edu">whb@usc.edu</A>). - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pgmhist.html">pgmhist</a>, +<a href="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</a>, +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +<p>Wilson H. Bent. Jr. (<a href="mailto:whb@usc.edu">whb@usc.edu</a>). + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmindex.html b/pnmindex.html index 97451eca..c00e7d9b 100644 --- a/pnmindex.html +++ b/pnmindex.html @@ -1,50 +1,49 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmindex User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmindex</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmindex User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmindex</h1> Updated: 14 November 2015 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmindex - build a visual index of a bunch of PNM images -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmindex</B> +<b>pnmindex</b> -[<B>-size=</B><I>N</I>] +[<b>-size=</b><i>N</i>] -[<B>-across=</B><I>N</I>] +[<b>-across=</b><i>N</i>] -[<B>-colors=</B><I>N</I>] +[<b>-colors=</b><i>N</i>] -[<B>-black</B>] +[<b>-black</b>] -[<B>-title=</B><I>title</I>] +[<b>-title=</b><i>title</i>] -[<B>-quant</B>|<B>-noquant</B>] +[<b>-quant</b>|<b>-noquant</b>] -<I>pnmfile</I> ... +<i>pnmfile</i> ... -<P>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You can use +<p>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You can use two hyphens instead of one. You can separate an option name from its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<B>pnmindex</B> creates an index image containing thumbnail (small) +<b>pnmindex</b> creates an index image containing thumbnail (small) versions of a bunch of PNM files you supply. (Akin to a photographic "contact sheet." -<P><B>pnmindex</B> labels each thumbnail and, optionally, contains a +<p><b>pnmindex</b> labels each thumbnail and, optionally, contains a title. -<P>If you just want to concatenate some images together in a grid, use +<p>If you just want to concatenate some images together in a grid, use <b>pamundice</b> for that. <p>If you want to take apart the image you generated with <b>pnmindex</b>, @@ -55,86 +54,91 @@ directory <b>/tmp</b>, but you can usse the <b>TMPDIR</b> environment variable to have them somewhere else. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmindex</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-size=</B><I>N</I> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-size=</b><i>N</i> -<DD>The size of each thumbnail. The image is scaled to fit maximally -inside a <I>N</I> x <I>N</I> pixel box without changing its aspect +<dd>The size of each thumbnail. The image is scaled to fit maximally +inside a <i>N</i> x <i>N</i> pixel box without changing its aspect ratio. Default is 100. -<DT><B>-across=</B><I>N</I> +<dt><b>-across=</b><i>N</i> -<DD>The number of thumbnails in each row. Default is 6. +<dd>The number of thumbnails in each row. Default is 6. -<DT><B>-colors=</B><I>N</I> +<dt><b>-colors=</b><i>N</i> -<DD>The maximum number of colors allowed in the overall image. If it -would otherwise have more colors than these, <B>pnmindex</B> quantizes +<dd>The maximum number of colors allowed in the overall image. If it +would otherwise have more colors than these, <b>pnmindex</b> quantizes the result. The default is 256. -<P>However, this value is meaningless if you specify the -<B>-noquant</B> option. +<p>However, this value is meaningless if you specify the +<b>-noquant</b> option. -<DT><B>-black</B> +<dt><b>-black</b> -<DD>This controls the color of the padding between the images; +<dd>This controls the color of the padding between the images; normally it's white and the labels are black lettering on white -background, but the <B>-black</B> option reverses this. +background, but the <b>-black</b> option reverses this. -<DT><B>-title=</B><I>title</I> +<dt><b>-title=</b><i>title</i> -<DD> +<dd> Specifies a title top place at the top of the image. Default is no title. -<DT><B>-quant</B> +<dt><b>-quant</b> -<DD>Enables quantization (to the number of colors specified by -<B>-colors</B>). Quantization is on by default but you can disable -it with <B>-noquant.</B> +<dd>Enables quantization (to the number of colors specified by +<b>-colors</b>). Quantization is on by default but you can disable +it with <b>-noquant.</b> -<DT><B>-noquant</B> +<dt><b>-noquant</b> -<DD>See <B>-quant</B>. +<dd>See <b>-quant</b>. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamscale.html">pamscale</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtext.html">pbmtext</A></B>, +<b><a href="pbmtext.html">pbmtext</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pamdice.html">pamdice</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamdice.html">pamdice</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pamundice.html">pamundice</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamundice.html">pamundice</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmtile.html">pnmtile</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmtile.html">pnmtile</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<p><B>-title</B> and <B>-noquant</B> added 2000 by John Heidemann. - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p><b>-title</b> and <b>-noquant</b> added 2000 by John Heidemann. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmmercator.html b/pnmmercator.html index e9e7165e..713d396a 100644 --- a/pnmmercator.html +++ b/pnmmercator.html @@ -1,9 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<html> -<head> -<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"> -<title>PnmMercator User Manual</title> -</head> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>PnmMercator User Manual</title></head> <body> <h1>pnmmercator</h1> Updated: October 2009 @@ -11,7 +7,6 @@ Updated: October 2009 <a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> <h2>NAME</h2> - pnmmercator - transform a worldmap from rectangular projection to Mercator projection and vice-versa @@ -23,12 +18,11 @@ projection and vice-versa [<b><i>filename</i></b>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. -You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options.</p> +You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. <h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> -<p>This program is part of <a -href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/index.html">Netpbm</a>.</p> +<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p>The <b>pnmmercator</b> utility, converts a rectangular projection worldmap to a Mercator projection format, as used for maps.google.com and many other @@ -37,34 +31,34 @@ online maps. The map used as input for <b>pnmmercator</b> must have rows for file will typically be twice as wide as high, but this is not a requirement. The output file will be using the <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mercator_projection">Mercator -projection</a> and will get double the height of the input file.</p> +projection</a> and will get double the height of the input file. <p>Maps using the Mercator projection are stretched more the closer a row is to the North or South Pole. The last few degrees (> 85 or < -85 degrees) are not part of a Mercator map at all because they would be stretched too much and the rows close to the edge will show banding, because they originate from -the same row in the original map.</p> +the same row in the original map. <p>To overcome this, the program will by default do interpolation of pixel colors, which will eliminate the banding effect, but will cause some blurring of the output. With the -nomix option, this interpolation of colors isn't applied. You can obtain the highest quality output by starting with an input map of high resolution, so that you can follow the <b>pnmmercator</b> -transformation with a <b>pamscale</b> reduction in size.</p> +transformation with a <b>pamscale</b> reduction in size. <p>This program can also convert a Mercator projection map back to a rectangular projection based. As said, the Mercator map doesn't have information about the latitudes close to the poles. Therefore the top rows in the output image will be identical and copied from the row corresponding with -latitude of 85 degrees. The same at the bottom of the map.</p> +latitude of 85 degrees. The same at the bottom of the map. <p>Pnmmercator doesn't have any provision for scaling the image. You can scale by piping the output of the program through Netpbm programs such as -<b>pamscale</b>.</p> +<b>pamscale</b>. <p>You can find maps to be used as input at <a href="http://flatplanet.sourceforge.net/maps/natural.html">flatplanet.sourceforge.net</a> -or <a href="http://www.evl.uic.edu/pape/data/Earth/">uic.edu/pape</a>.</p> +or <a href="http://www.evl.uic.edu/pape/data/Earth/">uic.edu/pape</a>. <p>The point of a Mercator projection map is that compass directions work on it. If you draw a straight line northeast from some point on the Mercator @@ -84,55 +78,60 @@ proportional to angular longitude. <h2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</h2> <p><b><i>filename</i></b> is the name of the input file. If you don't specify -this, <b>pnmmercator</b> reads the image from standard Input.</p> +this, <b>pnmmercator</b> reads the image from standard Input. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmmercator</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl compact> <dt><b>-inverse</b></dt> <dd> <p>With this option a conversion from Mercator to degrees is applied.The -output image will have half the height of the input map.</p> +output image will have half the height of the input map. </dd> <dt><b>-nomix</b></dt> <dd> <p>Default behaviour is that color blending is applied in between two adjacent rows. If you specify the -nomix parameter there is no blending. The consequence is a banding at the top and bottom of the map. With this option, -the output map will also consist of exactly the same colors as the input.</p> +the output map will also consist of exactly the same colors as the input. </dd> <dt><b>-verbose</b> and <b>-vverbose</b></dt> <dd> <p>This parameter outputs some additional information. If you double the 'v', it will output debug data about the lat/long degree and Mercator -conversions.</p> +conversions. </dd> </dl> <h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<b><a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/pnm.html">pnm</a></b> and -<b><a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/pamscale.html">pamscale</a></b> -<b><a href="http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/ppmglobe.html">ppmglobe</a></b> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> and +<b><a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a></b> +<b><a href="ppmglobe.html">ppmglobe</a></b> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<p><b>pnmmercator</b> was new in Netpbm 10.49 (December 2009).</p> +<p><b>pnmmercator</b> was new in Netpbm 10.49 (December 2009). <h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> <p><a href="mailto:willem@schaik.com">Willem van Schaik</a> (of <b>pnmtopng</b>/<b>pngtopnm</b> fame) wrote this program in October 2009 and -suggested it for inclusion in Netpbm.</p> +suggested it for inclusion in Netpbm. <hr> <h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> <ul> <li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> -</li><li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> -</li><li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> -</li><li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> -</li><li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> -</li><li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> -</li> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> </ul> </body> </html> diff --git a/pnmmontage.html b/pnmmontage.html index 29b3d6ac..4fdfe2c3 100644 --- a/pnmmontage.html +++ b/pnmmontage.html @@ -1,32 +1,31 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmmontage User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmmontage</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmmontage User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmmontage</h1> Updated: 22 November 2012 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmmontage - create a montage of PNM images -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmmontage</B> +<b>pnmmontage</b> -[<B>-header=</B><I>headerfile</I>] +[<b>-header=</b><i>headerfile</i>] -[<B>-quality=</B><I>n</I>] +[<b>-quality=</b><i>n</i>] -[<B>-prefix=</B><I>prefix</I>] +[<b>-prefix=</b><i>prefix</i>] -[<B>-0</B>|<B>-1</B>|<B>-2</B>|<B>...</B>|<B>-9</B>] +[<b>-0</b>|<b>-1</b>|<b>-2</b>|<b>...</b>|<b>-9</b>] [<b>-data=</b><i>filename</i>] -<i>pnmfile</I>... +<i>pnmfile</i>... -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -36,11 +35,16 @@ composite image. <p>Areas of the output that cannot be occupied by an image are black. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmmontage</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><b>-data=</b><i>filename</i> +<dt><b>-data=</b><i>filename</i> <dd>This option causes <b>pnmmontage</b> to write a file that describes in machine-readable form the positions of the original images within @@ -70,9 +74,9 @@ image) <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.6 (July 2002). -<DT><B>-header=</B><i>filename</i> +<dt><b>-header=</b><i>filename</i> -<DD>Tells <B>pnmmontage</B> to write a C header file of the locations +<dd>Tells <b>pnmmontage</b> to write a C header file of the locations of the original images within the packed image. Each original image generates four #defines within the packed file: xxxX, xxxY, xxxSZX, and xxxSZY, where xxx is the name of the file, converted to all @@ -98,39 +102,39 @@ specifies the total size of the montage image. </tt> </pre> -<DT><B>-prefix</B> +<dt><b>-prefix</b> -<DD>Tells <B>pnmmontage</B> to use the specified prefix on all of the +<dd>Tells <b>pnmmontage</b> to use the specified prefix on all of the #defines it generates. -<DT><B>-quality</B> +<dt><b>-quality</b> -<DD>Before attempting to place the subimages, <B>pnmmontage</B> will +<dd>Before attempting to place the subimages, <b>pnmmontage</b> will calculate a minimum possible area for the montage; this is either the total of the areas of all the subimages, or the width of the widest subimage times the height of the tallest subimage, whichever is -greater. <B>pnmmontage</B> then initiates a problem-space search to +greater. <b>pnmmontage</b> then initiates a problem-space search to find the best packing; if it finds a solution that is (at least) as good as the minimum area times the quality as a percent, it will break -out of the search. Thus, <B>-quality=100</B> will find the best possible +out of the search. Thus, <b>-quality=100</b> will find the best possible solution; however, it may take a very long time to do so. The default -is <B>-quality=200.</B> +is <b>-quality=200.</b> -<DT><B>-0</b>, <b>-1</b>, ... <b>-9</B> +<dt><b>-0</b>, <b>-1</b>, ... <b>-9</b> -<DD>These options control the quality at a higher level than -<B>-quality</B>; <B>-0</B> is the worst quality (pick the first -solution found), while <B>-9</B> is the best quality (perform an +<dd>These options control the quality at a higher level than +<b>-quality</b>; <b>-0</b> is the worst quality (pick the first +solution found), while <b>-9</b> is the best quality (perform an exhaustive search of problem space for the absolute best packing). The higher the number, the slower the computation. The default is -<B>-5</B>. +<b>-5</b>. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="notes">NOTES</H2> +<h2 id="notes">NOTES</h2> -<p>Using <B>-9</B> is very slow on all but the smallest image sets. +<p>Using <b>-9</b> is very slow on all but the smallest image sets. <p>The minimum area arrangement is often not a convenient shape. For example, it might be a tall, thin column of images, when you'd rather @@ -139,41 +143,41 @@ can include a strut image - a black image that wide and one pixel high. Similarly, you can use a vertical strut to force a minimum height. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmindex.html">pnmindex</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmindex.html">pnmindex</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pgm.html">pgm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pnmmontage</b> was new in Netpbm 9.10 (January 2001). -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 2000 by Ben Olmstead. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#notes">NOTES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#notes">NOTES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmpsnr.html b/pnmpsnr.html index 5294ec9a..2d8fa03a 100644 --- a/pnmpsnr.html +++ b/pnmpsnr.html @@ -1,22 +1,21 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmpsnr User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmpsnr</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmpsnr User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmpsnr</h1> Updated: 06 January 2018 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmpsnr - compute the difference between two images (the PSNR) -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmpsnr</B> +<b>pnmpsnr</b> -[<I>pnmfile1</I>] +[<i>pnmfile1</i>] -[<I>pnmfile2</I>] +[<i>pnmfile2</i>] [<b>-rgb</b>] [<b>-machine</b>] @@ -26,13 +25,13 @@ pnmpsnr - compute the difference between two images (the PSNR) [<b>-target2=</b><i>n</i>] [<b>-target3=</b><i>n</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviations of options are acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviations of options are acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -44,20 +43,20 @@ compression papers to rate the distortion between original and decoded image. <p><b>pnmpsnr</b> either prints these values or compares them to thresholds you specify. -<P>The PSNR of a given component is the ratio of the maximum mean square +<p>The PSNR of a given component is the ratio of the maximum mean square difference of component values that could exist between the two images (a measure of the information content in an image) to the actual mean square difference for the two subject images. It is expressed as a decibel value. -<P>The mean square difference of a component for two images is the +<p>The mean square difference of a component for two images is the mean square difference of the component value, comparing each pixel with the pixel in the same position of the other image. For the purposes of this computation, components are normalized to the scale [0..1]. -<P>The maximum mean square difference is identically 1. +<p>The maximum mean square difference is identically 1. -<P>So the higher the PSNR, the closer the images are. A luminance +<p>So the higher the PSNR, the closer the images are. A luminance PSNR of 20 means the mean square difference of the luminances of the pixels is 100 times less than the maximum possible difference, i.e. 0.01. @@ -66,7 +65,7 @@ i.e. 0.01. metric is a mean. But "peak signal to noise ratio" is for some reason the common term for this measurement. -<P>If the inputs are PBM or PGM, <B>pnmpsnr</B> computes the PSNR of the +<p>If the inputs are PBM or PGM, <b>pnmpsnr</b> computes the PSNR of the luminance only. Otherwise, it computes three separate PSNRs: either the luminance, and chrominance (Cb and Cr) components of the colors or the red, green, and blue components. @@ -85,23 +84,28 @@ exceed targets you specify. machine-friendly form (see <b>-machine</b>). -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmpsnr</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-rgb</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-rgb</b> -<DD>This option causes <b>pnmpsnr</b> to compare the red, green, and blue +<dd>This option causes <b>pnmpsnr</b> to compare the red, green, and blue components of the color rather than the luminance and chrominance components. It has no effect on a monotone image. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.71 (June 2015). -<DT><B>-machine</B> +<dt><b>-machine</b> -<DD>This option causes <b>pnmpsnr</b> to report the PSNRs in machine-friendly +<dd>This option causes <b>pnmpsnr</b> to report the PSNRs in machine-friendly form, so another program can easily use the information. -<P>The output is a single line. It contains one floating point decimal number +<p>The output is a single line. It contains one floating point decimal number for each color component, with a single space between every two. (This means there are either 1 or 3 numbers). For the YCbCr color space (no <b>-rgb</b>), they are in the order Y, Cb, Cr. For the RGB color space (<b>-rgb</b>), they @@ -186,17 +190,17 @@ single target for use on the monotone images. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmremap.html b/pnmremap.html index 7548ad48..a1d0005f 100644 --- a/pnmremap.html +++ b/pnmremap.html @@ -1,43 +1,42 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmremap User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmremap</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmremap User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmremap</h1> Updated: 13 November 2014 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmremap - replace colors in a PNM image with colors from another set -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmremap</B> +<b>pnmremap</b> -<B>-mapfile=</B><I>palettefile</I> +<b>-mapfile=</b><i>palettefile</i> -[<B>-floyd</B>|<B>-fs</B>|<B>-nfloyd</B>|<B>-nofs</B>] +[<b>-floyd</b>|<b>-fs</b>|<b>-nfloyd</b>|<b>-nofs</b>] {[<b>-norandom</b>]|<b>randomseed=</b><i>n</i>} -[<B>-firstisdefault</B>] +[<b>-firstisdefault</b>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<B>-missingcolor=</B><I>colorspec</I>] +[<b>-missingcolor=</b><i>colorspec</i>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or an equals sign between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><B>pnmremap</B> replaces the colors in an input image with those +<p><b>pnmremap</b> replaces the colors in an input image with those from a palette you specify. Where colors in the input are present in the palette, they just stay the same in the output. But where the input contains a color that is not in the palette, <b>pnmremap</b> @@ -57,12 +56,12 @@ input (for another kind of dithering, see <b>ppmdither</b>). </ul> -<P>Two reasons to use this program are: 1) you want to reduce the +<p>Two reasons to use this program are: 1) you want to reduce the number of colors in the input image; and 2) you need to feed the image to something that can handle only certain colors. -<P>To reduce colors, you can generate the palette with -<B>pnmcolormap</B>. +<p>To reduce colors, you can generate the palette with +<b>pnmcolormap</b>. <p>By default, <b>pnmremap</b> maps an input color that is not in the palette to the closest color that <em>is</em> in the palette. Closest @@ -141,17 +140,17 @@ pnmcolormap testimg.ppm 256 >palette.ppm pnmremap -map=palette.ppm testimg.ppm >reduced_testimg.ppm </pre> -<P>To limit colors to a certain set, a typical example is to create an +<p>To limit colors to a certain set, a typical example is to create an image for posting on the World Wide Web, where different browsers know different colors. But all browsers are supposed to know the 216 "web safe" colors which are essentially all the colors you can represent in a PPM image with a maxval of 5. So you can do this: -<PRE> +<pre> pamseq 3 5 >websafe.pam pnmremap -map=websafe.pam testimg.ppm >websafe_testimg.ppm -</PRE> +</pre> <p>Another useful palette is one for the 8 color IBM TTL color set, which you can create with @@ -163,30 +162,35 @@ pamseq 3 1 >ibmttl.pam just use the second one as the palette. You don't have to reduce it down to only one pixel of each color, just use it as is. -<P>The output image has the same type and maxval as the palette image. +<p>The output image has the same type and maxval as the palette image. -<H2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</H2> +<h2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</h2> -<P>There is one parameter, which is required: The file specification of +<p>There is one parameter, which is required: The file specification of the input PNM file. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmremap</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DT><B>-mapfile=</B><i>palettefilename</i> -<DD> +<dl compact> + +<dt><b>-mapfile=</b><i>palettefilename</i> +<dd> This names the file that contains the palette image. -<P>This option is mandatory. +<p>This option is mandatory. -<DT><B>-floyd</B> -<DT><B>-fs</B> -<DT><B>-nofloyd</B> -<DT><B>-nofs</B> +<dt><b>-floyd</b> +<dt><b>-fs</b> +<dt><b>-nofloyd</b> +<dt><b>-nofs</b> -<DD> +<dd> These options determine whether <b>pnmremap</b> does Floyd-Steinberg dithering. Without Floyd-Steinberg, <b>pnmremap</b> selects the output color of a pixel based on the color of only the corresponding input pixel. With @@ -207,10 +211,10 @@ unmodified quantization has banding or other artifacts, especially when going to a small number of colors such as the above IBM set. However, it does take substantially more CPU time. -<P><B>-fs</B> is a synonym for <B>-floyd</B>. <B>-nofs</B> is a -synonym for <B>-nofloyd</B>. +<p><b>-fs</b> is a synonym for <b>-floyd</b>. <b>-nofs</b> is a +synonym for <b>-nofloyd</b>. -<P>The default is <B>-nofloyd</B>. +<p>The default is <b>-nofloyd</b>. <p>Before Netpbm 10.46 (March 2009), dithering doesn't work quite as you expect if the color map has a lower maxval than the input. <b>pnmremap</b> @@ -262,51 +266,51 @@ at random, adding another level of randomness to the dithering. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.82 (March 2018). -<DT><B>-firstisdefault</B> +<dt><b>-firstisdefault</b> -<DD>This tells <b>pnmremap</b> to map any input color that is not in +<dd>This tells <b>pnmremap</b> to map any input color that is not in the palette to the first color in the palette (the color of the pixel in the top left corner of the palette image) <p>See <a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a>. -<P>If you specify <B>-firstisdefault</B>, the maxval of your input +<p>If you specify <b>-firstisdefault</b>, the maxval of your input must match the maxval of your palette image. -<DT><B>-missingcolor=</B><I>colorspec</I> +<dt><b>-missingcolor=</b><i>colorspec</i> -<DD>This specifies the default color for <b>pnmremap</b> to map to a -color in the input image that isn't in the palette. <I>color</I> may +<dd>This specifies the default color for <b>pnmremap</b> to map to a +color in the input image that isn't in the palette. <i>color</i> may or may not be in the palette image; it is part of the palette regardless. -<P><i>colorspec</i> is as described for +<p><i>colorspec</i> is as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. -<P>If you specify <B>-missingcolor</B>, the maxval of your input must +<p>If you specify <b>-missingcolor</b>, the maxval of your input must match the maxval of your palette image. -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Display helpful messages about the mapping process. +<dd>Display helpful messages about the mapping process. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmcolormap.html">pnmcolormap</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamlookup.html">pamlookup</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmquantall.html">ppmquantall</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmdither.html">ppmdither</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmquant.html">ppmquant</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamseq.html">pamseq</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="pnmcolormap.html">pnmcolormap</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamlookup.html">pamlookup</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmquantall.html">ppmquantall</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmdither.html">ppmdither</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmquant.html">ppmquant</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamseq.html">pamseq</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pnmremap</b> first appeared in Netpbm 9.23 (January 2002). Before that, its function was available only as part of the function @@ -317,25 +321,25 @@ Netpbm 9.23 split it out into two separate programs: <b>pnmquant</b> with a program that simply calls <b>pnmcolormap</b> and <b>pnmremap</b>. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> <ul> - <LI><A HREF="#mismatch">Palette/Image Type Mismatch</A> - <LI><A HREF="#multiple">Multiple Image Stream</A> - <LI><A HREF="#example">Examples</A> + <li><a href="#mismatch">Palette/Image Type Mismatch</a> + <li><a href="#multiple">Multiple Image Stream</a> + <li><a href="#example">Examples</a> </ul> -<LI><A HREF="#parameters">PARAMETERS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmshear.html b/pnmshear.html index abdff36f..15e2faa2 100644 --- a/pnmshear.html +++ b/pnmshear.html @@ -1,28 +1,27 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmshear User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmshear</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmshear User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmshear</h1> Updated: 22 March 2020 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmshear - shear a PNM image by a specified angle -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmshear</B> +<b>pnmshear</b> -[<B>-noantialias</B>] [<B>-background=</B><I>color</I>] -<I>angle</I> [<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<b>-noantialias</b>] [<b>-background=</b><i>color</i>] +<i>angle</i> [<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or equals signs between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -31,46 +30,51 @@ specified angle and produce a PNM image as output. If the input file is in color, the output will be too, otherwise it will be grayscale. The angle is in degrees (floating point), and measures this: -<PRE> +<pre> +-------+ +-------+ | | |\ \ | OLD | | \ NEW \ | | |an\ \ +-------+ |gle+-------+ -</PRE> +</pre> If the angle is negative, it shears the other way: -<PRE> +<pre> +-------+ |-an+-------+ | | |gl/ / | OLD | |e/ NEW / | | |/ / +-------+ +-------+ -</PRE> +</pre> The angle should not get too close to 90 or -90, or the resulting image will be unreasonably wide. In fact, if it gets too close, the width will be so large that <b>pnmshear</b> cannot do computations in the word sizes it uses, and the program detects this and fails. -<P><b>pnmshear</b> does the shearing by looping over the source pixels +<p><b>pnmshear</b> does the shearing by looping over the source pixels and distributing fractions to each of the destination pixels. This has an "anti-aliasing" effect - it avoids jagged edges and similar artifacts. However, it also means that the original colors in the image are modified and there are typically more of them than you started with. If you need to keep precisely the same set of colors, -see the <B>-noantialias</B> option. If the expanded palette is a +see the <b>-noantialias</b> option. If the expanded palette is a problem, you can run the result through <b>pnmquant</b>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmshear</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><b>-background=</b><i>color</i> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-background=</b><i>color</i> -<DD>This determines the color of the background on which the sheared image +<dd>This determines the color of the background on which the sheared image sits. -<P>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a +<p>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. @@ -89,7 +93,7 @@ of synthesizing output pixels from multiple input pixels. The latter could cause the output to contain colors that are not in the input, which may not be desirable. It also probably makes the output contain a large number of colors. If you need a small number of colors, but it doesn't matter if they -are the exact ones from the input, consider using <b>pnmquant</B> on the +are the exact ones from the input, consider using <b>pnmquant</b> on the output instead of using <b>-noantialias</b>. <p>Note that to ensure the output does not contain colors that are not @@ -98,27 +102,26 @@ in the input, you also must consider the background color. See the </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pnmrotate.html">pnmrotate</A>, -<A HREF="pamflip.html">pamflip</A>, -<A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<a href="pnmrotate.html">pnmrotate</a>, +<a href="pamflip.html">pamflip</a>, +<a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmsmooth.html b/pnmsmooth.html index 7acd7bb0..567bfe11 100644 --- a/pnmsmooth.html +++ b/pnmsmooth.html @@ -1,26 +1,25 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmsmooth User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmsmooth</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmsmooth User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmsmooth</h1> Updated: 19 December 2009 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<h2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmsmooth - smooth out an image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmsmooth</B> +<b>pnmsmooth</b> [<b>-width=</b><i>cols</i>] [<b>-height=</b><i>rows</i>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] [<b>-size</b>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] [<b>-size</b>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviations of options is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -28,9 +27,14 @@ space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. average of its width X height neighbors. It is implemented as a progam that invokes <b>pnmconvol</b> with an appropriate convolution matrix. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmsmooth</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> <dt><b>-width=</b><i>cols</i> <dt><b>-height=</b><i>rows</i> @@ -46,9 +50,9 @@ necessary). <p>These options were new in Netpbm 10.32 (February 2006). Before that, use <b>-size</b>. -<DT><B>-size</b> +<dt><b>-size</b> -<DD>This deprecated option exists in current Netpbm for backward +<dd>This deprecated option exists in current Netpbm for backward compatibility. It was obsoleted by <b>-width</b> and <b>-height</b> in Netpbm 10.32 (February 2006). @@ -69,9 +73,9 @@ mean the same in current <b>pnmsmooth</b> as in old <b>pnmsmooth</b>: </kbd> </pre> -<DT><B>-dump=</b><i>dumpfile</i> +<dt><b>-dump=</b><i>dumpfile</i> -<DD>This options makes <b>pnmsmooth</b> only show you the +<dd>This options makes <b>pnmsmooth</b> only show you the convolution matrix. It writes to Standard Output a <b>pnmconvol</b> <b>-matrix</b> option value that represents the matrix. It does not invoke <b>pnmconvol</b> and does not produce an output image. @@ -81,14 +85,14 @@ It takes a file name as a value, and it writes to that file the convolution matrix as a PGM file (as used to be the normal input for <b>pnmconvol</b>). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<a href="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -121,14 +125,14 @@ modified <b>pnmsmooth</b> to take advantage of the new features of <b>pnmconvol</b>, which <b>pnmsmooth</b> uses internally, the information needed to implement <b>-dump</b> was no longer available in the program). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmstitch.html b/pnmstitch.html index c87067a5..3caea690 100644 --- a/pnmstitch.html +++ b/pnmstitch.html @@ -1,18 +1,17 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><title>Pnmstitch User Manual</title></HEAD> - -<BODY> -<H1>pnmstitch</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmstitch User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmstitch</h1> Updated: July 2002 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmstitch - stitch together two panoramic (side-by-side) photographs -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmstitch</B> +<b>pnmstitch</b> [ [<i>left_filespec</i>] <i>right_filespec</i> | <br> @@ -29,15 +28,15 @@ pnmstitch - stitch together two panoramic (side-by-side) photographs [<b>-output=</b><i>output_filespec</i>] [<b>-verbose</b>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pnmstitch</b> stitches together two panoramic photographs. This +<p><b>pnmstitch</b> stitches together two panoramic photographs. This means if you have photographs of the left and right side of something that is too big for a single camera frame, <b>pnmstitch</b> can join them into one wide picture. @@ -69,59 +68,64 @@ both the argument and the option. If you specify neither, the output goes to Standard Output. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmstitch</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-width=<i>width</i></B> -<DT><B>-height=<i>height</i></B> -<DT><B>-xrightpos=<i>column</i></B> -<DT><B>-yrightpos=<i>row</i></B> -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-width=<i>width</i></b> +<dt><b>-height=<i>height</i></b> +<dt><b>-xrightpos=<i>column</i></b> +<dt><b>-yrightpos=<i>row</i></b> +<dd> These are constraints on where <b>pnmstitch</b> stitches the images together. For the <b>LinearSliver</b> method, <i>column</i> and <i>row</i> tell what location in the right hand image matches up to the top right corner of the left hand image. -<DT><b>-stitcher=</b>{<b>RotateSliver</b>,<b>BiLinearSliver</b>, +<dt><b>-stitcher=</b>{<b>RotateSliver</b>,<b>BiLinearSliver</b>, <b>LinearSliver</b>} -<DD>The default is <b>RotateSliver</b>. +<dd>The default is <b>RotateSliver</b>. <dt><b>-filter=</b>{<b>LineAtATime</b>,<b>HorizontalCrop</b>} -<DD>No details available. +<dd>No details available. <dt><b>-output=</b><i>output_filespec</i> -<DD>Name of output file. If you don't specify this option, the output image +<dd>Name of output file. If you don't specify this option, the output image goes to Standard Output. -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>This option causes <b>pnmstitch</b> to issue messages to Standard Error +<dd>This option causes <b>pnmstitch</b> to issue messages to Standard Error about the stitching process. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamflip.html">pamflip</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamflip.html">pamflip</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p>This program was added to Netpbm in Release 10.7 (August 2002). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmtopalm.html b/pnmtopalm.html index d9279077..7e2f383a 100644 --- a/pnmtopalm.html +++ b/pnmtopalm.html @@ -1,56 +1,56 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmtopalm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmtopalm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmtopalm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmtopalm</h1> Updated: 25 August 2017 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmtopalm - convert a PNM image to a Palm Bitmap -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmtopalm</B> +<b>pnmtopalm</b> -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<B>-depth=</B><I>N</I>] +[<b>-depth=</b><i>N</i>] -[<B>-maxdepth=</B><I>N</I>] +[<b>-maxdepth=</b><i>N</i>] -[<B>-colormap</B>] +[<b>-colormap</b>] -[<B>-transparent=</B><I>colorspec</I>] +[<b>-transparent=</b><i>colorspec</i>] -[<B>-density=</B><i>N</i>] +[<b>-density=</b><i>N</i>] -[<B>-offset</B>] +[<b>-offset</b>] -[<B>-withdummy</B>] +[<b>-withdummy</b>] -<BR> +<br> -[<B>-scanline_compression</B> | <B>-rle_compression</B> | -<B>-packbits_compression</B>] +[<b>-scanline_compression</b> | <b>-rle_compression</b> | +<b>-packbits_compression</b>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pnmtopalm</b> reads a PNM image as input, from Standard Input or -<I>pnmfile</I> and produces a Palm Bitmap as output. +<i>pnmfile</i> and produces a Palm Bitmap as output. -<P>Palm Bitmap files are either grayscale files with 1, 2, or 4 bits per +<p>Palm Bitmap files are either grayscale files with 1, 2, or 4 bits per pixel, or mapped color files with 8 bit per pixel, or a direct color file with -16 bits per pixel, and <B>pnmtopalm</B> chooses this color depth based on the +16 bits per pixel, and <b>pnmtopalm</b> chooses this color depth based on the maxval and number of colors in the input, unless you specify a depth (bits per pixel) with <b>-depth</b>. You can also specify a maximum depth with <b>-maxdepth</b> to partially constrain <b>pnmtopalm</b>'s choice. Input @@ -58,9 +58,9 @@ files must have an appropriate number and set of colors for the selected output constraints. <p>This often means that you should run the PNM image through -<B>pnmquant</B> or <b>pnmremap</b> before you pass it to -<B>pnmtopalm</B>. Netpbm comes with several colormap files you can -use with <B>pnmremap</B> for this purpose. They are +<b>pnmquant</b> or <b>pnmremap</b> before you pass it to +<b>pnmtopalm</b>. Netpbm comes with several colormap files you can +use with <b>pnmremap</b> for this purpose. They are <i>palmgray2.map</i> (4 shades of gray for a depth of 2), <i>palmgray4.map</i> (16 shades of gray for a depth of 4), and <i>palmcolor8.map</i> (232 colors in default Palm colormap). In a @@ -84,7 +84,6 @@ number of bits per pixel explicitly with <b>-depth</b>. <b>-maxdepth</b> has the same effect as <b>-depth</b>. If you specify more than 8 bits per pixel with either of these, <b>pnmtopalm</b> fails. - <h3 id="version">Palm Bitmap Version</h3> <p><b>pnmtopalm</b> generates a Version 0, 1, 2, or 3 Palm Bitmap. @@ -113,16 +112,21 @@ later can read a Version 1 bitmap. Palm OS 3.5 and later can read a Version 2 bitmap. To read a Version 3 bitmap, you need Palm OS Garnet or a handheld running the High Density Display Feature Set. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmtopalm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-verbose</B> -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> +<dd> Display the format of the output file. -<DT><B>-depth=</B><I>N</I> -<DD> -Produce a file of depth <I>N</I>, where <I>N</I> must be either 1, 2, +<dt><b>-depth=</b><i>N</i> +<dd> +Produce a file of depth <i>N</i>, where <i>N</i> must be either 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16. Because the default Palm 8-bit colormap is not grayscale, if the input is a grayscale or monochrome image, the output will never be more than 4 bits deep, regardless of the @@ -132,15 +136,15 @@ higher). However, the 16-bit direct color format is also compatible with the various PalmOS 3.x versions used in the Handspring Visor, so these images may also work in that device. -<DT><B>-maxdepth=</B><I>N</I> -<DD> -Produce a file of minimal depth, but in any case less than <I>N</I> +<dt><b>-maxdepth=</b><i>N</i> +<dd> +Produce a file of minimal depth, but in any case less than <i>N</i> bits wide. If you specify 16-bit, the output will always be 16-bit direct color. -<DT><B>-offset</B> -<DD> -Set the <B>nextDepthOffset</B> field in the palm file header to indicate +<dt><b>-offset</b> +<dd> +Set the <b>nextDepthOffset</b> field in the palm file header to indicate the end of the file (and pad the end of the file to 4 bytes, since <b>nextDepthOffset</b> can point only to 4 byte boundaries). @@ -191,16 +195,16 @@ since it doesn't make any sense otherwise. <p><b>-withdummy</b> was new in Netpbm 10.27 (March 2005). -<DT><B>-colormap</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-colormap</b> +<dd> Build a custom colormap and include it in the output file. This is -not recommended by Palm, for efficiency reasons. Otherwise, <B>pnmtopalm</B> +not recommended by Palm, for efficiency reasons. Otherwise, <b>pnmtopalm</b> uses the default Palm colormap for color output. -<DT><B>-transparent=</B><I>colorspec</I> +<dt><b>-transparent=</b><i>colorspec</i> -<DD> -Marks <EM>one</EM> particular color as fully transparent. +<dd> +Marks <em>one</em> particular color as fully transparent. <p><i>colorspec</i> is as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> @@ -208,20 +212,20 @@ library routine</a>. <p>Transparency works only on Palm OS 3.5 and higher. -<DT><B>-scanline_compression</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-scanline_compression</b> +<dd> Specifies that the output Palm bitmap will use the Palm scanline compression scheme. Scanline compression works only in Palm OS 2.0 and higher. -<DT><B>-rle_compression</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-rle_compression</b> +<dd> Specifies that the output Palm bitmap will use the Palm RLE compression scheme. RLE compression works only with Palm OS 3.5 and higher. -<DT><B>-packbits_compression</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-packbits_compression</b> +<dd> Specifies that the output Palm bitmap will use the Palm packbits compression scheme. Packbits compression works only with Palm OS 4.0 and higher. @@ -248,26 +252,24 @@ The allowable values are: could not generate Version 3 Palm Bitmaps, so there was no such thing as density. -</DL> - +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="palmtopnm.html">palmtopnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pdbimgtopam.html">pdbimgtopam</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</A></B>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<b><a href="palmtopnm.html">palmtopnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pdbimgtopam.html">pdbimgtopam</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</a></b>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> +<h2 id="notes">NOTES</h2> -<H2 id="notes">NOTES</H2> - -<P>Palm Bitmaps may contains multiple renditions of the same bitmap, +<p>Palm Bitmaps may contains multiple renditions of the same bitmap, in different depths. To construct an N-multiple-rendition Palm Bitmap -with <B>pnmtopalm</B>, first construct renditions 1 through N-1 using -the <B>-offset</B> option, then construct the Nth image without the -<B>-offset</B> option. Then concatenate the individual renditions -together in a single file using <B>cat</B>. +with <b>pnmtopalm</b>, first construct renditions 1 through N-1 using +the <b>-offset</b> option, then construct the Nth image without the +<b>-offset</b> option. Then concatenate the individual renditions +together in a single file using <b>cat</b>. <p>If you will include both high density and low density renditions, put the high density images last and when you create the last of the @@ -277,26 +279,27 @@ low density images, use the <b>-withdummy</b> option. color bitmap, this program generates an invalid bitmap. -<H2 id="authors">AUTHORS</H2> +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> This program was originally written as ppmtoTbmp.c, by Ian Goldberg and George Caswell. It was completely re-written by Bill Janssen to add color, compression, and transparency function. -<BR> +<br> Copyright 1995-2001 by Ian Goldberg, George Caswell, and Bill Janssen. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#version">PALM BITMAP VERSION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#notes">NOTES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">NOTES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#authors">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> + <ul> + <li><a href="#version">Palm Bitmap Version</a> + </ul> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#notes">NOTES</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmtopclxl.html b/pnmtopclxl.html index 48843863..6abd5305 100644 --- a/pnmtopclxl.html +++ b/pnmtopclxl.html @@ -1,17 +1,17 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmtopclxl User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmtopclxl</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmtopclxl User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmtopclxl</h1> Updated: 22 March 2011 -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmtopclxl - convert a PNM image to an HP LaserJet PCL XL printer stream -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmtopclxl</b> +<b>pnmtopclxl</b> <br>{<br> [<b>-dpi=</b><i>N</i>] [<b>-xoffs=</b><i>N</i>] @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -58,9 +58,14 @@ and grayscale. file, concatenated in the same order as the input images. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmtopclxl</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + +<dl compact> <dt><b>-dpi=</b><i>N</i> <dd>This option selects the resolution of the image (not the printer!). @@ -181,10 +186,10 @@ with <b>-embedded</b>. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.54 (March 2011). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> <a href="ppmtolj.html"><b>ppmtolj</b></a>, <a href="pbmtolj.html"><b>pbmtolj</b></a>, @@ -193,20 +198,20 @@ with <b>-embedded</b>. <a href="thinkjettopbm.html"><b>thinkjettopbm</b></a>, <a href="ppm.html"><b>ppm</b></a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pnmtopclxl</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.6 (July 2002). It was contributed by <a href="mailto:cip307@cip.physik.uni-wuerzburg.de">Jochen Karrer</a>. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmtops.html b/pnmtops.html index 58d9b894..422dd491 100644 --- a/pnmtops.html +++ b/pnmtops.html @@ -1,45 +1,44 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmtops User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmtops</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pnmtops User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmtops</h1> Updated: 20 April 2018 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmtops - convert PNM image to Postscript -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmtops</B> -[<B>-scale=</B><I>s</I>] -[<B>-dpi=</B><I>N</I>[<B>x</B><I>N</I>]] -[<B>-imagewidth=</B><I>n</I>] -[<B>-imageheight=</B><I>n</I>] -[<B>-width=</B><I>N</I>] -[<B>-height=</B><I>N</I>] -[<B>-equalpixels</B>] +<b>pnmtops</b> +[<b>-scale=</b><i>s</i>] +[<b>-dpi=</b><i>N</i>[<b>x</b><i>N</i>]] +[<b>-imagewidth=</b><i>n</i>] +[<b>-imageheight=</b><i>n</i>] +[<b>-width=</b><i>N</i>] +[<b>-height=</b><i>N</i>] +[<b>-equalpixels</b>] [<b>-bitspersample=</b><i>N</i>] -[<B>-turn</B>|<B>-noturn</B>] -[<B>-rle</B>|<B>-runlength</B>] +[<b>-turn</b>|<b>-noturn</b>] +[<b>-rle</b>|<b>-runlength</b>] [<b>-flate</b>] [<b>-ascii85</b>] -[<B>-nocenter</B>|<b>-center</b>] -[<B>-nosetpage</B>|<b>-setpage</b>] +[<b>-nocenter</b>|<b>-center</b>] +[<b>-nosetpage</b>|<b>-setpage</b>] [<b>-level=</b><i>N</i>] [<b>-dict</b>] [<b>-vmreclaim</b>] [<b>-psfilter</b>] -[<B>-noshowpage</B>] +[<b>-noshowpage</b>] [<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -50,18 +49,18 @@ Encapsulated Postscript (EPSF) as output. standard typography in the Netpbm manual, so capitalize only the first letter). -<P>If the input file is in color (PPM), <B>pnmtops</B> generates a +<p>If the input file is in color (PPM), <b>pnmtops</b> generates a color Postscript file. Some Postscript interpreters can't handle color Postscript. If you have one of these you will need to run your -image through <B>ppmtopgm</B> first. +image through <b>ppmtopgm</b> first. -<P>If you specify no output dimensioning options, the output image is -dimensioned as if you had specified <B>-scale=1.0</B>, which means +<p>If you specify no output dimensioning options, the output image is +dimensioned as if you had specified <b>-scale=1.0</b>, which means approximately 72 pixels of the input image generate one inch of output (if that fits the page). -<P>Use <B>-imagewidth</B>, <B>-imageheight</B>, <B>-equalpixels</B>, -<B>-width</B>, <B>-height</B>, and <B>-scale</B> to adjust that. +<p>Use <b>-imagewidth</b>, <b>-imageheight</b>, <b>-equalpixels</b>, +<b>-width</b>, <b>-height</b>, and <b>-scale</b> to adjust that. <p>Each image in the input stream becomes one complete one-page Postscript program in the output. (This may not be the best way to create a multi-page @@ -102,32 +101,36 @@ http://www.tailrecursive.org/postscript/eps.html</a>. <p>Many of the ideas in <b>pnmtops</b> come from Dirk Krause's <b>bmeps</b>. See <a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a>. +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmtops</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-imagewidth</B>, <B>-imageheight</B> -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-imagewidth</b>, <b>-imageheight</b> +<dd> Tells how wide and high you want the image on the page, in inches. The aspect ratio of the image is preserved, so if you specify both of these, the image on the page will be the largest image that will fit within the box of those dimensions. -<P> +<p> If these dimensions are greater than the page size, you get Postscript output that runs off the page. -<P>You cannot use <B>imagewidth</B> or <B>imageheight</B> with -<B>-scale</B> or <B>-equalpixels</B>. +<p>You cannot use <b>imagewidth</b> or <b>imageheight</b> with +<b>-scale</b> or <b>-equalpixels</b>. -<DT><B>-equalpixels</B> +<dt><b>-equalpixels</b> -<DD> +<dd> This option causes the output image to have the same number of pixels as the input image. So if the output device is 600 dpi and your image is 3000 pixels wide, the output image would be 5 inches wide. -<P>You cannot use <B>-equalpixels</B> with <B>-imagewidth</B>, -<B>-imageheight</B>, or <B>-scale</B>. +<p>You cannot use <b>-equalpixels</b> with <b>-imagewidth</b>, +<b>-imageheight</b>, or <b>-scale</b>. <dt><b>-bitspersample=</b><i>N</i> @@ -144,79 +147,79 @@ case described above. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.51 (June 2010). -<DT><B>-scale</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-scale</b> +<dd> tells how big you want the image on the page. The value is the number of inches of output image that you want 72 pixels of the input to generate. -<P>But <B>pnmtops </B> rounds the number to something that is an +<p>But <b>pnmtops </b> rounds the number to something that is an integral number of output device pixels. E.g. if the output device is -300 dpi and you specify <B>-scale=1.0</B>, then 75 (not 72) pixels of +300 dpi and you specify <b>-scale=1.0</b>, then 75 (not 72) pixels of input becomes one inch of output (4 output pixels for each input -pixel). Note that the <B>-dpi</B> option tells <B>pnmtops</B> how +pixel). Note that the <b>-dpi</b> option tells <b>pnmtops</b> how many pixels per inch the output device generates. -<P>If the size so specified does not fit on the page (as measured -either by the <B>-width</B> and <B>-height</B> options or the default -page size of 8.5 inches by 11 inches), <B>pnmtops</B> ignores the -<B>-scale</B> option, issues a warning, and scales the image to fit on +<p>If the size so specified does not fit on the page (as measured +either by the <b>-width</b> and <b>-height</b> options or the default +page size of 8.5 inches by 11 inches), <b>pnmtops</b> ignores the +<b>-scale</b> option, issues a warning, and scales the image to fit on the page. -<DT><B>-dpi=</B><I>N</I>[<B>x</B><I>N</I>] +<dt><b>-dpi=</b><i>N</i>[<b>x</b><i>N</i>] -<DD> +<dd> -<P>This option specifies the dots per inch resolution of your output +<p>This option specifies the dots per inch resolution of your output device. The default is 300 dpi. In theory PostScript is device-independent and you don't have to worry about this, but in practice its raster rendering can have unsightly bands if the device pixels and the image pixels aren't in sync. -<P>Also this option is crucial to the working of the -<B>equalpixels</B> option. +<p>Also this option is crucial to the working of the +<b>equalpixels</b> option. -<P>If you specify <I>N</I><B>x</B><i>N</i>, the first number is the +<p>If you specify <i>N</i><b>x</b><i>N</i>, the first number is the horizontal resolution and the second number is the vertical -resolution. If you specify just a single number <I>N</I>, that is the +resolution. If you specify just a single number <i>N</i>, that is the resolution in both directions. -<DT><B>-width</B>, <b>-height</b> +<dt><b>-width</b>, <b>-height</b> -<DD> These options specify the dimensions, in inches, of the page on +<dd> These options specify the dimensions, in inches, of the page on which the output is to be printed. This can affect the size of the output image. -<P> +<p> The page size has no effect, however, when you specify the -<B>-imagewidth</B>, <B>-imageheight</B>, or <B>-equalpixels</B> options. +<b>-imagewidth</b>, <b>-imageheight</b>, or <b>-equalpixels</b> options. -<P>These options may also affect positioning of the image on the page and +<p>These options may also affect positioning of the image on the page and even the paper selected (or cut) by the printer/plotter when the -output is printed. See the <B>-nosetpage</B> option. +output is printed. See the <b>-nosetpage</b> option. -<P> +<p> The default is 8.5 inches by 11 inches. -<DT><B>-turn</B> +<dt><b>-turn</b> -<DT><B>-noturn</B> +<dt><b>-noturn</b> <dd>These options control whether the image gets turned 90 degrees. Normally, if an image fits the page better when turned (e.g. the image is wider than it is tall, but the page is taller than it is wide), it gets turned automatically to better fit the page. If you specify the -<B>-turn</B> option, <B>pnmtops </B> turns the image no matter what -its shape; If you specify <B>-noturn</B>, <B>pnmtops</B> does +<b>-turn</b> option, <b>pnmtops </b> turns the image no matter what +its shape; If you specify <b>-noturn</b>, <b>pnmtops</b> does <em>not</em> turn it no matter what its shape. -<DT><B>-rle</B> +<dt><b>-rle</b> -<DT><B>-runlength</B> +<dt><b>-runlength</b> <dd>These identical options tell <b>pnmtops</b> to use run length compression in encoding the image in the Postscript program. This may save time if the host-to-printer link is slow; but normally the -printer's processing time dominates, so <B>-rle</B> has no effect (and +printer's processing time dominates, so <b>-rle</b> has no effect (and in the absence of buffering, may make things slower). <p>This may, however, make the Postscript program considerable smaller. @@ -303,7 +306,7 @@ and uses the built-in Postscript filters <b>/ASCII85Decode</b>, <p>This option was new in Netbpm 10.27 (March 2005). Before that, <b>pnmtops</b> always used the custom <b>readstring</b>. -<P>The custom code can't do flate or ascii85 encoding, so you must use +<p>The custom code can't do flate or ascii85 encoding, so you must use <b>-psfilter</b> if you want those (see <b>-flate</b>, <b>-ascii85</b>). <dt><b>-level</b> @@ -315,7 +318,7 @@ so if you specify too low a level for your image and your options, <b>pnmtops</b> fails. For example, <b>pnmtops</b> cannot do a color image in Level 1. -<P>This option was new in Netpbm 10.27 (March 2005). Before that, +<p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.27 (March 2005). Before that, <b>pnmtops</b> always used Level 2. <dt><b>-dict</b> @@ -332,25 +335,25 @@ collection as it exits. <p>This option was new in Netbpm 10.27 (March 2005). -<DT><B>-nocenter</B> -<DD> - By default, <B>pnmtops</B> centers the image on the output page. - You can cause <B>pnmtops</B> to instead put the image against the - lower left corner of the page with the <B>-nocenter </B> +<dt><b>-nocenter</b> +<dd> + By default, <b>pnmtops</b> centers the image on the output page. + You can cause <b>pnmtops</b> to instead put the image against the + lower left corner of the page with the <b>-nocenter </b> option. This is useful for programs which can include PostScript files, but can't cope with pictures which are not positioned in the lower left corner. - <P> + <p> If you want to position an image on the page arbitrarily, use <b>pamcomp</b> to create an image of the full page with the image in question at the proper place and the rest of the page white, and use <b>pnmtops</b> to convert the composed result to Encapsulated Postscript. <p> - For backward compatibility, <B>pnmtops</B> accepts the option - <B>-center</B>, but it has no effect. + For backward compatibility, <b>pnmtops</b> accepts the option + <b>-center</b>, but it has no effect. -<DT><B>-setpage</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-setpage</b> +<dd> This causes <b>pnmtops</b> to include a "setpagedevice" directive in the output. This causes the output to violate specifications of EPSF encapsulated Postscript, but if you're not using it in an @@ -364,16 +367,16 @@ collection as it exits. January 2002, there was no way to include "setpagedevice" and neither the <b>-setpage</b> nor <b>-nosetpage</b> option existed. -<DT><B>-nosetpage</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-nosetpage</b> +<dd> This tells <b>pnmtops</b> not to include a "setpagedevice" directive in the output. This is the default, so the option has no effect. <p>See the <b>-setpage</b> option for the history of this option. -<DT><B>-noshowpage</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-noshowpage</b> +<dd> This tells <b>pnmtops</b> not to include a "showpage" directive in the output. By default, <b>pnmtops</b> includes a "showpage" at the end of the EPSF program. According to @@ -397,9 +400,9 @@ collection as it exits. This causes informational messages about the conversion process and result. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> <p>If the PNM image has a maxval greater than 255, <b>pnmtops</b> will produce output with 8 bits per sample resolution unless you specify @@ -407,7 +410,6 @@ produce output with 8 bits per sample resolution unless you specify format. <b>pnmtops</b>'s custom raster-generating code just doesn't know the 12 bit format. - <h2 id="applications">APPLICATIONS</h2> <p>You can use the Postscript output a number of ways. Many printers take @@ -425,7 +427,7 @@ device type. The program <b>ps2pdf</b> (distributed with Ghostscript) is a convenient way to run Ghostscript with <b>pdfwrite</b>. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> <p>Postscript is described in the <a href="http://www.adobe.com/products/postscript/pdfs/PLRM.pdf">Postscript @@ -438,35 +440,36 @@ from Netpbm and other formats to Encapsulated Postscript. to use LZW compression. <p> -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, -<B>gs</b>, -<B><A HREF="psidtopgm.html">psidtopgm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtolps.html">pbmtolps</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtoepsi.html">pbmtoepsi</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtopsg3.html">pbmtopsg3</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, +<b>gs</b>, +<b><a href="psidtopgm.html">psidtopgm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmtolps.html">pbmtolps</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmtoepsi.html">pbmtoepsi</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmtopsg3.html">pbmtopsg3</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</a></b>, <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p>Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<p>Modified November 1993 by Wolfgang Stuerzlinger, <A -HREF="mailto:wrzl@gup.uni-linz.ac.at">wrzl@gup.uni-linz.ac.at</A> +<p>Modified November 1993 by Wolfgang Stuerzlinger, <a +href="mailto:wrzl@gup.uni-linz.ac.at">wrzl@gup.uni-linz.ac.at</a> <p>The program was originally <b>pbmtops</b>. It became <b>pgmtops</b> in October 1988 and was merged with <b>ppmtops</b> to form <b>pnmtops</b> in January 1991. <b>ppmtops</b> came into being some time before September 1989. -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#applications">APPLICATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppm3d.html b/ppm3d.html index 8aa9edcc..738f3de1 100644 --- a/ppm3d.html +++ b/ppm3d.html @@ -1,27 +1,26 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppm3d User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppm3d</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppm3d User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppm3d</h1> Updated: 20 February 2007 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppm3d - convert two PPM images into an anaglyph (red/blue 3d glasses) PPM -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppm3d</B> +<b>ppm3d</b> [<b>-color</b>] [<b>-offset=</b><i>horizontal_offset</i>] -<I>leftppmfile</I> -<I>rightppmfile</I> +<i>leftppmfile</i> +<i>rightppmfile</i> <p> -Deprecated optional 3rd argument: <I>horizontal_offset</I> +Deprecated optional 3rd argument: <i>horizontal_offset</i> -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -55,7 +54,7 @@ that even though the components of light are coming in through different eyes, they mix in your brain to form the same sensation as if you were looking at the combined light with both eyes. -<P>The input PPMs must be the same dimensions. +<p>The input PPMs must be the same dimensions. <p>To make a different kind of stereogram, use <b>pamstereogram</b>. That makes a stereogram that you view without special glasses, just by @@ -74,6 +73,11 @@ is the only way to specify the offset. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppm3d</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + <dl> <dt><b>-offset=</b><i>horizontal_offset</i> @@ -105,23 +109,24 @@ stereogram. By default, it generates monochrome. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pamstereogram.html">pamstereogram</A> -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="pamstereogram.html">pamstereogram</a> +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1993 by David K. Drum. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#arguments">ARGUMENTS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmbrighten.html b/ppmbrighten.html index 7229bd64..d0ad0797 100644 --- a/ppmbrighten.html +++ b/ppmbrighten.html @@ -1,15 +1,15 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmbrighten User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmbrighten</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmbrighten User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmbrighten</h1> Updated: 12 January 2019 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmbrighten - change a PPM image's Saturation and Value -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <b>ppmbrighten</b> [<b>-normalize</b>] @@ -17,12 +17,12 @@ ppmbrighten - change a PPM image's Saturation and Value [<b>-value=</b>[<b>+</b>|<b>-</b><i>value_percent</i>]] <i>ppmfile</i> -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ a PAM image (such as a transparency channel) get passed through. <p>If you want to modify the Hues in the image, use <b>pamhue</b>. -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> <p>To double the Value of each pixel: <pre> ppmbrighten -value=100 @@ -97,23 +97,28 @@ ppmbrighten -value=100 ppmbrighten -saturation=+100 -value=-50 </pre> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL> -<DT><b>-value=</b><i>value_percent</i> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmbrighten</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>This option specifies the amount, as a per centage, by which you want +<dl> +<dt><b>-value=</b><i>value_percent</i> + +<dd>This option specifies the amount, as a per centage, by which you want to change the Value of each pixel. It may be negative. -<DT><b>-saturation=</b><i>value_percent</i> +<dt><b>-saturation=</b><i>value_percent</i> -<DD>This option specifies the amount, as a per centage, by which you want +<dd>This option specifies the amount, as a per centage, by which you want to change the Saturation of each pixel. It may be negative. -<DT><b>-normalize</b> +<dt><b>-normalize</b> -<DD>This option causes <b>ppmbrighten</b> to normalize contrast by linearly +<dd>This option causes <b>ppmbrighten</b> to normalize contrast by linearly remapping the Values of the pixels to cover the range 0 to 1. <p><b>ppmbrighten</b> applies the brightening that you specify with @@ -123,28 +128,28 @@ the <b>-value</b> option <em>after</em> the remapping. file (not a pipe) to use <b>-normalize</b>. If it isn't, the program fails with a bogus error message. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pnmnorm.html">pnmnorm</A>, -<A HREF="ppmdim.html">ppmdim</A>, -<A HREF="pamfunc.html">pamfunc</A>, -<A HREF="ppmflash.html">ppmflash</A>, -<A HREF="ppmflash.html">pambrighten</A>, -<A HREF="pamaltsat.html">pamaltsat</A>, -<A HREF="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</A>, -<A HREF="pnmgamma.html">pnmgamma</A>, -<A HREF="pamhue.html">pamhue</A>, -<A HREF="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="pnmnorm.html">pnmnorm</a>, +<a href="ppmdim.html">ppmdim</a>, +<a href="pamfunc.html">pamfunc</a>, +<a href="ppmflash.html">ppmflash</a>, +<a href="ppmflash.html">pambrighten</a>, +<a href="pamaltsat.html">pamaltsat</a>, +<a href="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</a>, +<a href="pnmgamma.html">pnmgamma</a>, +<a href="pamhue.html">pamhue</a>, +<a href="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Copyright (C) 1990 by Brian Moffet. Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<P> +<p> Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that @@ -152,15 +157,15 @@ copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmchange.html b/ppmchange.html index b8927ec9..50e35568 100644 --- a/ppmchange.html +++ b/ppmchange.html @@ -1,57 +1,56 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmchange User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmchange</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmchange User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmchange</h1> Updated: December 2016 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmchange - change all pixels of one color to another in a PPM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmchange</B> +<b>ppmchange</b> -[<B>-closeness=</B><I>closeness_percent</I>] -[<B>-remainder=</B><I>remainder_color</I>] -[<B>-closeok</b>] -[<I>oldcolor newcolor</I>] ... -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<b>-closeness=</b><i>closeness_percent</i>] +[<b>-remainder=</b><i>remainder_color</i>] +[<b>-closeok</b>] +[<i>oldcolor newcolor</i>] ... +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> -<PRE> +<pre> <b>ppmchange red blue redimage.ppm >blueimage.ppm</b> <b>ppmchange red red -remainder=black myimage.ppm >redblack.ppm</b> <b>ppmchange -closeness=10 white white black black</b> -</PRE> +</pre> -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ppmchange</b> reads a PPM image as input and changes all pixels of -color <I>oldcolor</I> to color <I>newcolor</I>. +color <i>oldcolor</i> to color <i>newcolor</i>. You may specify up to 256 oldcolor/newcolor pairs on the command line. -<B>ppmchange</B> leaves all colors not mentioned unchanged, unless you -specify the <B>-remainder</B> option, in which case they are all +<b>ppmchange</b> leaves all colors not mentioned unchanged, unless you +specify the <b>-remainder</b> option, in which case they are all changed to the single specified color. -<P>You can specify that colors similar, but not identical, to the ones +<p>You can specify that colors similar, but not identical, to the ones you specify get replaced by specifying a "closeness" factor. -<P>Specify the colors as described for the <a +<p>Specify the colors as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. -<P>If a pixel matches two different <I>oldcolor</I>s, <B>ppmchange</B> -replaces it with the <I>newcolor</I> of the leftmost specified one. +<p>If a pixel matches two different <i>oldcolor</i>s, <b>ppmchange</b> +replaces it with the <i>newcolor</i> of the leftmost specified one. <p>The maxval of the output image is the same as that of the input image. If a <i>newcolor</i> you specify cannot be exactly represented @@ -73,34 +72,39 @@ if the user specified <b>-closeok</b> and there was no <b>-closeok</b> option. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmchange</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-closeness </B><I>closeness_percent</I> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-closeness </b><i>closeness_percent</i> -<DD><I>closeness</I> is a percentage indicating how close to the color you +<dd><i>closeness</i> is a percentage indicating how close to the color you specified a pixel must be to get replaced. By default, it is 0, which means the pixel must be the exact color you specified. -<P>A pixel gets replaced if the distance in color between it and the -color you specified is less than or equal to <I>closeness</I> per cent +<p>A pixel gets replaced if the distance in color between it and the +color you specified is less than or equal to <i>closeness</i> per cent of the maxval. -<P>The "distance" in color is defined as the Cartesian sum of the +<p>The "distance" in color is defined as the Cartesian sum of the individual differences in red, green, and blue intensities between the two pixels, normalized so that the difference between black and white is 100%. -<P>This is probably simpler than what you want most the time. You +<p>This is probably simpler than what you want most the time. You probably would like to change colors that have similar chrominance, regardless of their intensity. So if there's a red barn that is variously shadowed, you want the entire barn changed. But because the shadowing significantly changes the color according to -<B>ppmchange</B>'s distance formula, parts of the barn are probably +<b>ppmchange</b>'s distance formula, parts of the barn are probably about as distant in color from other parts of the barn as they are from green grass next to the barn. -<P>Maybe <B>ppmchange</B> will be enhanced some day to do chrominance +<p>Maybe <b>ppmchange</b> will be enhanced some day to do chrominance analysis. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 9.8 (September 2000). @@ -115,51 +119,50 @@ may use a color close to, but not the same as what you specify. See <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.22 (April 2004). Before that, <b>ppmchange</b> always behaved as if you specified this option. -<DT><B>-remainder </B><I>color</I> +<dt><b>-remainder </b><i>color</i> -<DD><B>ppmchange</B> changes all pixels which are not of a color for +<dd><b>ppmchange</b> changes all pixels which are not of a color for which you specify an explicit replacement color on the command line to -color <I>color</I>. +color <i>color</i>. -<P>An example application of this is +<p>An example application of this is <pre> -<B>ppmchange -remainder=black red red</B> +<b>ppmchange -remainder=black red red</b> </pre> to lift only the red portions from an image, or <pre> -<B>ppmchange -remainder=black red white | ppmtopgm</B> +<b>ppmchange -remainder=black red white | ppmtopgm</b> </pre> to create a mask file for the red portions of the image. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pgmtoppm.html">pgmtoppm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pgmtoppm.html">pgmtoppm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Wilson H. Bent. Jr. (<A HREF="mailto:whb@usc.edu">whb@usc.edu</A>) -with modifications by Alberto Accomazzi (<A -HREF="mailto:alberto@cfa.harvard.edu">alberto@cfa.harvard.edu</A>) +Wilson H. Bent. Jr. (<a href="mailto:whb@usc.edu">whb@usc.edu</a>) +with modifications by Alberto Accomazzi (<a +href="mailto:alberto@cfa.harvard.edu">alberto@cfa.harvard.edu</a>) -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealos">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmcolormask.html b/ppmcolormask.html index 26026f62..690b8e98 100644 --- a/ppmcolormask.html +++ b/ppmcolormask.html @@ -1,23 +1,20 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmcolormask User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> - -<BODY> - -<H1>ppmcolormask</H1> -Updated: 1 May 2006 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmcolormask User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmcolormask</h1> +Updated: 01 May 2006 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmcolormask - produce mask of areas of a certain color in a PPM file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmcolormask</B> <b>-color=</b><i>color_list</i> [<I>ppmfile</I>] +<b>ppmcolormask</b> <b>-color=</b><i>color_list</i> [<i>ppmfile</i>] <p> -<B>ppmcolormask</B> <I>color</I> [<I>ppmfile</I>] +<b>ppmcolormask</b> <i>color</i> [<i>ppmfile</i>] <h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> @@ -33,26 +30,26 @@ ppmcolormask - produce mask of areas of a certain color in a PPM file </code> </pre> -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>ppmcolormask</b> reads a PPM file as input and produces a PBM +<p><b>ppmcolormask</b> reads a PPM file as input and produces a PBM (bitmap) file as output. The output file is the same dimensions as the input file and is black in all places where the input file is a color indicated by the <b>-color</b> option, and white everywhere else. -<P>The output of <B>ppmcolormask</B> is useful as a transparency mask input -to <B>pamcomp</B>. Note that you don't need <b>ppmcolormask</b> and +<p>The output of <b>ppmcolormask</b> is useful as a transparency mask input +to <b>pamcomp</b>. Note that you don't need <b>ppmcolormask</b> and <b>pamcomp</b> if you are ultimately converting to PNG with <b>pnmtopng</b> because the <b>-transparent</b> option on <b>pnmtopng</b> does the same thing. -<P><I>ppmfile</I> is the input file. If you don't specify -<I>ppmfile</I>, the input is from Standard Input. +<p><i>ppmfile</i> is the input file. If you don't specify +<i>ppmfile</i>, the input is from Standard Input. -<P>The output goes to Standard Output. +<p>The output goes to Standard Output. <p>In the obsolete alternative syntax, specifying the <i>color</i> names a single exact color to be masked. @@ -67,8 +64,13 @@ what color it is, use <b>pambackground</b>. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmcolormask</b> recognizes the following +command line option: + <dl> -<dt><b>-color=</b><I>color_list</I> +<dt><b>-color=</b><i>color_list</i> <dd>This mandatory option specifies the colors that are to be masked (where the image is one of these colors, the output mask will be black). @@ -105,27 +107,26 @@ color. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pamfind.html">pamfind</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pambackground.html">pambackground</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgmtoppm.html">pgmtoppm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmmask.html">pbmmask</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmtopng.html">pnmtopng</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> - - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pamfind.html">pamfind</a></b>, +<b><a href="pambackground.html">pambackground</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgmtoppm.html">pgmtoppm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmmask.html">pbmmask</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmtopng.html">pnmtopng</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> + + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmdither.html b/ppmdither.html index 4af0a141..c72c65c7 100644 --- a/ppmdither.html +++ b/ppmdither.html @@ -1,36 +1,35 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmdither User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmdither</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmdither User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmdither</h1> Updated: 16 December 2009 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmdither - ordered dither for color images -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmdither</B> +<b>ppmdither</b> -[<B>-dim</B>=<I>power</I>] +[<b>-dim</b>=<i>power</i>] -[<B>-red</B>=<I>n</I>] +[<b>-red</b>=<i>n</i>] -[<B>-green</B>=<I>n</I>] +[<b>-green</b>=<i>n</i>] -[<B>-blue</B>=<I>n</I>] +[<b>-blue</b>=<i>n</i>] -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or an equals sign between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -45,57 +44,62 @@ primitive color printers, use <b>-red=2 -green=2 -blue=2</b>. <p>You can do another kind of dither -- Floyd-Steinberg -- with <b>pnmquant</b> or <b>pnmremap</b>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmdither</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-dim</B> <I>power</I> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-dim</b> <i>power</i> -<DD> The size of the dithering matrix. The dithering matrix is a -square whose dimension is a power of 2. <I>power</I> is that power of +<dd> The size of the dithering matrix. The dithering matrix is a +square whose dimension is a power of 2. <i>power</i> is that power of 2. The default is 4, for a 16 by 16 matrix. -<DT><B>-red</B>=<I>n</I> +<dt><b>-red</b>=<i>n</i> -<DD> +<dd> The number of red shades to be used, including black; minimum of 2. <p>Default is 5. -<DT><B>-green</B> <I>n</I> +<dt><b>-green</b> <i>n</i> -<DD> +<dd> The number of green shades to be used, including black; minimum of 2. <p>Default is 9. -<DT><B>-blue</B> <I>n</I> +<dt><b>-blue</b> <i>n</i> -<DD> +<dd> The number of blue shades to be used, including black; minimum of 2. <p>Default is 5. -</DL> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +</dl> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pamditherbw.html">pamditherbw</A>, -<A HREF="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</A>, -<A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A>, -<A href="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="pamditherbw.html">pamditherbw</a>, +<a href="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</a>, +<a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a>, +<a href="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Christos Zoulas. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmdraw.html b/ppmdraw.html index afef2927..bed780b3 100644 --- a/ppmdraw.html +++ b/ppmdraw.html @@ -1,40 +1,39 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmdraw User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> - -<H1>ppmdraw</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmdraw User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmdraw</h1> Updated: 22 June 2005 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmdraw - draw lines, text, etc on a PPM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmdraw</B> +<b>ppmdraw</b> { -<B>-script=</B><I>script</I> +<b>-script=</b><i>script</i> | -<B>-scriptfile=</B><i>filename</i> +<b>-scriptfile=</b><i>filename</i> } [<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or an equals sign between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>ppmdraw</B> draws lines, shapes, text, etc. on a PPM image. It is +<p><b>ppmdraw</b> draws lines, shapes, text, etc. on a PPM image. It is essentially an easy-to-program front end to <b>libnetpbm</b>'s "ppmd" subroutines. It lets you create a human-friendly script to describe the drawing rather than write a C program. @@ -60,10 +59,10 @@ off, the script writes "there" in 10 pixel high black letters horizontally. Finally, it draws a black line to a point 5 pixels over and 20 pixels down from the end of "there." -<P>If you don't specify <I>ppmfile</I>, <B>ppmdraw</B> reads its input +<p>If you don't specify <i>ppmfile</i>, <b>ppmdraw</b> reads its input PPM image from Standard Input. -<P>The output image goes to Standard Output. +<p>The output image goes to Standard Output. <p><b>ppmdraw</b> works on multi-image streams. It executes the same script on each input image and produces an output stream with one image @@ -74,13 +73,18 @@ for each input image. But before Netpbm 10.32 (February 2006), <b>ppmlabel</b> may be more what you want. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmdraw</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-script=</B><I>script</I> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-script=</b><i>script</i> -<DD>This option gives the script. See <a href="#script">Script</a>. +<dd>This option gives the script. See <a href="#script">Script</a>. <p>You may not specify both <b>-script</b> and <b>-scriptfile</b>. @@ -94,10 +98,10 @@ means Standard Input. <p>You may not specify <b>-</b> (Standard Input) for both <b>-scriptfile</b> and the input image file. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 ID="script">SCRIPT</H2> +<h2 id="script">SCRIPT</h2> <p>The heart of <b>ppmdraw</b> function is its script. The script is a character stream. The stream consists of commands. Commands are @@ -150,7 +154,7 @@ documented. in which subsequent drawing commands draw. Before the first <b>setcolor</b>, the current color is white. -<P>There is one argument. It specifies the color as described for the +<p>There is one argument. It specifies the color as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. @@ -251,25 +255,26 @@ will be within the image! <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><B>ppmdraw</B> was new in Netpbm 10.29 (August 2005). +<p><b>ppmdraw</b> was new in Netpbm 10.29 (August 2005). -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmlabel.html">ppmlabel</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> -<B><A HREF="libnetpbm_draw.html">libnetpbm_draw</A></B> +<b><a href="ppmlabel.html">ppmlabel</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> +<b><a href="libnetpbm_draw.html">libnetpbm_draw</a></b> -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#script">SCRIPT</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#script">SCRIPT</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmfade.html b/ppmfade.html index b59a9040..2fb89810 100644 --- a/ppmfade.html +++ b/ppmfade.html @@ -1,25 +1,24 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmfade User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>PPMFADE</H1> -Updated: April 1, 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2 id="name">NAME</H2> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmfade User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmfade</h1> +Updated: 01 April 2000 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmfade - generate a transition between two image files using special effects -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmfade</B> -[<B>-f</B> <I>first.ppm</I>] -[<B>-l</B> <I>last.ppm</I>] -[<B>-mix</B>|<B>-spread</B>|<B>-shift</B>| -<B>-relief</B>|<B>-oil</B>|<B>-edge</B>|<B>-bentley</B>|<B>-block</B>] -[<B>-base</B> <I>name</I>] +<b>ppmfade</b> +[<b>-f</b> <i>first.ppm</i>] +[<b>-l</b> <i>last.ppm</i>] +[<b>-mix</b>|<b>-spread</b>|<b>-shift</b>| +<b>-relief</b>|<b>-oil</b>|<b>-edge</b>|<b>-bentley</b>|<b>-block</b>] +[<b>-base</b> <i>name</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -30,136 +29,140 @@ segments of a movie. The input and output images are in the PPM format. If you specify both input images, they should both be the same size. If you want to fade from black to an image, specify only the last image. If you want to fade from an image to black, specify -only the first image. <B>ppmfade</B> names the resulting image files -<I>base</I><B>.</B><I>nnnn</I><B>.ppm</B>, where <I>nnnn</I> is a -number varying between 0001 and 0030 and <I>base</I> is what you -specify with via the <B>-base</B> option (default <B>fade</B>). +only the first image. <b>ppmfade</b> names the resulting image files +<i>base</i><b>.</b><i>nnnn</i><b>.ppm</b>, where <i>nnnn</i> is a +number varying between 0001 and 0030 and <i>base</i> is what you +specify with via the <b>-base</b> option (default <b>fade</b>). + +<p>Another way to convert by steps from one image to another is +morphing. You can use <b>xmorph</b> to do that. -<P>Another way to convert by steps from one image to another is -morphing. You can use <B>xmorph</B> to do that. +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmfade</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-f</b> <i>first.ppm</i> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-f</b> <i>first.ppm</i> -<DD> +<dd> This is the image file (PPM format) to be used at the beginning of the transition. If you don't specify this, the fade will start from black. -<DT><B>-l</b> <i>last.ppm</i> +<dt><b>-l</b> <i>last.ppm</i> -<DD> +<dd> This is the image file (PPM format) to be used at the ending of the transition. If you don't specify this, the fade will end with black. -<DT><B>-mix</B> +<dt><b>-mix</b> -<DD> +<dd> The two images are superimposed with the brightness of the first image decreasing from full to none and the brightness of the final image increasing from none to full. The transition is quadratic in brightness with faster transition in the beginning and slower at the end. -<DT><B>-spread</B> +<dt><b>-spread</b> -<DD> +<dd> The pixels in the first image will be moved (spread) further and further from their original location and then moved into the proper location in the final image. This is the default transition. -<DT><B>-shift</B> +<dt><b>-shift</b> -<DD> +<dd> The pixels in the first image will be shifted further and further horizontally from their original location and then moved into the proper location in the final image. -<DT><B>-relief</B> +<dt><b>-relief</b> -<DD> +<dd> The first image is faded to a Laplacian relief filtered version of the first image. This is then faded to a Laplacian relief filtered version of the second image and finally faded to the final image. -<DT><B>-oil</B> +<dt><b>-oil</b> -<DD>The first image is faded to an "oil transfer" version +<dd>The first image is faded to an "oil transfer" version of the first image. This is then faded to an "oil transfer" version of the second image and finally faded to the final image. -<DT><B>-edge</B> +<dt><b>-edge</b> -<DD> +<dd> The first image is faded to an edge detected version of the first image. This is then faded to an edge detected version of the second image and finally faded to the final image. -<DT><B>-bentley</B> +<dt><b>-bentley</b> -<DD> The first image is faded to a "Bentley Effect" version +<dd> The first image is faded to a "Bentley Effect" version of the first image. This is then faded to a "Bentley Effect" version of the second image and finally faded to the final image. -<DT><B>-block</B> +<dt><b>-block</b> -<DD> +<dd> The first image is defocused to small blocks. The small blocks are converted to match a defocused version of the last image. The block version of the last image is then focused to the final image. -<DT><B>-base</B> <I>name</I> +<dt><b>-base</b> <i>name</i> -<DD> +<dd> This forms part of the output filenames, as described above. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> -<B>ppmfade -f teapot.ppm -l pyr.ppm</B> +<b>ppmfade -f teapot.ppm -l pyr.ppm</b> -<P> +<p> Fade from teapot.ppm to pyr.ppm generating fade.0001.ppm to fade.0030.ppm using the "spread" transition. -<P> -<B>ppmfade -l teapot.ppm</B> +<p> +<b>ppmfade -l teapot.ppm</b> -<P> +<p> Fade from black to teapot.ppm generating fade.0001.ppm to fade.0030.ppm. -<P> -<B>ppmfade -f teapot.ppm -base end</B> +<p> +<b>ppmfade -f teapot.ppm -base end</b> -<P> +<p> Fade from teapot.ppm to black generating end.0001.ppm to end.0030.ppm. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B>tontsc</B> manual, -<B>sgifade</B> manual, -<B>smart_vfr</B> manual, -<B>xmorph</B> manual, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b>tontsc</b> manual, +<b>sgifade</b> manual, +<b>smart_vfr</b> manual, +<b>xmorph</b> manual, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Bryan Henderson, Olympia WA; April 2000 <p>Inspired by and intended as a replacement for <b>pbmfade</b> (not a Netpbm program) by Wesley C. Barris. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmglobe.html b/ppmglobe.html index 1da16723..8828fad7 100644 --- a/ppmglobe.html +++ b/ppmglobe.html @@ -1,30 +1,28 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><TITLE>Ppmglobe User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmglobe</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmglobe User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmglobe</h1> Updated: 23 February 2006 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmglobe - generate strips to glue onto a sphere -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmglobe</B> +<b>ppmglobe</b> [<b>-background=</b><i>colorname</i>] [<b>-closeok</b>] <i>stripcount</i> [<i>filename</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -63,7 +61,7 @@ on it, but is used today because it is pretty. <p>You can find maps of planets at <a href="http://maps.jpl.nasa.gov">maps.jpl.nasa.gov</a>. -<H2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</H2> +<h2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</h2> <p><i>stripcount</i> is the number of strips <b>ppmglobe</b> is to generate in the output. More strips makes it easier to fit onto a @@ -84,15 +82,20 @@ on the right, <b>ppmglobe</b> produces a fractional strip on the right. specify this, <b>ppmglobe</b> reads the image from Standard Input. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmglobe</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><B>-background=</B><I>colorname</I> -<DD> +<dt><b>-background=</b><i>colorname</i> +<dd> This specifies the color that goes between the strips. -<P>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a +<p>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. @@ -101,8 +104,8 @@ library routine</a>. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.31 (December 2005). Before that, the background is always black. -<DT><B>-closeok</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-closeok</b> +<dd> This means it is OK if the background isn't exactly the color you specify. Sometimes, it is impossible to represent a named color exactly because of the precision (i.e. maxval) of the image's color space. If you specify @@ -113,20 +116,20 @@ situation. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.31 (December 2005). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pnmmercator.html">pnmmercator</A></B> +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> +<b><a href="pnmmercator.html">pnmmercator</a></b> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><b>ppmglobe</b> was new in Netpbm 10.16 (June 2003). +<p><b>ppmglobe</b> was new in Netpbm 10.16 (June 2003). <p>It is derived from Max Gensthaler's <b>ppmglobemap</b>. -<H2 id="authors">AUTHORS</H2> +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> <p><a href="mailto:Max@Gensthaler.de">Max Gensthaler</a> wrote a program he called @@ -134,15 +137,16 @@ wrote a program he called Netpbm. Bryan Henderson modified the code slightly and included it in Netpbm as <b>ppmglobe</b>. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#parameters">PARAMETERS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#authors">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmhist.html b/ppmhist.html index 60247792..bb3701fa 100644 --- a/ppmhist.html +++ b/ppmhist.html @@ -1,25 +1,25 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmhist User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmhist</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmhist User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmhist</h1> Updated: 24 August 2019 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2 id="name">NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmhist - print a histogram of the colors in a PPM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmhist</B> -[<B>-hexcolor</B> | <B>-float</B> | <B>-colorname</B> | <B>-map</B>] -[<B>-nomap</B>] -[<B>-noheader</B>] -[<B>-sort=</B>{<B>frequency</B>,<B>rgb</B>}] +<b>ppmhist</b> +[<b>-hexcolor</b> | <b>-float</b> | <b>-colorname</b> | <b>-map</b>] +[<b>-nomap</b>] +[<b>-noheader</b>] +[<b>-sort=</b>{<b>frequency</b>,<b>rgb</b>}] [<b>-forensic</b> -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -78,66 +78,71 @@ column for each distinct color in the image. <b>pnmcolormap all</b>. <b>ppmhist</b> is much older than <b>pnmcolormap</b>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmhist</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DT><B>-sort=</B>{<B>frequency</B>,<B>rgb</B>} +<dl compact> -<DD>The <B>-sort</B> option determines the order in which the colors are -listed in the output. <B>rgb</B> means to sort them first by the intensity of +<dt><b>-sort=</b>{<b>frequency</b>,<b>rgb</b>} + +<dd>The <b>-sort</b> option determines the order in which the colors are +listed in the output. <b>rgb</b> means to sort them first by the intensity of the red component of the color, then of the green, then of the blue, with the -least intense first. <B>frequency</B> means to list them in order of how many +least intense first. <b>frequency</b> means to list them in order of how many pixels in the input image have the color, with the most represented colors first. Among colors with the same frequency, the order is the same as with <b>rgb</b>. -<P>The default is <B>frequency</B>. +<p>The default is <b>frequency</b>. <p>Before Netpbm 10.88 (September 2019), with <b>-sort=frequency</b>, the order of colors that have the same frequency is arbitrary. -<DT><B>-hexcolor</B> +<dt><b>-hexcolor</b> -<DD>Print the color components in hexadecimal. See <a href="#output">output +<dd>Print the color components in hexadecimal. See <a href="#output">output format</a>. <p>You may not specify this option along with <b>-float</b> or <b>map</b>. -<DT><B>-float</B> +<dt><b>-float</b> -<DD>Print the color components and the luminosity as floating point +<dd>Print the color components and the luminosity as floating point numbers in the range [0,1]. See <a href="#output">output format</a>. <p>You may not specify this option along with <b>-hexcolor</b> or <b>map</b>. <p>This option was added in Netpbm 10.19 (November 2003). -<DT><B>-map</B> +<dt><b>-map</b> -<DD>Generates a PPM file of the colormap for the image, with the +<dd>Generates a PPM file of the colormap for the image, with the color histogram as comments. See <a href="#output">output format</a>. <p>You may not specify this option along with <b>-float</b> or <b>hexcolor</b>. -<DT><B>-nomap</B> +<dt><b>-nomap</b> -<DD> +<dd> Generates the histogram for human reading. This is the default. -<DT><B>-colorname</b> +<dt><b>-colorname</b> <dd>Add the color name to the output. This is the name from the <a -href="libppm.html#rgb.txt">system color dictionary</a>. If the exact +href="libppm.html#dictionary">system color dictionary</a>. If the exact color is not in the color dictionary, it is the closest color that is in the dictionary and is preceded by a '*'. If you don't have a system color dictionary, the program fails. <p>This option was added in Netpbm 10.10 (October 2002). -<DT><B>-noheader</B> +<dt><b>-noheader</b> -<DD>Do not print the column headings. +<dd>Do not print the column headings. <dt><b>-forensic</b><dd> @@ -162,35 +167,35 @@ belongs. 10.66 does not properly reject invalid sample values, so the effect is very similar to <b>-forensic</b>. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pgmhist.html">pgmhist</A></B>, +<b><a href="pgmhist.html">pgmhist</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmcolormap.html">pnmcolormap</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmcolormap.html">pnmcolormap</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmhistmap.html">pnmhistmap</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmhistmap.html">pnmhistmap</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</A></B> +<b><a href="ppmchange.html">ppmchange</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> <ul> <li><a href="#output">Output Format</a> </ul> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmmake.html b/ppmmake.html index 09fb9dcf..8bc14b02 100644 --- a/ppmmake.html +++ b/ppmmake.html @@ -1,41 +1,41 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><title>Ppmmake User Manual</title></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmmake</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmmake User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmmake</h1> Updated: 02 September 2002 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmmake - create a PPM image of a specified color and dimensions -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmmake</B> +<b>ppmmake</b> [<b>-maxval=</b><i>maxval</i>] -<I>color</I> -<I>width</I> -<i>height</I> +<i>color</i> +<i>width</i> +<i>height</i> -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or an equals sign between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>ppmmake</b> produces a PPM image of the specified color, width, +<p><b>ppmmake</b> produces a PPM image of the specified color, width, height, and maxval. -<P>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a +<p>Specify the color (<i>color</i>) as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. -<h2 id="example">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="example">EXAMPLES</h2> <pre> ppmmake red 50 50 @@ -45,36 +45,42 @@ library routine</a>. </pre> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL> -<DT><b>-maxval=</b><i>maxval</i> -<DD> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmmake</b> recognizes the following +command line option: + +<dl> +<dt><b>-maxval=</b><i>maxval</i> +<dd> The maxval for the generated image. Default is 255. <p> This option did not exist before June 2002. Before, the maxval was always 255. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pbmmake.html">pbmmake</A>, -<A HREF="pgmmake.html">pgmmake</A>, -<A HREF="ppmpat.html">ppmpat</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="pbmmake.html">pbmmake</a>, +<a href="pgmmake.html">pgmmake</a>, +<a href="ppmpat.html">ppmpat</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#example">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#example">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEEALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmrough.html b/ppmrough.html index 52555590..35ad2657 100644 --- a/ppmrough.html +++ b/ppmrough.html @@ -1,175 +1,181 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmrough User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmrough</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmrough User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmrough</h1> Updated: 23 August 2002 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmrough - create PPM image of two colors with a ragged border between them -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmrough</B> +<b>ppmrough</b> -[<B>-left </B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-left </b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-right </B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-right </b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-top </B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-top </b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-bottom </B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-bottom </b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-width </B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-width </b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-height </B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-height </b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-bg </B><I>colorspec</I>] +[<b>-bg </b><i>colorspec</i>] -[<B>-fg </B><I>colorspec</I>] +[<b>-fg </b><i>colorspec</i>] -[<B>-var </B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-var </b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-randomseed </B><I>seed</I>] +[<b>-randomseed </b><i>seed</i>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>ppmrough</b> generates a PPM image of the specified width, height, and -colors. <B>ppmrough</B> tiles the image into semi-rectangular regions +<p><b>ppmrough</b> generates a PPM image of the specified width, height, and +colors. <b>ppmrough</b> tiles the image into semi-rectangular regions with a ragged borders between them. It calculates the fluctuations with the <b>rand()</b> standard C library function. -<P><B>ppmrough</B> writes the PPM image to Standard Output. +<p><b>ppmrough</b> writes the PPM image to Standard Output. -<P>The maxval of the output image is 255 (You can change this with +<p>The maxval of the output image is 255 (You can change this with <b>pamdepth</b>). -<P>Use the options <B>-left</B> or <B>-right</B>, respectively, to -make vertical borders, and <B>-top</B> or <B>-bottom</B>, +<p>Use the options <b>-left</b> or <b>-right</b>, respectively, to +make vertical borders, and <b>-top</b> or <b>-bottom</b>, respectively, to generate horizontal borders inside the image. Each of -these options needs an integer value <I>pixels</I> that determines the +these options needs an integer value <i>pixels</i> that determines the average distance of the interior border to the related edge of the -image. You may combine the <B>-left</B>, <B>-right</B>, <B>-top</B>, -and <B>-bottom</B> options to generate an image with more than one +image. You may combine the <b>-left</b>, <b>-right</b>, <b>-top</b>, +and <b>-bottom</b> options to generate an image with more than one border. The algorithm ensures that you can concatenate two images -produced with the same (i.e. <B>-left</B>) value without dislocations. +produced with the same (i.e. <b>-left</b>) value without dislocations. -<P>You specify the dimensions of the generated image with the -<B>-width</B> and <B>-height</B> options. +<p>You specify the dimensions of the generated image with the +<b>-width</b> and <b>-height</b> options. -<P>Use the <B>-bg</B> and <B>-fg</B> options to set the background +<p>Use the <b>-bg</b> and <b>-fg</b> options to set the background (margin) color and the foreground (interior) color, respectively. If -you don't specify any of the <B>-left</B>, <B>-right</B>, <B>-top</B>, -and <B>-bottom</B> options, all pixels are set to foreground color. +you don't specify any of the <b>-left</b>, <b>-right</b>, <b>-top</b>, +and <b>-bottom</b> options, all pixels are set to foreground color. The defaults are white foreground and black background. -<P>Use the <B>-var</B> option to control the "raggedness" of +<p>Use the <b>-var</b> option to control the "raggedness" of the border. The less its value is the smoother the border is. You -can initialize the pseudo-random generator with the <B>-init</B> +can initialize the pseudo-random generator with the <b>-init</b> option. -<P>You could use <b>ppmrough</b> with <b>ppmtopgm</b> to create a PGM +<p>You could use <b>ppmrough</b> with <b>ppmtopgm</b> to create a PGM transparency mask and use it to roughen up the edges of another image. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-left=</B><I>pixels</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmrough</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> Specifies the mean distance of the border from the left margin +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-left=</b><i>pixels</i> + +<dd> Specifies the mean distance of the border from the left margin (default: no border). -<DT><B>-right=</B><I>pixels</I> +<dt><b>-right=</b><i>pixels</i> -<DD>Specifies the mean distance of the border from the right margin +<dd>Specifies the mean distance of the border from the right margin (default: no border). -<DT><B>-top=</B><I>pixels</I> +<dt><b>-top=</b><i>pixels</i> -<DD>Specifies the mean distance of the border from the top margin +<dd>Specifies the mean distance of the border from the top margin (default: no border). -<DT><B>-bottom=</B><I>pixels</I> +<dt><b>-bottom=</b><i>pixels</i> -<DD>Specifies the mean distance of the border from the bottom margin +<dd>Specifies the mean distance of the border from the bottom margin (default: no border). -<DT><B>-width=</B><I>pixels</I> +<dt><b>-width=</b><i>pixels</i> -<DD>Specifies the width of the image (default: 100). +<dd>Specifies the width of the image (default: 100). -<DT><B>-height=</B><I>pixels</I> +<dt><b>-height=</b><i>pixels</i> -<DD>Specifies the height of the image (default: 100). +<dd>Specifies the height of the image (default: 100). -<DT><B>-bg=</B><I>colorspec</I> +<dt><b>-bg=</b><i>colorspec</i> -<DD>Background color. <i>colorspec</i> is as described for the +<dd>Background color. <i>colorspec</i> is as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. Default is black. -<DT><B>-fg=</B><I>color</I> +<dt><b>-fg=</b><i>color</i> -<DD>Foreground color. <i>colorspec</i> is as described for the +<dd>Foreground color. <i>colorspec</i> is as described for the <a href="libnetpbm_image.html#colorname">argument of the <b>pnm_parsecolor()</b> library routine</a>. Default is white. -<DT><B>-var=</B><I>pixels</I> +<dt><b>-var=</b><i>pixels</i> -<DD> Specifies the variance of the ragged border (default: 10). Must -be a positive integer. Set <I>pixels</I> to 1 to get a straight +<dd> Specifies the variance of the ragged border (default: 10). Must +be a positive integer. Set <i>pixels</i> to 1 to get a straight border. -<DT><B>-randomseed=</B><I>seed</I> +<dt><b>-randomseed=</b><i>seed</i> -<DD>Use this option to initialize the pseudo-random number generator -(the Standard C library <b>srand()</b> function) with <I>seed</I>. +<dd>Use this option to initialize the pseudo-random number generator +(the Standard C library <b>srand()</b> function) with <i>seed</i>. <p>Before Netpbm 10.61 (December 2012), this is called <b>-init</b>, and that still works. -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Run <B>ppmrough</B> in verbose mode. It reports all parameters on +<dd>Run <b>ppmrough</b> in verbose mode. It reports all parameters on Standard Error. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmmake.html">ppmmake</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppmmake.html">ppmmake</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmcat.html">pnmcat</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b>, -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P> +<p> This program was added to Netpbm in Release 10.9 (September 2002). -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 2002 by Eckard Specht. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -<HR> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +<hr> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmshadow.html b/ppmshadow.html index 16ee15d4..9683faef 100644 --- a/ppmshadow.html +++ b/ppmshadow.html @@ -1,29 +1,30 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmshadow User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmshadow</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmshadow User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmshadow</h1> Updated: 24 June 2017 -<BR><A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2 id="name">NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmshadow - add simulated shadows to a PPM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmshadow</B> -[<B>-b</B> <I>blur_size</I>] -[<B>-k</B>] -[<B>-t</B>] -[<B>-x</B> <I>xoffset</I>] -[<B>-y</B> <I>yoffset</I>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +<b>ppmshadow</b> +[<b>-b</b> <i>blur_size</i>] +[<b>-k</b>] +[<b>-t</b>] +[<b>-x</b> <i>xoffset</i>] +[<b>-y</b> <i>yoffset</i>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>ppmshadow</B> adds a simulated shadow to an image, giving the +<p><b>ppmshadow</b> adds a simulated shadow to an image, giving the appearance that the contents of the image float above the page, casting a diffuse shadow on the background. Shadows can either be black, as cast by opaque objects, or translucent, where the shadow @@ -54,18 +55,23 @@ input has low maxval (including most notably if the input is PBM, which means its maxval is 1), run it through <b>pamdepth</b> to raise its maxval. 255 is usually a good choice. -<p>Input is a PPM file named by the <I>ppmfile</I> command line argument; if -you don't specify <I>ppmfile</I>, the input is Standard Input. +<p>Input is a PPM file named by the <i>ppmfile</i> command line argument; if +you don't specify <i>ppmfile</i>, the input is Standard Input. -<P>The output is a PPM file, written to Standard Output. +<p>The output is a PPM file, written to Standard Output. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-b</B> <I>blur_size</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmshadow</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-b</b> <i>blur_size</i> + +<dd> Sets the distance of the light source from the image. Larger values move the light source closer, casting a more diffuse shadow, while smaller settings move the light further away, yielding a sharper @@ -80,196 +86,196 @@ the light source closer to the object. It does not make the shadow grow or shrink as would happpen in the real world if you moved a point light source closer to and further from an object. -<DT><B>-k</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-k</b> +<dd> Keep the intermediate temporary image files. When debugging, these intermediate files provide many clues as to the source of an error. -See <a href="#files">below</a> for a list of the contents of each file. +See <a href="#tempfiles">below</a> for a list of the contents of each file. -<DT><B>-t</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>-t</b> +<dd> Consider the non-background material in the image translucent -- it casts shadows of its own color rather than a black shadow, which is default. This often results in fuzzy, difficult-to-read images but in some circumstances may look better. -<DT><B>-x</B><I> xoffset</I> +<dt><b>-x</b><i> xoffset</i> -<DD>Specifies the displacement of the light source to the left of the -image. Larger settings of <B>xoffset</B> displace the shadow to the +<dd>Specifies the displacement of the light source to the left of the +image. Larger settings of <b>xoffset</b> displace the shadow to the right, as would be cast by a light further to the left. If not -specified, the horizontal offset is half of <I>blur_size </I> (above), +specified, the horizontal offset is half of <i>blur_size </i> (above), to the left. -<DT><B>-y</B><I> yoffset</I> +<dt><b>-y</b><i> yoffset</i> -<DD> Specifies the displacement of the light source above the top of +<dd> Specifies the displacement of the light source above the top of the image. Larger settings displace the shadow downward, corresponding to moving the light further above the top of the image. -If you don't specify <B>-y</B>, the vertical offset defaults to the +If you don't specify <b>-y</b>, the vertical offset defaults to the same as the horizontal offset (above), upward. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> <p>The source image must contain sufficient space on the edges in the direction in which the shadow is cast to contain the shadow -- if it doesn't some of the internal steps may fail. You can usually expand -the border of a too-tightly-cropped image with <B>pnmmargin</B> before -processing it with <B>ppmshadow</B>. +the border of a too-tightly-cropped image with <b>pnmmargin</b> before +processing it with <b>ppmshadow</b>. -<P>Black pixels and pixels with the same color as the image +<p>Black pixels and pixels with the same color as the image background don't cast a shadow. If this causes unintentional "holes" in the shadow, fill the offending areas with a color which differs from black or the background by RGB values of 1, which will be imperceptible to the viewer. Since the comparison is exact, the modified areas will now cast shadows. -<P>The background color of the source image (which is preserved in +<p>The background color of the source image (which is preserved in the output) is deemed to be the color of the pixel at the top left of the input image. If that pixel isn't part of the background, simply add a one-pixel border at the top of the image, generate the shadow image, then delete the border from it. -<P>If something goes wrong along the way, the error messages from the -various Netpbm programs <B>ppmshadow</B> calls will, in general, -provide little or no clue as to where <B>ppmshadow</B> went astray. -In this case, Specify the <B>-k</B> option and examine the +<p>If something goes wrong along the way, the error messages from the +various Netpbm programs <b>ppmshadow</b> calls will, in general, +provide little or no clue as to where <b>ppmshadow</b> went astray. +In this case, Specify the <b>-k</b> option and examine the intermediate results in the temporary files (which this option causes to be preserved). If you manually run the commands that -<B>ppmshadow</B> runs on these files, you can figure out where the +<b>ppmshadow</b> runs on these files, you can figure out where the problem is. In problem cases where you want to manually tweak the image generation process along the way, you can keep the intermediate -files with the <B>-k </B> option, modify them appropriately with an +files with the <b>-k </b> option, modify them appropriately with an image editor, then recombine them with the steps used by the code in -<B>ppmshadow</B>. +<b>ppmshadow</b>. -<P>Shadows are by default black, as cast by opaque material in the -image occluding white light. Use the <B>-t</B> option to simulate +<p>Shadows are by default black, as cast by opaque material in the +image occluding white light. Use the <b>-t</b> option to simulate translucent material, where the shadow takes on the color of the object that casts it. If the contrast between the image and -background is insufficient, the <B>-t</B> option may yield +background is insufficient, the <b>-t</b> option may yield unattractive results which resemble simple blurring of the original image. -<P>Because Netpbm used to have a maximum maxval of 255, which meant -that the largest convolution kernel <B>pnmconvol</B> could use was 11 -by 11, <B>ppmshadow</B> includes a horrid, CPU-time-burning kludge +<p>Because Netpbm used to have a maximum maxval of 255, which meant +that the largest convolution kernel <b>pnmconvol</b> could use was 11 +by 11, <b>ppmshadow</b> includes a horrid, CPU-time-burning kludge which, if a blur of greater than 11 is requested, performs an initial -convolution with an 11 x 11 kernel, then calls <B>pnmsmooth</B> +convolution with an 11 x 11 kernel, then calls <b>pnmsmooth</b> (which is itself a program that calls <b>pnmconvol</b> with a 3 x 3 kernel) as many times as the requested blur exceeds 11. It's ugly, but it gets the job done on those rare occasions where you need a blur greater than 11. -<P>If you wish to generate an image at high resolution, then scale it -to publication size with <B>pamscale</B> in order to eliminate jagged +<p>If you wish to generate an image at high resolution, then scale it +to publication size with <b>pamscale</b> in order to eliminate jagged edges by resampling, it's best to generate the shadow in the original high resolution image, prior to scaling it down in size. If you scale first and then add the shadow, you'll get an unsightly jagged stripe between the edge of material and its shadow, due to resampled pixels intermediate between the image and background obscuring the shadow. -<H2 id="exitstatus">EXIT STATUS</H2> +<h2 id="exitstatus">EXIT STATUS</h2> -<B>ppmshadow</B> returns status 0 if processing was completed without +<b>ppmshadow</b> returns status 0 if processing was completed without errors, and a nonzero Unix error code if an error prevented generation of output. Some errors may result in the script aborting, usually displaying error messages from various Netpbm components it uses, without returning a nonzero error code. When this happens, the output file will be empty, so be sure to test this if you need to know if the -program succeeded. - -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmmargin.html">pnmmargin</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamscale.html">pamscale</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmsmooth.html">pnmsmooth</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> - +program succeeded. -<H2 id="tempfiles">TEMPORARY FILES</H2> +<h2 id="tempfiles">TEMPORARY FILES</h2> -<p><B>ppmshadow</B> creates a number of temporary files as it executes. It +<p><b>ppmshadow</b> creates a number of temporary files as it executes. It creates a new directory for them in the directory named by the <b>TMPDIR</b> environment variable, defaulting to <b>/tmp</b> if it is not set. -<p>In normal operation, <B>ppmshadow</B> finds a unique name for the +<p>In normal operation, <b>ppmshadow</b> finds a unique name for the temporary directory and deletes each temporary file as soon as it is done with it and leaves no debris around after it completes. To preserve the intermediate files for debugging, use the -<B>-k</B> command line option. In that case, the directory name is +<b>-k</b> command line option. In that case, the directory name is <b>ppmshadow</b><i>pid</i>, where <i>pid</i> is the process ID of the <b>ppmshadow</b> process, and the program fails if <b>ppmshadow</b> cannot create that directory because the name is already in use. <p>The temporary files are: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><B>infile.ppm</b> -<DD> +<dt><b>infile.ppm</b> +<dd> A copy of the input. -<DT><B>background.ppm</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>background.ppm</b> +<dd> Blank image with background of source image -<DT><B>bgmask.ppm</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>bgmask.ppm</b> +<dd> Positive binary mask -<DT><B>convkernel.ppm</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>convkernel.ppm</b> +<dd> Convolution kernel for blurring shadow -<DT><B>blurredlackshad.ppm</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>blurredlackshad.ppm</b> +<dd> Blurred shadow image before coloring -<DT><B>blurred.ppm</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>blurred.ppm</b> +<dd> Blurred, colored shadow image -<DT><B>shadow.ppm</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>shadow.ppm</b> +<dd> Clipped shadow image, offset as requested -<DT><B>shadback.ppm</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>shadback.ppm</b> +<dd> Generated shadow times positive mask -</DL> +</dl> + + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmmargin.html">pnmmargin</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmsmooth.html">pnmsmooth</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -John Walker <<A -HREF="http://www.fourmilab.ch">http://www.fourmilab.ch</A>> August +John Walker <<a +href="http://www.fourmilab.ch">http://www.fourmilab.ch</a>> August 8, 1997 -<H2 id="copyright">COPYRIGHT</H2> +<h2 id="copyright">COPYRIGHT</h2> This software is in the public domain. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, without any conditions or restrictions. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#exitstatus">EXIT STATUS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#tempfiles">TEMPORARY FILES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -<LI><A HREF="#copyright">COPYRIGHT</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#exitstatus">EXIT STATUS</a> +<li><a href="#tempfiles">TEMPORARY FILES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#copyright">COPYRIGHT</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtoarbtxt.html b/ppmtoarbtxt.html index 5bc55b37..fef1cb18 100644 --- a/ppmtoarbtxt.html +++ b/ppmtoarbtxt.html @@ -1,24 +1,23 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtoarbtxt User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtoarbtxt</H1> -<BR> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmtoarbtxt User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtoarbtxt</h1> Updated: 26 November 2014 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtoarbtxt - generate image in arbitrary text format from PPM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtoarbtxt</B> -<I>bodytmpl</I> -[<B>-hd</B> <I>headtmpl</I>] -[<B>-tl</B> <I>tailtmpl</I>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +<b>ppmtoarbtxt</b> +<i>bodytmpl</i> +[<b>-hd</b> <i>headtmpl</i>] +[<b>-tl</b> <i>tailtmpl</i>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -29,7 +28,7 @@ PNM raw format). <b>ppmtoarbtxt</b> reads a PPM image as input. For each pixel in the image, <b>ppmtoarbtxt</b> writes the contents of the template file -<I>bodytmpl</I>, with certain substitutions based on the value of the +<i>bodytmpl</i>, with certain substitutions based on the value of the pixel, to Standard Output. <p>You may also supply a head template file, in which case <b>ppmtoarbtxt</b> @@ -47,7 +46,7 @@ literal text of the template file, except with substitution specifier replaced with something else. The program recognizes a substitution specifier as text of the form <b>#(</b>...<b>)</b>. -<P><b>ppmtoarbtxt</b> treats white space in the template files the same as any +<p><b>ppmtoarbtxt</b> treats white space in the template files the same as any other characters, placing it in the output, with one exception: If the template file ends with a newline character, <b>ppmtoarbtxt</b> ignores it -- it does not include it in the output. @@ -69,13 +68,13 @@ and fails. <p>Useful in a body template, to do substitutions based on a particular pixel: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>#(ired</B><I> format blackref whiteref</I><B>)</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>#(ired</b><i> format blackref whiteref</i><b>)</b> -<DD>generates an integer in the range <I>blackref</I> to -<I>whiteref</I> in a format specified by <I>format</I> representing the red -intensity of the pixel. A red intensity of 0 becomes <I>blackref</I>; a red -intensity of maxval becomes <I>whiteref</I>, with the rest linearly +<dd>generates an integer in the range <i>blackref</i> to +<i>whiteref</i> in a format specified by <i>format</i> representing the red +intensity of the pixel. A red intensity of 0 becomes <i>blackref</i>; a red +intensity of maxval becomes <i>whiteref</i>, with the rest linearly interpolated in between. <p><i>format</i> is a printf-like format specifier like "%d". @@ -86,47 +85,47 @@ makes sense; there are values you could specify that could even crash the program. To avoid unexpected behavior, keep format strings simple and hardcoded, and never include a per cent sign or newline. -<p><B>#(ired)</B> is equivalent to <B>#(ired %d 0 255)</B>. +<p><b>#(ired)</b> is equivalent to <b>#(ired %d 0 255)</b>. -<DT><B>#(igreen</B><I> format blackref whiteref</I><B>)</B> +<dt><b>#(igreen</b><i> format blackref whiteref</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Same as <B>#(ired...</B>, but for green. +<dd>Same as <b>#(ired...</b>, but for green. -<DT><B>#(iblue</B><I> format blackref whiteref</I><B>)</B> +<dt><b>#(iblue</b><i> format blackref whiteref</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Same as <B>#(ired...</B>, but for blue. +<dd>Same as <b>#(ired...</b>, but for blue. -<DT><B>#(ilum</B><I> format blackref whiteref</I><B>)</B> +<dt><b>#(ilum</b><i> format blackref whiteref</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Same as <B>#(ired...</B>, but representing the luminance value +<dd>Same as <b>#(ired...</b>, but representing the luminance value (0.299*red + 0.587*green + 0.114*blue) of the pixel. -<DT><B>#(fred</B><I> format blackref whiteref</I><B>)</B> +<dt><b>#(fred</b><i> format blackref whiteref</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Same as <B>#(ired...</B>, but generates a floating point number instead +<dd>Same as <b>#(ired...</b>, but generates a floating point number instead of an integer. <p>In this case, the second argument to the <b>fprintf</b> that uses <i>format</i> has a double precision floating point data type. -<p><B>#(fred)</B> is equivalent to <B>#(fred %f 0.0 1.0)</B>. +<p><b>#(fred)</b> is equivalent to <b>#(fred %f 0.0 1.0)</b>. -<DT><B>#(fgreen </B><I>format blackref whiteref</I><B>)</B> +<dt><b>#(fgreen </b><i>format blackref whiteref</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Same as <B>#(fred...</B>, but for green. +<dd>Same as <b>#(fred...</b>, but for green. -<DT><B>#(fblue </B><I>format blackref whiteref</I><B>)</B> +<dt><b>#(fblue </b><i>format blackref whiteref</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Same as <B>#(fred...</B>, but for blue. +<dd>Same as <b>#(fred...</b>, but for blue. -<DT><B>#(flum </B><I>format blackref whiteref</I><B>)</B> +<dt><b>#(flum </b><i>format blackref whiteref</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Same as <B>#(fred...</B>, but representing the luminance value +<dd>Same as <b>#(fred...</b>, but representing the luminance value (0.299*red + 0.587*green + 0.114*blue) of the pixel. -<DT><B>#(posx </B><i>format</i><b>)</b> +<dt><b>#(posx </b><i>format</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Generates the horizontal position of the pixel, in pixels from the left +<dd>Generates the horizontal position of the pixel, in pixels from the left edge of the image. <p>The second argument to the <b>fprintf</b> that uses <i>format</i> has an @@ -134,11 +133,11 @@ unsigned integer data type. <p><i>format</i> defaults to <b>%u</b> -<DT><B>#(posy </B><i>format</i><b>)</b> +<dt><b>#(posy </b><i>format</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Same as <b>#(width...</b>, but for the vertical position. +<dd>Same as <b>#(width...</b>, but for the vertical position. -</DL> +</dl> <p>If you use any of the above substitution specifiers in a head or tail template, the result is undefined. @@ -146,43 +145,48 @@ template, the result is undefined. <p>Useful in a head or tail template, to do substitutions based on whole-image attributes: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>#(width </B><i>format</i><b>)</b> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>#(width </b><i>format</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Generates the width in pixels of the image. +<dd>Generates the width in pixels of the image. <p>The second argument to the <b>fprintf</b> that uses <i>format</i> has an unsigned integer data type. <p><i>format</i> defaults to <b>%u</b> -<DT><B>#(height </B><i>format</i><b>)</b> +<dt><b>#(height </b><i>format</i><b>)</b> -<DD>Same as <b>#(width...</b>, but for the height of the image. +<dd>Same as <b>#(width...</b>, but for the height of the image. </dl> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtoarbtxt</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-hd</B> <I>headtmpl</I> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-hd</b> <i>headtmpl</i> -<DD>This option specifies a head template (<i>headtmpl</i> is the name of the +<dd>This option specifies a head template (<i>headtmpl</i> is the name of the head template file); it causes <b>ppmtoarbtxt</b> to place the contents of the -file named <I>headtmpl</I> at the beginning of the output +file named <i>headtmpl</i> at the beginning of the output -<DT><B>-tl</B> <I>tailtmpl</I> +<dt><b>-tl</b> <i>tailtmpl</i> -<DD>This option specifies a tail template; it is analogous to <b>-hd</b>. +<dd>This option specifies a tail template; it is analogous to <b>-hd</b>. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> -<h3>gray inversion</H3> +<h3>gray inversion</h3> -<P>Here we generate a PGM plain-format image with gray inversion +<p>Here we generate a PGM plain-format image with gray inversion (like <b>ppmtopgm | pnminvert</b>). <p>Contents of our head template file: @@ -193,7 +197,7 @@ P2 255 </pre> -<P>Contents of our body skeleton file: +<p>Contents of our body skeleton file: <pre> #(ilum %d 255 0) @@ -201,7 +205,7 @@ P2 <h3>povray file</h3> -<P>Here we generate a povray file where each pixel is represented by a +<p>Here we generate a povray file where each pixel is represented by a sphere at location (x,y,z) = (posx,height-posy,luminance). The color of the sphere is the color of the pixel. @@ -234,34 +238,34 @@ sphere { <#(posx),#(height)-#(posy),#(ilum %d 0 10)>, 0.5 } </pre> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A href="pnmtoplainpnm.html">pnmtoplainpnm</A> -<A href="pamtable.html">pamtable</A> -<A href="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="pnmtoplainpnm.html">pnmtoplainpnm</a> +<a href="pamtable.html">pamtable</a> +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><B>ppmtoarbtxt</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.14 (March 2003). +<p><b>ppmtoarbtxt</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.14 (March 2003). It existed under the name <b>ppmtotxt</b> since 1995. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1995 by Peter Kirchgessner -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> <ul> - <li><A HREF="#templatefiles">Template Files</A> + <li><a href="#templatefiles">Template Files</a> </ul> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtobmp.html b/ppmtobmp.html index 6584fcf8..2c8dac12 100644 --- a/ppmtobmp.html +++ b/ppmtobmp.html @@ -1,63 +1,67 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtobmp User Manual</TITLE> -</HEAD><BODY> -<H1>ppmtobmp</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmtobmp User Manual</title> +</head><body> +<h1>ppmtobmp</h1> Updated: 20 December 2018 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtobmp - convert a PPM image into a BMP file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtobmp</B> +<b>ppmtobmp</b> -[<B>-windows</B>] +[<b>-windows</b>] -[<B>-os2</B>] +[<b>-os2</b>] -[<B>-bpp=</B><I>bits_per_pixel</I>] +[<b>-bpp=</b><i>bits_per_pixel</i>] [<b>-mapfile=</b><i>filename</i>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ppmtobmp</b> reads a PPM image as input and produces a Microsoft Windows or OS/2 BMP file as output. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtobmp</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-windows</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-windows</b> -<DD>Tells the program to produce a Microsoft Windows BMP file. (This +<dd>Tells the program to produce a Microsoft Windows BMP file. (This is the default.) -<DT><B>-os2</B> +<dt><b>-os2</b> -<DD>Tells the program to produce an OS/2 BMP file. (Before August +<dd>Tells the program to produce an OS/2 BMP file. (Before August 2000, this was the default). -<DT><B>-bpp</B> +<dt><b>-bpp</b> -<DD>This tells how many bits per pixel you want the BMP file to +<dd>This tells how many bits per pixel you want the BMP file to contain. Only 1, 4, 8, and 24 are possible. By default, -<B>ppmtobmp</B> chooses the smallest number with which it can +<b>ppmtobmp</b> chooses the smallest number with which it can represent all the colors in the input image. If you specify a number too small to represent all the colors in the input image, -<B>ppmtobmp</B> tells you and terminates. You can use <B>pnmquant</B> -or <B>ppmdither</B> to reduce the number of colors in the image. +<b>ppmtobmp</b> tells you and terminates. You can use <b>pnmquant</b> +or <b>ppmdither</b> to reduce the number of colors in the image. <p>Before Netpbm 10.85 (December 2018), <b>ppmtobmp</b> ignores this option if the input is PBM and produces a BMP with 1 bit per pixel. With these @@ -102,58 +106,58 @@ file. <b>pamseq</b> too. palette in which each index is equal to the indexed gray value, and then ignoring the palette when you process the BMP image. -<P>Here is an example of doing that: +<p>Here is an example of doing that: <pre> <kbd> - $ pamseq 1 255 >mapfile.pgm + $ pamseq 1 255 > mapfile.pgm - $ ppmtobmp -mapfile=mapfile.pgm input.pgm >output.bmp + $ ppmtobmp -mapfile=mapfile.pgm input.pgm > output.bmp </kbd> </pre> <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.45 (December 2008). -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="notes">NOTES</H2> +<h2 id="notes">NOTES</h2> -<P>To get a faithful reproduction of the input image, the maxval of the +<p>To get a faithful reproduction of the input image, the maxval of the input image must be 255. If it is something else, the colors in the BMP file may be slightly different from the colors in the input. -<P>Windows icons are not BMP files. Use <B>ppmtowinicon</B> to +<p>Windows icons are not BMP files. Use <b>ppmtowinicon</b> to create those. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="bmptoppm.html">bmptoppm</A></B>, +<b><a href="bmptoppm.html">bmptoppm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppmtowinicon.html">ppmtowinicon</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppmtowinicon.html">ppmtowinicon</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppmdither.html">ppmdither</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppmdither.html">ppmdither</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1992 by David W. Sanderson. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#notes">NOTES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#notes">NOTES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtolj.html b/ppmtolj.html index de8c7034..ac8c8f64 100644 --- a/ppmtolj.html +++ b/ppmtolj.html @@ -1,69 +1,73 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtolj User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtolj</H1> -Updated: 4 Sept 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2 id="name">NAME</H2> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmtolj User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtolj</h1> +Updated: 04 September 2000 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtolj - convert a PPM image to an HP LaserJet PCL 5 Color file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtolj</B> +<b>ppmtolj</b> -[<b>-gamma</b> <I>val</I>] +[<b>-gamma</b> <i>val</i>] -[<B>-resolution</B> {<B>75</b>|<b>100</b>|<b>150</b>|<b>300</b>|<b>600</B>}] +[<b>-resolution</b> {<b>75</b>|<b>100</b>|<b>150</b>|<b>300</b>|<b>600</b>}] -[<B>-delta</B>] +[<b>-delta</b>] -[<B>-float</B>] +[<b>-float</b>] -[<B>-noreset</B>] +[<b>-noreset</b>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ppmtolj</b> reads a PPM image as input and converts it into a color file suitable to be printed by an HP color PCL 5 printer. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtolj</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-delta</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-delta</b> -<DD> +<dd> Apply delta row compression to reduce the size of the pcl file. -<DT><B>-gamma</B> <I>int</I> +<dt><b>-gamma</b> <i>int</i> -<DD> +<dd> Gamma correct the image using the integer parameter as a gamma (default 0). -<DT><B>-float</B> +<dt><b>-float</b> -<DD> +<dd> Suppress positioning information. The default is to write the sequence ESC&l0E to the output. -<DT><B>-noreset</B> +<dt><b>-noreset</b> -<DD> +<dd> Don't write the reset sequence to the beginning and end of the output. -<DT><B>-resolution</B> +<dt><b>-resolution</b> -<DD> +<dd> Set the required output resolution 75|100|150|300|600 -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> HP PCL 5 & Color Reference Guide, <a href="pnmtopclxl.html"><b>pnmtopclxl</b></a>, @@ -72,20 +76,20 @@ HP PCL 5 & Color Reference Guide, <a href="thinkjettopbm.html"><b>thinkjettopbm</b></a>, <a href="ppm.html"><b>ppm</b></a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Copyright (C) 2000 by Jonathan Melvin.(<A -HREF="mailto:jonathan.melvin@heywood.co.uk">jonathan.melvin@heywood.co.uk</A>) +Copyright (C) 2000 by Jonathan Melvin.(<a +href="mailto:jonathan.melvin@heywood.co.uk">jonathan.melvin@heywood.co.uk</a>) -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtopj.html b/ppmtopj.html index ea1fab7d..ab116e59 100644 --- a/ppmtopj.html +++ b/ppmtopj.html @@ -1,33 +1,32 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtopj User Manual</TITLE> -</HEAD><BODY> -<H1>ppmtopj</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmtopj User Manual</title> +</head><body> +<h1>ppmtopj</h1> Updated: 13 July 1991 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtopj - convert a PPM image to an HP PaintJet file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtopj</B> +<b>ppmtopj</b> -[<b>-gamma</b> <I>val</I>] +[<b>-gamma</b> <i>val</i>] -[<B>-xpos</B> <I>val</I>] +[<b>-xpos</b> <i>val</i>] -[<B>-ypos</B> <I>val</I>] +[<b>-ypos</b> <i>val</i>] -[<B>-back</B> {<B>dark</B>|<B>lite</B>}] +[<b>-back</b> {<b>dark</b>|<b>lite</b>}] -[<B>-rle</B>] +[<b>-rle</b>] -[<B>-center</B>] +[<b>-center</b>] -[<B>-render</B> { -<B>none</b> | +[<b>-render</b> { +<b>none</b> | <b>snap</b> | <b>bw</b> | <b>dither</b> | @@ -35,19 +34,19 @@ ppmtopj - convert a PPM image to an HP PaintJet file <b>monodither</b> | <b>monodiffuse</b> | <b>clusterdither</b> | -<b>monoclusterdither</B> +<b>monoclusterdither</b> }] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>ppmtopj</b> reads a PPM image as input and converts it into a +<p><b>ppmtopj</b> reads a PPM image as input and converts it into a format suitable to be printed by an HP PaintJet printer. -<P> +<p> For best results, the input file should be in 8-color RGB form; i.e. it should have only the 8 binary combinations of full-on and full-off primaries. @@ -63,76 +62,81 @@ Or you could use ppmdither -red 2 -green 2 -blue 2 </pre> -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtopj</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><B>-rle</B> +<dt><b>-rle</b> -<DD> +<dd> Run length encode the image. (This can result in larger images) -<DT><B>-back</B> +<dt><b>-back</b> -<DD> +<dd> Enhance the foreground by indicating if the background is light or dark compared to the foreground. -<DT><B>-render</B> <I>alg</I> +<dt><b>-render</b> <i>alg</i> -<DD> +<dd> Use an internal rendering algorithm (default dither). -<DT><B>-gamma</B> <I>int</I> +<dt><b>-gamma</b> <i>int</i> -<DD> +<dd> Gamma correct the image using the integer <i>int</i> as a gamma (default 0). -<DT><B>-center</B> +<dt><b>-center</b> -<DD> +<dd> Center the image to an 8.5 by 11 page -<DT><B>-xpos</B> <I>pos</I> +<dt><b>-xpos</b> <i>pos</i> -<DD> +<dd> Move by <i>pos</i> pixels in the x direction. -<DT><B>-ypos</B> <I>pos</I> +<dt><b>-ypos</b> <i>pos</i> -<DD> +<dd> Move by <i>pos</i> pixels in the y direction. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> HP PaintJet XL Color Graphics Printer User's Guide, <a href="pnmtopclxl.html"><b>pnmtopclxl</b></a>, <a href="pjtoppm.html"><b>pjtoppm</b></a>, -<A href="pamdepth.html"><b>pamdepth</b></A>, -<A HREF="pnmremap.html"><b>pnmremap</b></A>, -<A HREF="pamseq.html"><b>pamseq</b></A>, -<A HREF="ppmdither.html"><b>ppmdither</b></A>, +<a href="pamdepth.html"><b>pamdepth</b></a>, +<a href="pnmremap.html"><b>pnmremap</b></a>, +<a href="pamseq.html"><b>pamseq</b></a>, +<a href="ppmdither.html"><b>ppmdither</b></a>, <a href="pbmtolj.html"><b>pbmtolj</b></a>, <a href="ppmtolj.html"><b>ppmtolj</b></a>, <a href="ppmtopjxl.html"><b>ppmtopjxl</b></a>, <a href="thinkjettopbm.html"><b>thinkjettopbm</b></a>, -<A HREF="ppm.html"><b>ppm</b></A> +<a href="ppm.html"><b>ppm</b></a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Christos Zoulas. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtospu.html b/ppmtospu.html index 4423feb2..4c95d9b4 100644 --- a/ppmtospu.html +++ b/ppmtospu.html @@ -1,27 +1,26 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtospu User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtospu</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmtospu User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtospu</h1> Updated: 08 March 2012 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtospu - convert a PPM image to an Atari Spectrum 512 image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtospu</B> +<b>ppmtospu</b> [<b>-d0</b>|<b>-d2</b>|<b>-d4</b>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -36,7 +35,12 @@ image of a different size, you can use <b>pamcut</b> or <b>pamscale</b> to force it to these dimensions. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtospu</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> <dt><b>-d0</b> @@ -52,24 +56,24 @@ to force it to these dimensions. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="sputoppm.html">sputoppm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="spctoppm.html">spctoppm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamscale.html">pamscale</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="sputoppm.html">sputoppm</a></b>, +<b><a href="spctoppm.html">spctoppm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcut.html">pamcut</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1990 by Steve Belczyk -<h2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P>This program was new in Netpbm 10.58 (March 2012). +<p>This program was new in Netpbm 10.58 (March 2012). <p>But it was written in 1990. Steve Belczyk posted it along with <b>sputoppm</b>, <b>spctoppm</b>, <b>pi1toppm</b>, and @@ -78,7 +82,7 @@ to comp.sources.misc on July 15, 1990. For reasons that have been lost to history, all of these entered the Netpbm (then Pbmplus) distribution <em>except</em> <b>ppmtospu</b>. -<P>Georges Kesseler wondered In March 2012 why there was no counterpart to +<p>Georges Kesseler wondered In March 2012 why there was no counterpart to <b>sputoppm</b> in Netpbm and searched the web, finding only one reference to <b>ppmtopsu</b>: the 1990 comp.sources.misc posting, including the source code. He emailed the Netpbm maintainer suggesting it be added. @@ -88,15 +92,16 @@ using common library code. So Bryan completely recoded it, but retained nearly all of the original logic. -<HR> -<H2 id="contents">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtowinicon.html b/ppmtowinicon.html index 00b66f77..0d710bc6 100644 --- a/ppmtowinicon.html +++ b/ppmtowinicon.html @@ -1,26 +1,25 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtowinicon User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtowinicon</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmtowinicon User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtowinicon</h1> Updated: 01 May 2004 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtowinicon - convert PPM image into a Windows .ico file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtowinicon</B> +<b>ppmtowinicon</b> [<b>-andpgms</b>] -[<b>-output=</b><i>output.ico</I>] +[<b>-output=</b><i>output.ico</i>] -[<I>ppmfile</I> [<i>andfile</i>] ...] +[<i>ppmfile</i> [<i>andfile</i>] ...] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -30,12 +29,12 @@ better. <p><b>ppmtowinicon</b> reads one or more PPM images as input and produces a Microsoft Windows .ico file as output. -<P>A Windows icon contains 1 or more images, at different resolutions +<p>A Windows icon contains 1 or more images, at different resolutions and color depths. When Windows wants to display the icon, it searches through the images to find the one that best matches the number of colors and resolution of the display. -<P>Microsoft recommends including at least the following formats in each +<p>Microsoft recommends including at least the following formats in each icon. <ul> @@ -62,7 +61,7 @@ be opaque. Everywhere else, the icon will be transparent. Note that as with any Netpbm program, you can use a PBM image for the transparency mask and <b>ppmtowinicon</b> will treat it like a PGM. -<P>The and mask is like a transparency mask, except for what it signifies in +<p>The and mask is like a transparency mask, except for what it signifies in the "not opaque" areas. In the usual case, the foreground image is black in those areas, and in that case the areas are fully transparent -- the background shows through the icon. But in general, a not @@ -81,48 +80,53 @@ color your input image is at that location. <p>If you don't specify <b>-andmask</b>, <b>ppmtowinicon</b> puts all-opaque and masks into the .ico file. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtowinicon</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-andpgms</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-andpgms</b> -<DD>Include transparency information in the icons. +<dd>Include transparency information in the icons. See the <a href="#transparency">transparency section</a>. -<DT><B>-output=</b><i>output.ico</i> +<dt><b>-output=</b><i>output.ico</i> -<DD>Name of output file. By default, <b>ppmtowinicon</b> writes the +<dd>Name of output file. By default, <b>ppmtowinicon</b> writes the icon to Standard Output. -<DT><B>-truetransparent</b> +<dt><b>-truetransparent</b> <dd>Make transparency in the icon normal instead of the special reverse video effect. See the <a href="#transparency">transparency section</a>. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamtowinicon.html">pamtowinicon</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="winicontoppm.html">winicontoppm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A></B> +<b><a href="pamtowinicon.html">pamtowinicon</a></b>, +<b><a href="winicontoppm.html">winicontoppm</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> +<b><a href="pgm.html">pgm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 2000 by Lee Benfield. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<UL> - <LI><A HREF="#transparency">TRANSPARENCY</A> - </UL> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<ul> + <li><a href="#transparency">TRANSPARENCY</a> + </ul> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtoxpm.html b/ppmtoxpm.html index 1d863a46..89e67cf8 100644 --- a/ppmtoxpm.html +++ b/ppmtoxpm.html @@ -1,40 +1,40 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtoxpm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtoxpm</H1> -Updated: Feb 22 2003 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmtoxpm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtoxpm</h1> +Updated: 22 February 2003 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtoxpm - convert a PPM image to an X11 pixmap -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtoxpm </B> -[<B>-name=</B><I>xpmname</I>] -[<B>-hexonly</B>] -[<B>-rgb=</B><I>rgb-textfile</I>] -[<B>-alphamask=</B><I>pgmfile</I>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +<b>ppmtoxpm </b> +[<b>-name=</b><i>xpmname</i>] +[<b>-hexonly</b>] +[<b>-rgb=</b><i>rgb-textfile</i>] +[<b>-alphamask=</b><i>pgmfile</i>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] <p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ppmtoxpm</b> reads a PPM image as input and produces X11 pixmap (version 3) as output. This format can be loaded by the XPM library. -<P>In the XPM output, colors may be identified by name, such as "Red", or +<p>In the XPM output, colors may be identified by name, such as "Red", or in hexadecimal, for example "#FF0000". In the hexadecimal format, there may be from 1 through 4 hexadecimal digits per RGB component. <p>By default, <b>ppmtoxpbm</b> tries to find a name for each color in -the image in the <a href="libppm.html#rgb.txt">system color +the image in the <a href="libppm.html#dictionary">system color dictionary</a>, and if it finds one, uses it. If it doesn't it uses hexadecimal. You can force <b>ppmtoxpbm</b> to use hexadecimal only with the <b>-hexonly</b> option. You can specify a different color @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ input PPM is 100, <b>ppmtoxpm</b> uses 2 digits per component, as in <p>Some programs do not properly handle one-digit-per-component hexadecimal color specifiers. They see the wrong colors. To produce an XPM that such a program can handle, make sure the maxval of the input PPM -is greater than 15, such as by running it through <B>pamdepth 255</b>. +is greater than 15, such as by running it through <b>pamdepth 255</b>. <h3>Color Code Lengths - Image Size</h3> @@ -76,103 +76,107 @@ actually produce any transparent pixels. So subtract one from the number of possible colors if you use <b>-alpha</b>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-name=</B><I>xpmname</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtoxpm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>This option specifies the prefix string which is specified in the +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-name=</b><i>xpmname</i> + +<dd>This option specifies the prefix string which is specified in the resulting XPM output. If you don't use the <b>-name</b> otpion, <b>ppmtoxpm</b> defaults to the filename (without extension) of the -<i>ppmfile</i> parameter. If you do not specify <B>-name</B> or -<I>ppmfile</I> (i.e. your input is from Standard Input), the prefix -string defaults to the string <B>noname</B>. +<i>ppmfile</i> parameter. If you do not specify <b>-name</b> or +<i>ppmfile</i> (i.e. your input is from Standard Input), the prefix +string defaults to the string <b>noname</b>. -<DT><B>-hexonly</B> +<dt><b>-hexonly</b> -<DD>This option says never to put color names in the XPM file, but rather +<dd>This option says never to put color names in the XPM file, but rather to identify names by hexadecimal strings that explicitly identify RGB component intensities. This means the reader of the file need not have access to a suitable color dictionary to interpret it. -<P>This option was introduced in Netpbm 10.15 (April 2003). Before that, +<p>This option was introduced in Netpbm 10.15 (April 2003). Before that, it was the default, overridden by specifying <b>-rgb</b>. -<DT><B>-rgb=</B><I>rgb-textfile</I> +<dt><b>-rgb=</b><i>rgb-textfile</i> -<DD>This option names the file in which the color dictionary you want +<dd>This option names the file in which the color dictionary you want to use resides. By default, <b>ppmtoxpm</b> uses the <a -href="libppm.html#rgb.txt">system color dictionary</a>, and if it cannot +href="libppm.html#dictionary">system color dictionary</a>, and if it cannot open that file, uses hexadecimal color specifiers. -<P>This option in meaningless when you specify <b>-hexonly</b>. +<p>This option in meaningless when you specify <b>-hexonly</b>. -<P>Before Netpbm 10.15 (April 2003), <b>ppmtoxpm</b> did not default +<p>Before Netpbm 10.15 (April 2003), <b>ppmtoxpm</b> did not default to the system color dictionary. If you didn't specify <b>-rgb</b>, <b>ppmtoxpbm</b> would use only hexadecimal color specifiers. -<DT><B>-alphamask=</B><I>pgmfile</I> +<dt><b>-alphamask=</b><i>pgmfile</i> -<DD> This option names a PGM file to use as a transparency (alpha) +<dd> This option names a PGM file to use as a transparency (alpha) mask. The file must contain an image the same dimensions as the input -image. <B>ppmtoxpm</B> marks as transparent any pixel whose position +image. <b>ppmtoxpm</b> marks as transparent any pixel whose position in the transparency mask image is at most half white. -<P>If you don't specify <B>-alphamask</B>, <B>ppmtoxpm</B> makes all +<p>If you don't specify <b>-alphamask</b>, <b>ppmtoxpm</b> makes all pixels in the output opaque. -<P><B>ppmcolormask</B> is one way to generate a transparency mask file. You +<p><b>ppmcolormask</b> is one way to generate a transparency mask file. You might also generate it by extracting transparency information from an -XPM file with the <B>-alphaout</B> option to <B>xpmtoppm</B>. +XPM file with the <b>-alphaout</b> option to <b>xpmtoppm</b>. -<P>There are similar options on other Netpbm converters that convert from +<p>There are similar options on other Netpbm converters that convert from formats that include transparency information too. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="xpmtoppm.html">xpmtoppm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</a></b>, +<b><a href="xpmtoppm.html">xpmtoppm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<BR> -XPM Manual by Arnaud Le Hors <A -HREF="mailto:lehors@mirsa.inria.fr">lehors@mirsa.inria.fr</A> +<br> +XPM Manual by Arnaud Le Hors <a +href="mailto:lehors@mirsa.inria.fr">lehors@mirsa.inria.fr</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p> Copyright (C) 1990 by Mark W. Snitily. -<P> +<p> Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. -<P> +<p> This tool was developed for Schlumberger Technologies, ATE Division, and with their permission is being made available to the public with the above copyright notice and permission notice. -<P>Upgraded to XPM2 by Paul Breslaw, Mecasoft SA, Zurich, Switzerland (<A -HREF="mailto:paul@mecazh.uu.ch">paul@mecazh.uu.ch</A>), November 8, +<p>Upgraded to XPM2 by Paul Breslaw, Mecasoft SA, Zurich, Switzerland (<a +href="mailto:paul@mecazh.uu.ch">paul@mecazh.uu.ch</a>), November 8, 1990. -<P>Upgraded to XPM version 3 by Arnaud Le Hors(<A -HREF="mailto:lehors@mirsa.inria.fr">lehors@mirsa.inria.fr</A>), April +<p>Upgraded to XPM version 3 by Arnaud Le Hors(<a +href="mailto:lehors@mirsa.inria.fr">lehors@mirsa.inria.fr</a>), April 9, 1991. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmwheel.html b/ppmwheel.html index 3328cf7b..aaba119f 100644 --- a/ppmwheel.html +++ b/ppmwheel.html @@ -1,23 +1,23 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmwheel User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmwheel</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Ppmwheel User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmwheel</h1> Updated: 03 February 2019 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmwheel - make a PPM image of a color wheel -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmwheel</B> -<I>diameter</I> +<b>ppmwheel</b> +<i>diameter</i> [{<b>-huevalue</b> | <b>-huesaturation</b>}] -[<b>-maxval=</b><I>N</I>] +[<b>-maxval=</b><i>N</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ specified diameter inside a white square just large enough to hold it. </ul> -<H2 id="arguments">ARGUMENTS</H2> +<h2 id="arguments">ARGUMENTS</h2> <p>You must specify one non-option argument: the radius of the color wheel in pixels. @@ -61,7 +61,12 @@ in pixels. <p>This is also the height and width of the output image. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmwheel</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> <dt><b>-huevalue</b> @@ -79,31 +84,31 @@ in pixels. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmcie.html">ppmcie</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmrainbow.html">ppmrainbow</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppmcie.html">ppmcie</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmrainbow.html">ppmrainbow</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><b>ppmwheel</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.14 (March 2003). +<p><b>ppmwheel</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.14 (March 2003). -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1995 by Peter Kirchgessner -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#arguments">ARGUMENTS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#arguments">ARGUMENTS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pstopnm.html b/pstopnm.html index 7b36fbfc..470c76a1 100644 --- a/pstopnm.html +++ b/pstopnm.html @@ -1,66 +1,65 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pstopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pstopnm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Pstopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pstopnm</h1> Updated: 06 December 2013 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pstopnm - convert a PostScript file to a PNM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pstopnm</B> +<b>pstopnm</b> -[<B>-stdout</B>] +[<b>-stdout</b>] -[<B>-forceplain</B>] +[<b>-forceplain</b>] -[<B>-help</B>] +[<b>-help</b>] -[<B>-dpi=</b><i>dpi</i>] +[<b>-dpi=</b><i>dpi</i>] -[<B>-xsize=</B><I>pixels</I>] -[<B>-ysize=</B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-xsize=</b><i>pixels</i>] +[<b>-ysize=</b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-xborder=</B><I>frac</I>] -[<B>-yborder=</B><I>frac</I>] -[<B>-landscape</B>] +[<b>-xborder=</b><i>frac</i>] +[<b>-yborder=</b><i>frac</i>] +[<b>-landscape</b>] -[<B>-portrait</B>] +[<b>-portrait</b>] -[<B>-nocrop</B>] +[<b>-nocrop</b>] -[<B>-pbm</B> +[<b>-pbm</b> -|<B>-pgm</B> +|<b>-pgm</b> -|<B>-ppm</B>] +|<b>-ppm</b>] -[<B>-llx=</B><I>s</I>] -[<B>-lly=</B><I>s</I>] -[<B>-urx=</B><I>s</I>] -[<B>-ury=</B><I>s</I>] +[<b>-llx=</b><i>s</i>] +[<b>-lly=</b><i>s</i>] +[<b>-urx=</b><i>s</i>] +[<b>-ury=</b><i>s</i>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<B>-xmax=</B><I>pixels</I>] -[<B>-ymax=</B><I>pixels</I>] +[<b>-xmax=</b><i>pixels</i>] +[<b>-ymax=</b><i>pixels</i>] -[<B>-textalphabits=</B>{<b>1</b>,<b>2</b>,<b>4</b>}] +[<b>-textalphabits=</b>{<b>1</b>,<b>2</b>,<b>4</b>}] -<I>psfile</I>[<B>.ps</B>] +<i>psfile</i>[<b>.ps</b>] -<?makeman .SH OPTION USAGE ?> -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<?makeman .sh option usage ?> +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -68,11 +67,11 @@ from its value. PGM, or PPM images as output. This program simply uses GhostScript to render a PostScript file with its PNM device drivers. If you don't have GhostScript installed or the version you have installed was not -built with the relevant PNM device drivers, <B>pstopnm</B> will fail. +built with the relevant PNM device drivers, <b>pstopnm</b> will fail. You can see if you have the proper environment by issuing the command <kbd>gs --help </kbd>. If it responds and lists under "Available -Devices" <B>pbm</B>, <B>pbmraw</B>, <B>pgm</B>, <B>pgmraw</B>, -<B>pnm</B>, <B>pnmraw</B>, <B>ppm</B>, or <B>ppmraw</B>, you're in +Devices" <b>pbm</b>, <b>pbmraw</b>, <b>pgm</b>, <b>pgmraw</b>, +<b>pnm</b>, <b>pnmraw</b>, <b>ppm</b>, or <b>ppmraw</b>, you're in business. <p>It's important to understand that <b>pstopnm</b> is a Netpbm image file @@ -82,35 +81,35 @@ renderer - an image generator. One place you'll notice the difference is where you expect <kbd>pstopnm | pnmtops</kbd> to be idempotent (which is not the case). There are details on this kind of conversion below. -<P><B>pstopnm</B> uses the value of the <B>GHOSTSCRIPT</B> +<p><b>pstopnm</b> uses the value of the <b>GHOSTSCRIPT</b> environment variable as the file name for the Ghostscript program. If -<B>GHOSTSCRIPT</B> is not set, <B>pstopnm</B> searches your -<B>PATH</B> for a regular file named <B>gs</B>. If it doesn't find +<b>GHOSTSCRIPT</b> is not set, <b>pstopnm</b> searches your +<b>PATH</b> for a regular file named <b>gs</b>. If it doesn't find one, it assumes Ghostscript is in the file <b>/usr/bin/gs</b>. -<P><B>pstopnm</B> does not use the Netpbm libraries to generate the +<p><b>pstopnm</b> does not use the Netpbm libraries to generate the output files, so may not be entirely consistent with most Netpbm programs. -<P><I>psfile</I>[<B>.ps</B>] is the name of the input file. -<B>pstopnm</B> will add the <B>ps</B> to the end of the name you specify if no +<p><i>psfile</i>[<b>.ps</b>] is the name of the input file. +<b>pstopnm</b> will add the <b>ps</b> to the end of the name you specify if no file exists by the exact name you specify, but one with <b>.ps</b>added does. -For Standard Input, use <B>-</B> or just don't give any argument. +For Standard Input, use <b>-</b> or just don't give any argument. -<P>If you use the <B>-stdout </B> option or your input is from Standard -Input, <B>pstopnm</B> outputs images of all the pages as a multi-image file to -Standard Output. Otherwise, <B>pstopnm</B> creates one file for each page in +<p>If you use the <b>-stdout </b> option or your input is from Standard +Input, <b>pstopnm</b> outputs images of all the pages as a multi-image file to +Standard Output. Otherwise, <b>pstopnm</b> creates one file for each page in the Postscript input. The files are named as follows: If the input file is -named <B>psfile.ps</B>, the name of the files will be -<B>psfile001.ppm</B>, <B>psfile002.ppm</B>, etc. The filetype suffix -is <B>.ppm</B>, <B>.pgm</B>, or <B>.pbm</B>, depending on which kind +named <b>psfile.ps</b>, the name of the files will be +<b>psfile001.ppm</b>, <b>psfile002.ppm</b>, etc. The filetype suffix +is <b>.ppm</b>, <b>.pgm</b>, or <b>.pbm</b>, depending on which kind of output you choose with your invocation options. If the input file -name does not end in <B>.ps</B>, the whole file name is used in the +name does not end in <b>.ps</b>, the whole file name is used in the output file name. For example, if the input file is named -<B>psfile.old</B>, the output file name is <B>psfile.old001.ppm</B>, +<b>psfile.old</b>, the output file name is <b>psfile.old001.ppm</b>, etc. -<P>Note that the output file selection is inconsistent with most +<p>Note that the output file selection is inconsistent with most Netpbm programs, because it does not default to Standard Output. This is for historical reasons, based on the fact that the Netpbm formats did not always provide for a sequence of images in a single file. @@ -136,14 +135,13 @@ details on what part of the input image goes into the output image and how big it is in the output and what borders and margins are in the output image. -<P>It has been reported that on some Postscript Version 1 input, -Ghostscript, and therefore <B>pstopnm</B>, produces no output. To +<p>It has been reported that on some Postscript Version 1 input, +Ghostscript, and therefore <b>pstopnm</b>, produces no output. To solve this problem, you can convert the file to Postscript Version 3 -with the program <B>ps2ps</B>. It is reported that the program -<B>pstops</B> does not work. +with the program <b>ps2ps</b>. It is reported that the program +<b>pstops</b> does not work. -<a name="dimensions"></a> -<h3>Dimensions</h3> +<h3 id="dimensions">Dimensions</h3> <p>This section describes what part of the input image gets used in the output and the dimensions of the output, including borders and @@ -166,15 +164,15 @@ defined by four numbers, the lower left corner and the upper right corner x and y coordinates. These coordinates are usually specified by the BoundingBox DSC statement (a Postscript comment) in the PostScript file, but they can be overridden by the user by specifying -one or more of the following options: <B>-llx</B>, <B>-lly</B>, -<B>-urx</B>, and <B>-ury</B>. +one or more of the following options: <b>-llx</b>, <b>-lly</b>, +<b>-urx</b>, and <b>-ury</b>. <p>The presence and thickness of a border to be added to the subject image to form the bordered subject image is controlled by the options -<B>-xborder</B> and <B>-yborder</B>. If <B>pstopnm</B> does not find +<b>-xborder</b> and <b>-yborder</b>. If <b>pstopnm</b> does not find a BoundingBox statement in the input, and you don't specify image area -coordinates on the command line, <B>pstopnm</B> uses default values. -If your input is from Standard Input, <B>pstopnm</B> does not use the +coordinates on the command line, <b>pstopnm</b> uses default values. +If your input is from Standard Input, <b>pstopnm</b> does not use the BoundingBox values (because of the technical difficulty of extracting that information and still feeding the file to Ghostscript), so you either have to specify the image area coordinates or take the default. @@ -265,7 +263,7 @@ Postcript File Conversions</a> by Andrew T. Young. <pre> <kbd> $ pnmtops -nocenter -equalpixels -dpi 72 -noturn testimg.ppm > testimg.ps - $ pstopnm -xborder=0 -yborder=0 -xsize=<i>XSIZE</i> -ysize=<I>YSIZE</I> \ + $ pstopnm -xborder=0 -yborder=0 -xsize=<i>XSIZE</i> -ysize=<i>YSIZE</i> \ -portrait -stdout -quiet testimg.ps >testimg2.ppm </kbd> </pre> @@ -296,30 +294,35 @@ wouldn't use those in a program). reversible conversion. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pstopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-forceplain</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-forceplain</b> -<DD> forces the output file to be in plain (text) format. Otherwise, -it is in raw (binary) format. See <B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, +<dd> forces the output file to be in plain (text) format. Otherwise, +it is in raw (binary) format. See <b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, etc. -<DT><B>-llx=</B><I>bx</I> +<dt><b>-llx=</b><i>bx</i> -<DD>selects <I>bx</I> as the lower left corner x coordinate (in +<dd>selects <i>bx</i> as the lower left corner x coordinate (in inches) on the Postscript input page of the subject image. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-lly=</B><I>by</I> +<dt><b>-lly=</b><i>by</i> -<DD>selects <I>by</I> as the lower left corner y coordinate (in inches) +<dd>selects <i>by</i> as the lower left corner y coordinate (in inches) on the Postscript input page of the subject image. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-landscape</B> +<dt><b>-landscape</b> -<DD>renders the image in landscape orientation. +<dd>renders the image in landscape orientation. <p>If you specify neither <b>-portrait</b> nor <b>-landscape</b>, <b>pstopnm</b> chooses the orientation that best fits the image on the @@ -328,95 +331,95 @@ output page. <p>Landscape means printed sideways on the page, not printed the long way. Those are different things if the long edge of the page is the top one. -<DT><B>-portrait</B> +<dt><b>-portrait</b> -<DD>renders the image in portrait orientation. +<dd>renders the image in portrait orientation. <p>See <b>-landscape</b>. -<DT><B>-nocrop</B> +<dt><b>-nocrop</b> -<DD>This option causes <b>pstopnm</b> to make the output image +<dd>This option causes <b>pstopnm</b> to make the output image exactly the dimensions of the bordered subject image. By default, <b>pstopnm</b> makes the output image the dimensions specified by <b>-xmax</b> and <b>-ymax</b>. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-pbm</b> -<DT><B>-pgm</B> -<DT><B>-ppm</B> +<dt><b>-pbm</b> +<dt><b>-pgm</b> +<dt><b>-ppm</b> -<DD> +<dd> selects the format of the output file. By default, all files are rendered as PPM. -<DT><B>-stdout</B> +<dt><b>-stdout</b> -<DD>causes output to go to Standard Output instead of to regular +<dd>causes output to go to Standard Output instead of to regular files, one per page (see description of output files above). Use -<B>pnmsplit</B> to extract individual pages from Standard Output. +<b>pnmsplit</b> to extract individual pages from Standard Output. -<DT><B>-urx=</B><I>tx</I> +<dt><b>-urx=</b><i>tx</i> -<DD>selects <I>tx</I> as the upper right corner x coordinate (in +<dd>selects <i>tx</i> as the upper right corner x coordinate (in inches) on the Postscript input page of the subject image. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-ury=</B><I>ty</I> +<dt><b>-ury=</b><i>ty</i> -<DD>selects <I>ty</I> as the upper right corner y coordinate (in +<dd>selects <i>ty</i> as the upper right corner y coordinate (in inches) on the Postscript input page of the subject image. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD> +<dd> prints processing information to stdout. -<DT><B>-xborder=</B><I>frac</I> +<dt><b>-xborder=</b><i>frac</i> -<DD>specifies that the left and right borders added to the subject -image are to be <I>frac</I> times the subject image width. The +<dd>specifies that the left and right borders added to the subject +image are to be <i>frac</i> times the subject image width. The default value is 0.1. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-xmax=</B><I>xmax</I> +<dt><b>-xmax=</b><i>xmax</i> -<DD>specifies that the output image is to be <I>xmax</I> pixels wide. +<dd>specifies that the output image is to be <i>xmax</i> pixels wide. The default is 612. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-xsize=</B><I>xsize</I> +<dt><b>-xsize=</b><i>xsize</i> -<DD>specifies that the output image is to be <I>xsize</I> pixels wide. +<dd>specifies that the output image is to be <i>xsize</i> pixels wide. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-yborder=</B><I>frac</I> +<dt><b>-yborder=</b><i>frac</i> -<DD>specifies that the top and bottom borders added to the subject -image are to be <I>frac</I> times the subject image height. The +<dd>specifies that the top and bottom borders added to the subject +image are to be <i>frac</i> times the subject image height. The default value is 0.1. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-ymax=</B><I>ymax</I> +<dt><b>-ymax=</b><i>ymax</i> -<DD> +<dd> specifies that the output image is to be <i>ymax</i> pixels high. The default is 792. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-ysize=</B><I>ysize</I> +<dt><b>-ysize=</b><i>ysize</i> -<DD>specifies that the output image is to be <i>ymax</i> pixels high. +<dd>specifies that the output image is to be <i>ymax</i> pixels high. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. -<DT><B>-dpi=</b><i>dpi</i> +<dt><b>-dpi=</b><i>dpi</i> -<DD>specifies the output device resolution, in dots per inch, of the +<dd>specifies the output device resolution, in dots per inch, of the Postscript printer that <b>pstopnm</b> simulates. This is the number of PNM pixels <b>pstopnm</b> generates for each inch of image. See <a href="#dimensions">the Dimensions section</a>. @@ -436,15 +439,15 @@ time. <p>The default is 4. -<P>This option was new in Netpbm 10.53 (December 2010). Older versions of +<p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.53 (December 2010). Older versions of <b>pstopnm</b> do no antialiasing. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> -<P>The program will produce incorrect results with PostScript files that +<p>The program will produce incorrect results with PostScript files that initialize the current transformation matrix. In these cases, page translation and rotation will not have any effect. To render these files, probably the best bet is to use the following options: @@ -453,42 +456,42 @@ files, probably the best bet is to use the following options: pstopnm -xborder 0 -yborder 0 -portrait -nocrop file.ps </pre> -<P>Additional options may be needed if the document is supposed to be +<p>Additional options may be needed if the document is supposed to be rendered on a medium different from letter-size paper. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B>gs</B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmtops.html">pnmtops</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="psidtopgm.html">psidtopgm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtolps.html">pbmtolps</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtoepsi.html">pbmtoepsi</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmsplit.html">pnmsplit</A></B>, -<B>pstofits</B> +<b>gs</b>, +<b><a href="pnmtops.html">pnmtops</a></b>, +<b><a href="psidtopgm.html">psidtopgm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmtolps.html">pbmtolps</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmtoepsi.html">pbmtoepsi</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmsplit.html">pnmsplit</a></b>, +<b>pstofits</b> -<H2 id="copyright">COPYRIGHT</H2> +<h2 id="copyright">COPYRIGHT</h2> <p>Copyright (c) 1992 Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory <p>PostScript is a Trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Alberto Accomazzi, WIPL, Center for Astrophysics. -<HR> -<H2 id="table">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#copyright">COPYRIGHT</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#copyright">COPYRIGHT</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/rasttopnm.html b/rasttopnm.html index 3b8feb9c..b2f62fff 100644 --- a/rasttopnm.html +++ b/rasttopnm.html @@ -1,23 +1,23 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Rasttopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>rasttopnm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Rasttopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>rasttopnm</h1> Updated: 16 August 2011 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> rasttopnm - convert a Sun rasterfile to a PNM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>rasttopnm</B> +<b>rasttopnm</b> [<b>-index</b>] -[<I>rastfile</I>] +[<i>rastfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -30,6 +30,11 @@ generating. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>rasttopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line option: + <dl> <dt><b>-index</b> @@ -54,22 +59,23 @@ unmodified image. </dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pnmtorast.html">pnmtorast</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<a href="pnmtorast.html">pnmtorast</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsys">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/rletopnm.html b/rletopnm.html index 02132311..93a4d267 100644 --- a/rletopnm.html +++ b/rletopnm.html @@ -1,78 +1,83 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Rletopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>RLETOPNM</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Rletopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>rletopnm</h1> Updated: 13 April 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> rletopnm - convert a Utah Raster Tools RLE image file to a PNM image file. -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>rletopnm</B> +<b>rletopnm</b> -[<B>--alphaout=</B>{<I>alpha-filename</I>,<B>-</B>}] -[<B>--headerdump</B>|<B>-h</B>] +[<b>--alphaout=</b>{<i>alpha-filename</i>,<b>-</b>}] +[<b>--headerdump</b>|<b>-h</b>] -[<B>--verbose</B>|<B>-v</B>] +[<b>--verbose</b>|<b>-v</b>] -[<I>rlefile</I>|<B>-</B>] +[<i>rlefile</i>|<b>-</b>] -<P>All options may be abbreviated to their minimum unique abbreviation +<p>All options may be abbreviated to their minimum unique abbreviation and options and arguments may be in any order. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>rletopnm</b> converts Utah Raster Toolkit RLE image files to PNM -image files. <B>rletopnm</B> handles four types of RLE files: +image files. <b>rletopnm</b> handles four types of RLE files: Grayscale (8 bit data, no color map), Pseudocolor (8 bit data with a color map), Truecolor (24 bit data with color map), and Directcolor -(24 bit data, no color map). <B>rletopnm</B> generates a PPM file for +(24 bit data, no color map). <b>rletopnm</b> generates a PPM file for all these cases except for the Grayscale file, for which -<B>rletopnm</B> generates a PGM file. +<b>rletopnm</b> generates a PGM file. -<P><I>rlefile</I> is the RLE input file. If it is absent or <B>-</B>, +<p><i>rlefile</i> is the RLE input file. If it is absent or <b>-</b>, the input comes from Standard Input. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>--alphaout=</B><I>alpha-filename</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>rletopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> -<B>rletopnm </B> creates a PGM (portable graymap) file containing the +<dl compact> +<dt><b>--alphaout=</b><i>alpha-filename</i> + +<dd> +<b>rletopnm </b> creates a PGM (portable graymap) file containing the transparency channel values in the input image. If the input image doesn't -contain an transparency channel, the <I>alpha-filename</I> file contains all +contain an transparency channel, the <i>alpha-filename</i> file contains all zero (transparent) transparency values. If you don't specify -<B>--alphaout</B>, <B>rletopnm</B> does not generate a transparency file, -and if the input image has a transparency channel, <B>rletopnm</B> simply +<b>--alphaout</b>, <b>rletopnm</b> does not generate a transparency file, +and if the input image has a transparency channel, <b>rletopnm</b> simply discards it. -<P>If you specify <B>-</B> as the filename, <B>rletopnm</B> writes the +<p>If you specify <b>-</b> as the filename, <b>rletopnm</b> writes the transparency output to Standard Output and discards the image. -<P>See <B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B> for one way to use +<p>See <b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b> for one way to use the transparency output file. -<DT><B>--verbose</B> +<dt><b>--verbose</b> -<DD>This option causes <B>rletopnm </B> to operate in verbose mode. +<dd>This option causes <b>rletopnm </b> to operate in verbose mode. It prints messages about what it's doing, including the contents of the RLE image header, to Standard Error. -<DT><B>--headerdump</B> +<dt><b>--headerdump</b> -<DD>This option causes <B>rletopnm</B> to operate in header dump mode. +<dd>This option causes <b>rletopnm</b> to operate in header dump mode. It prints the contents of the RLE image header to Standard Error, but does not produce any other output. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> <ul> <li>While running in verbose mode, convert lenna.rle to PPM format and @@ -105,42 +110,42 @@ dartalpha.pgm): </ul> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmtorle.html">pnmtorle</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmtorle.html">pnmtorle</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pgm.html">pgm</a></b>, -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Wes Barris -<BR> +<br> Army High Performance Computing Research Center (AHPCRC) -<BR> +<br> Minnesota Supercomputer Center, Inc. -<P>Modifications by Eric Haines to support raw and plain formats. +<p>Modifications by Eric Haines to support raw and plain formats. -<P>Modifications by Bryan Henderson to create transparency files and use +<p>Modifications by Bryan Henderson to create transparency files and use mnemonic options. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/sgitopnm.html b/sgitopnm.html index c153e098..d6e4c336 100644 --- a/sgitopnm.html +++ b/sgitopnm.html @@ -1,27 +1,26 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Sgitopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>sgitopnm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Sgitopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>sgitopnm</h1> Updated: 25 April 2014 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> sgitopnm - convert a SGI image file to PNM -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>sgitopnm</B> +<b>sgitopnm</b> -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<B>-channel</B> <I>c</I>] +[<b>-channel</b> <i>c</i>] -[<I>SgiFileName</I>] +[<i>SgiFileName</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -29,7 +28,7 @@ sgitopnm - convert a SGI image file to PNM image for a 2-dimensional (1- or 2-channel) input file, and a PPM image for a 3-dimensional (3 or more channels) input file. -<P>Alternatively, the program produces a PGM image of any one of the +<p>Alternatively, the program produces a PGM image of any one of the channels in the input file. <p>Before Netpbm 10.67 (June 2014), <b>sgitopnm</b> does not work on 2-channel @@ -42,18 +41,23 @@ Standard Input. be a seekable file, so for example you can't feed it from a pipe. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>sgitopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Give some information about the SGI image file. +<dd>Give some information about the SGI image file. -<DT><B>-channel</B> <I>n</I> +<dt><b>-channel</b> <i>n</i> -<DD>Extract channel <I>n</I> of the image as a PGM image. +<dd>Extract channel <i>n</i> of the image as a PGM image. -<p>Without this option, <B>sgitopnm</B> extracts the first 3 channels as a PPM +<p>Without this option, <b>sgitopnm</b> extracts the first 3 channels as a PPM image or, if the input has 1 or 2 channels, extracts the first channel as a PGM image. @@ -62,9 +66,9 @@ the transparency information with <b>-channel=2</b>. You could then combine them into a PAM image of tuple type GRAYSCALE_ALPHA with <b>pamstack</b>. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="references">REFERENCES</H2> +<h2 id="references">REFERENCES</h2> <p>The SGI image format specification version 1.0 is at ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/grafica/sgiimage.html . @@ -73,29 +77,29 @@ ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/grafica/sgiimage.html . https://github.com/ZaaLabs/ZaaIL-TestImages/tree/master/SGI . -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmtosgi.html">pnmtosgi</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamstack.html">pamstack</A></B> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmtosgi.html">pnmtosgi</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamstack.html">pamstack</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Copyright (C) 1994 by Ingo Wilken -(<A HREF="mailto:Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de"> -Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de</A>) - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#references">REFERENCES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +(<a href="mailto:Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de"> +Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de</a>) + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#references">REFERENCES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/srftopam.html b/srftopam.html index 822c8a9c..e5dea0bc 100644 --- a/srftopam.html +++ b/srftopam.html @@ -1,34 +1,25 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en"> -<head> -<title>Srftopam User Manual</title> -<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=us-ascii" /> -</head> - +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Srftopam User Manual</title></head> <body> - <h1>srftopam</h1> - -<p>Updated: 27 May 2011</p> - -<p><a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a></p> - +Updated: 27 May 2011 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> <h2>NAME</h2> - -<p>srftopam - convert a SRF image file to Netpbm images</p> +srftopam - convert a SRF image file to Netpbm images -<h2><a id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></h2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <p><b>srftopam</b> [<b>-verbose</b>] [<i>netpbmfile</i>] -<h2><a id="description">DESCRIPTION</a></h2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> -<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>.</p> +<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>srftopam</b> reads a SRF image file as input and produces a multi-image stream of PAM images as output. @@ -36,7 +27,7 @@ multi-image stream of PAM images as output. <p>This program performs the inverse of the conversion that <b>pamtosrf</b> does. See that program's manual for more information about SRF and the relationship between the SRF and Netpbm representation of the -images.</p> +images. <p><i>netpbmfile</i> is the input stream, which defaults to Standard Input. Output is always on Standard Output. @@ -44,6 +35,11 @@ Output is always on Standard Output. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>srftopam</b> recognizes the following +command line option: + <dl> <dt><b>-verbose</b></dt> <dd>Issue informational messages about the input and the conversion process. @@ -51,7 +47,7 @@ Output is always on Standard Output. </dl> -<h2><a id="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></h2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> <ul> <li><a href="pamtosrf.html">pamtosrf</a> @@ -62,9 +58,9 @@ Output is always on Standard Output. <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><b>srftopam</b> was new in Netpbm 10.55 (June 2011). +<p><b>srftopam</b> was new in Netpbm 10.55 (June 2011). -<P>It was contributed by Mike Frysinger. +<p>It was contributed by Mike Frysinger. <hr /> @@ -72,11 +68,11 @@ Output is always on Standard Output. <h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> <ul> -<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></li> -<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a></li> -<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a></li> -<li><a href="#see_also">SEE ALSO</a></li> -<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a></li> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> </ul> </body> diff --git a/svgtopam.html b/svgtopam.html index 01b53735..8f25ef2d 100644 --- a/svgtopam.html +++ b/svgtopam.html @@ -1,26 +1,26 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Svgtopam User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>svgtopam</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Svgtopam User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>svgtopam</h1> Updated: 28 June 2017 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> svgtopam - convert an SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) image to Netpbm format -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>svgtopam</B> +<b>svgtopam</b> [<b>-trace</b>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use +<p>Minimum unique abbreviation of option is acceptable. You may use double hyphens instead of single hyphen to denote options. You may use white space in place of the equals sign to separate an option name from its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -52,21 +52,26 @@ href="http://www.w3.org/Graphics/SVG/">the Worldwide Web Consortium's SVG web page</a>. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>svgtopam</b> recognizes the following +command line option: + +<dl compact> <dt><b>-trace</b> <dd>This option makes <b>svgtopam</b> issue messages describing the drawing. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamtosvg.html">pamtosvg</A></B>, -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A>, +<b><a href="pamtosvg.html">pamtosvg</a></b>, +<a href="pam.html">pam</a>, <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -74,15 +79,14 @@ SVG web page</a>. <p>Bryan Henderson created <b>svgtopam</b> to test <b>pamtosvg</b>. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/winicontoppm.html b/winicontoppm.html index a71a2838..a35b406a 100644 --- a/winicontoppm.html +++ b/winicontoppm.html @@ -1,25 +1,25 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Winicontoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>winicontoppm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Winicontoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>winicontoppm</h1> Updated: 23 March 2003 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> winicontoppm - convert a Windows .ico image into 1 or more PPM images -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>winicontoppm</B> -[<B>-writeands</B>] -[<B>-allicons</B>|<b>-bestqual</b>] +<b>winicontoppm</b> +[<b>-writeands</b>] +[<b>-allicons</b>|<b>-bestqual</b>] [<b>-multippm</b>] [<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>iconfile</I>] -[<I>ppmdestfile</I>] +[<i>iconfile</i>] +[<i>ppmdestfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -29,75 +29,80 @@ better. <p><b>winicontoppm</b> reads a Microsoft Windows .ico file and converts it to one or more PPMs. -<P>A Windows icon contains one or more images, at different resolutions +<p>A Windows icon contains one or more images, at different resolutions and color depths. Each image has an 'and' mask, which contains transparancy data. -<P>By default, the output goes to Standard Output. If you specify -<I>ppmdestfile</I>, output goes into one or more files named as -follows. If it's just one file (i.e. you specify the <B>-multippm</B> -option or don't specify <B>-allicons</B>), the file name is -<I>ppmdestfile</I><B>.ppm</B>. If it's multiple files, their file -names are <I>ppmdestfile</I><B>_1.ppm</B>, -<I>ppmdestfile</I><B>_2.ppm</B>, etc. <P> When you specify the -<B>-writeands</B> option, the file names above are modified to include -the string <B>xor</B> as in <I>ppmdestfile</I><B>_xor.ppm</B> or -<I>ppmdestfile</I><B>_xor_1.ppm</B>. - -<P><B>winicontoppm</b> can convert .ico images with 1, 4, 8, 24, or +<p>By default, the output goes to Standard Output. If you specify +<i>ppmdestfile</i>, output goes into one or more files named as +follows. If it's just one file (i.e. you specify the <b>-multippm</b> +option or don't specify <b>-allicons</b>), the file name is +<i>ppmdestfile</i><b>.ppm</b>. If it's multiple files, their file +names are <i>ppmdestfile</i><b>_1.ppm</b>, +<i>ppmdestfile</i><b>_2.ppm</b>, etc. <p> When you specify the +<b>-writeands</b> option, the file names above are modified to include +the string <b>xor</b> as in <i>ppmdestfile</i><b>_xor.ppm</b> or +<i>ppmdestfile</i><b>_xor_1.ppm</b>. + +<p><b>winicontoppm</b> can convert .ico images with 1, 4, 8, 24, or 32 bits per pixel. Before Netpbm 10.15 (April 2003), it could not handle 24 and 32. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-writeands</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>winicontoppm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>For each icon written, also write the 'and' (transparancy) mask as +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-writeands</b> + +<dd>For each icon written, also write the 'and' (transparancy) mask as a separate PBM file. It's name is of the form -<I>ppmdestfile</I><B>_and.pbm</B> or -<I>ppmdestfile</I><B>_and_1.pbm</B>. +<i>ppmdestfile</i><b>_and.pbm</b> or +<i>ppmdestfile</i><b>_and_1.pbm</b>. -<DT><B>-allicons</B> +<dt><b>-allicons</b> -<DD>Extract all images from the .ico file. +<dd>Extract all images from the .ico file. <p>If you specify neither this nor <b>-bestqual</b>, <b>winicontoppm</b> extracts the first image. -<DT><B>-bestqual</B> +<dt><b>-bestqual</b> -<DD>Extract only the best quality (largest, then highest bpp) image +<dd>Extract only the best quality (largest, then highest bpp) image from the .ico file. <p>If you specify neither this nor <b>-allicons</b>, <b>winicontoppm</b> extracts the first image. -<DT><B>-multippm</B> +<dt><b>-multippm</b> -<DD>Write all PPMs to a single file. +<dd>Write all PPMs to a single file. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="winicontopam.html">winicontopam</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamtowinicon.html">pamtowinicon</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="bmptopnm.html">bmptopnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="winicontopam.html">winicontopam</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamtowinicon.html">pamtowinicon</a></b>, +<b><a href="bmptopnm.html">bmptopnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 by Lee Benfield. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/xpmtoppm.html b/xpmtoppm.html index 297b76e4..ff526106 100644 --- a/xpmtoppm.html +++ b/xpmtoppm.html @@ -1,48 +1,52 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Xpmtoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>xpmtoppm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Xpmtoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>xpmtoppm</h1> Updated: 31 December 2011 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> xpmtoppm - convert an X11 pixmap to a PPM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>xpmtoppm</B> +<b>xpmtoppm</b> -[<B>--alphaout=</B>{<I>alpha-filename</I>,<B>-</B>}] -[<B>-verbose</B>] +[<b>--alphaout=</b>{<i>alpha-filename</i>,<b>-</b>}] +[<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>xpmfile</I>] +[<i>xpmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>xpbtoppm</b> reads an X11 pixmap (XPM version 1 or 3) as input and produces a PPM image as output. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>xpmtoppm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>--alphaout=</B><I>alpha-filename</I> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>--alphaout=</b><i>alpha-filename</i> -<DD><B>xpmtoppm</B> creates a PBM file containing the transparency +<dd><b>xpmtoppm</b> creates a PBM file containing the transparency mask for the image. If the input image doesn't contain transparency -information, the <I>alpha-filename</I> file contains all white -(opaque) transparency values. If you don't specify <B>--alphaout</B>, -<B>xpmtoppm</B> does not generate a transparency file, and if the input -image has transparency information, <B>xpmtoppm</B> simply discards +information, the <i>alpha-filename</i> file contains all white +(opaque) transparency values. If you don't specify <b>--alphaout</b>, +<b>xpmtoppm</b> does not generate a transparency file, and if the input +image has transparency information, <b>xpmtoppm</b> simply discards it. -<P>If you specify <B>-</B> as the filename, <B>xpmtoppm</B> writes the +<p>If you specify <b>-</b> as the filename, <b>xpmtoppm</b> writes the transparency output to Standard Output and discards the image. -<P>See <B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B> for one way to use +<p>See <b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b> for one way to use the transparency output file. <p><b>xpmtoppm</b> can't handle a line longer than 8K characters in @@ -50,14 +54,14 @@ the XPM input. If an input line exceeds this limit, <b>xpmtoppm</b> quits with an error message to that effect. Before Netpbm 10.30 (October 2005), the limit was 2K. -<DT><B>--verbose</B> +<dt><b>--verbose</b> -<DD> -<B>xpmtoppm</B> prints information about its processing on Standard Error. +<dd> +<b>xpmtoppm</b> prints information about its processing on Standard Error. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> <p><b>xpmtoppm</b> recognizes only a limited set of the features of XPM Version 3; i.e. it rejects as invalid many valid XPM images. @@ -73,29 +77,29 @@ comment that begins in Column 1 in the color table part of the file. <p>Before Netpbm 10.58 (March 2012), zero bytes per pixel causes the program to fail with a message about premature EOF on input. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmtoxpm.html">ppmtoxpm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppmtoxpm.html">ppmtoxpm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<P>Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. +<p>Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<P>Upgraded to work with XPM version 3 by Arnaud Le -Hors<<A HREF="mailto:lehors@mirsa.inria.fr">lehors@mirsa.inria.fr</A>>, +<p>Upgraded to work with XPM version 3 by Arnaud Le +Hors<<a href="mailto:lehors@mirsa.inria.fr">lehors@mirsa.inria.fr</a>>, Tue Apr 9 1991. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/xwdtopnm.html b/xwdtopnm.html index a88b8ca4..e0e6c3a3 100644 --- a/xwdtopnm.html +++ b/xwdtopnm.html @@ -1,22 +1,22 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Xwdtopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>xwdtopnm</H1> -Updated: 8 January 2010 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> - -<H2>NAME</H2> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Xwdtopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>xwdtopnm</h1> +Updated: 08 January 2010 +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> xwdtopnm - convert an X11 or X10 window dump file to a PNM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>xwdtopnm</B> +<b>xwdtopnm</b> [<b>-verbose</b>] [<b>-headerdump</b>] -[<I>xwdfile</I>] +[<i>xwdfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ on the input file - if it's black and white, the output is PBM. If it's grayscale, the output is PGM. Otherwise, it's PPM. The program tells you which type it is writing. -<P>Using this program, you can convert anything you can display on an +<p>Using this program, you can convert anything you can display on an X workstation's screen into a PNM image. Just display whatever you're interested in, run the <b>xwd</b> program to capture the contents of the window, run it through <b>xwdtopnm</b>, and then use <b>pamcut</b> @@ -48,7 +48,12 @@ configuration). In particular, it cannot convert one with more than 24 bits per pixel. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>xwdtopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <dl> <dt><b>-verbose</b> @@ -99,31 +104,31 @@ samples. You can quiet this warning with the <b>-quiet</b> <a href="index.html# (March 2009). -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pnmtoxwd.html">pnmtoxwd</A>, -<A HREF="pamendian.html">pamendian</A>, -<A HREF="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A>, +<a href="pnmtoxwd.html">pnmtoxwd</a>, +<a href="pamendian.html">pamendian</a>, +<a href="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a>, <b>xwd</b> man page -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> +<hr> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> <li><a href="#notes">NOTES</a> <ul> <li><a href="#twobytesamples">Two Byte Samples</a> </ul> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/zeisstopnm.html b/zeisstopnm.html index f1884c55..5df2818c 100644 --- a/zeisstopnm.html +++ b/zeisstopnm.html @@ -1,27 +1,27 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Zeisstopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>zeisstopnm</H1> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.3//EN"> +<html><head><title>Zeisstopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>zeisstopnm</h1> Updated: 15 June 1993 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> zeisstopnm - convert a Zeiss confocal file to PNM -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>zeisstopnm</B> +<b>zeisstopnm</b> [<b>-pgm</b> | <b>-ppm</b>] -[<I>zeissfile</I>] +[<i>zeissfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><B>zeisstopnm</B> reads a Zeiss confocal file as input and produces +<p><b>zeisstopnm</b> reads a Zeiss confocal file as input and produces a PNM image as output. <p>By default, the exact type of the output depends on the input file: @@ -30,36 +30,41 @@ which type it is writing. You can override the default with the <b>-pgm</b> and <b>-ppm</b> options. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-pgm</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>zeisstopnm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Force the output to be in PGM format. +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-pgm</b> -<DT><B>-ppm</B> +<dd>Force the output to be in PGM format. -<DD> +<dt><b>-ppm</b> + +<dd> Force the output to be in PPM format. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1993 by Oliver Trepte -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> |